ee Bs , 7 1 ° ; By) Fei Ww 7 \e ea) ; 7 a wh a i | é rh 7 ay A \ i ‘ 6 p ae vi raAS OF THE es - SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH. 2 TRANSACTIONS OF THE PFeeetw A 1 S OCTLET Y OF EDINBURGH. EDINBURGH : PUBLISHED BY ROBERT GRANT & SON, 107 PRINCES STREET, AND WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON. MDCCCCXVI. i Il. TI. LY, N= 5's VEL. VET: IX. ».@ XI. XII. XII. AIY; Published January 7, 1914. December 29, 1913. March 30, 1914. March 30, 1914. March 12, 1914. April 1, 1914. April 15, 1914. April 30, 1914. June 4, 1914. June 30, 1914. August 18, 1914. July 29, 1914. October 3, 1914 July 2, 1915. >: ” Vr Vale XVIII. Xx, XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. RXVIL- XXVIII Published May 5, 1915. December 9, 1914. February 26, 1915. March 10, 1916. April 13, 1915. May 11, 1915. May 11, 1915. May 11, 1915. May 20, 1915. May 20, 1915. May 20, 1915. May 22, 1915. June 22, 1915. August 24, 1915. CONTENTS. PART I. (1913-14) I. Sphzxrostoma ovale (Conostoma ovale et intermedium, Williamson), a Lower Carboniferous Ovule from Pettycur, Fifeshire, Scotland. By Marearer J. Benson, D.Sc., Professor of Botany in the Uni- versity of London, Head of the Department of Botany at the Royal Holloway College, Englefield Green, Surrey. Communicated by Dr R. Kinston, F.R.S. (Plates I and II), . , Pa et, 1 Il. Studies on the Pharmacological Action of Tetra-Alkyl-Ammonium Compounds. I. The Action of Tetra-Methyl-Ammonium Chloride. By Professor C. R. MarsHatt, : i eelth Il. Polychzxta of the family Nereide, collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition (1902-1904). By L. N. G. Ramsay, M.A., B.Se., Carnegie Research Scholar, Christ’s College, Cambridge. Communicated by Dr J. H. AsHwortu. (Plate I[I1), ; Bed al IV. On the Genus Porponia and Related Genera, Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By Professor OskAR CaRLGREN, Universitetets Zoologiska Institution, Lund. Communicated by Dr W. 8. Bruce. (Plate IV), -. . 2g) V. On the Fossil Flora of the Staffordshire Coal Fields. Part II].—The Fossil Flora of the Westphalian Series of the South Staffordshire Coal Field. By R. Kipsron, LL.D., F.R.S. (Plates V-XVI), Fee ae VI. The Anatomy of a New Species of Bathydoris, und the Affinities of the Genus: Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By T. J. Evans, M.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer in Zoology in the University of | Sheftield. Communicated by Dr J. H. AsHwortn. (Plates XVII and XVIII), . : . LS al NUMBER Vil. VILE IX. XI. XII. XIII. CONTENTS. Rupture Stresses in Beams and Crane Hooks. By Ancus R. Futron, B.Sc., A.M. Inst.C.E., Engineering Department, University College, Dundee. Communicated by Professor A. H. Grsson, D.8ce., A.M. Inst.C.E., Scottish National Antarctic Expedition: A Description of the Systematic Anatomy of a Fatal Sea-Leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyx), with Remarks upon the Microscopical Anatomy of some of the Organs. By Harotp Axet Hate, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., late Lecturer in Histology and Embryology, University College, Cardiff ; M‘Robert Research Fellow, University of Aberdeen.. Communicated by Professor ARTHUR Rosinson, M.D. (Plates XIX—XXII), PART IL (1913-14.) Stalk-eyed Crustacea Malacostraca of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By Rev. THomas R. R. Sreppine, M.A, F.R.S., F.L.8., F.Z.S., Hon. Fellow of Worcester College, Oxford. Communicated by Dr J. H. Ashwortu. (Plates XXIII-XXXIJ), . The Aborigines of Tasmana. Part Ill. The Hair of the Head compared with that of other Ulotricht and with Australians and Polynesians. By Principal Sir Witiiam Turner, K.C.B., D.C.L., F.R.W., ght of the Royal Prussian Order Pour le Mérite, Emeritus Professor of Anatony. (With Figures in Text), The Pinna-Trace in the Ferns. By R. C. Davis, M.A., B.Sc., late Robert Donaldson Research Scholar in the University of Glasgow, Lecturer in Botany in the University of Edinburgh. Communicated by Professor I. BayLey Baxrour, F.R.8. (Plates XXXITI-XXXV), Studies on the Pharmacological Action of Tetra-Alkyl-Ammonvum Compounds. IL. The Action, of Tetra-Ethyl-Ammonium Chloride. By Professor C. R. Marsuaty. (With Figures in Text), Rocks from Gough Island, South Atlantic (collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, 1902-1904). By Ropert CAMPBELL, M.A., D.Se., Lecturer in Petrology in the University of Edinburgh. Communicated by Professor JAMES Guixin, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. (Plate XXXVI), PAGE 211 225 253 309 349 397 CONTENTS. vil NUMBER PAGE XIV. On a New Species of Sclerocheilus, with a Revision of the Genus. By J. H. Asuwortn, D.Sc., Lecturer in Invertebrate Zoology in the University of Edinburgh. (Plate XXXVII, and Four Text-figures), 405 XV. Atlantic Sponges collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By Jane SrerHens, B.Sc. Communicated by Dr W.S. Bruce. (Plates XXXVIII-XL), . 423 XVI. On the Fossil Osmundacexr. By R. Kipston, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., Foreign Mem. Imper. Mineralogical Society of Petrograd, Hon. Sec. R.S.E.; and D. T. Gwynne-Vaucuan, M.A., F.R.S.E., M.R.1LA., Professor of Botany, University College, Reading. (Plates XLI- XLIV), 469 XVIL Studies on the Pharmacological Action of Tetra-Alkyl- Ammonium Compounds. Ill. The Action of Methyl - Kthyl- Ammonum Chlorides. By Professor C. R. MaRsHALL, . . A48i PART IIL (1913-14.) XVIII. The Mistology of Disseminated Sclerosis. By James W. Dawson, M.D., Neurological Histologist to the Royal College of Physicians’ Laboratory ; formerly Carnegie Research Fellow. To which is prefaced a Preliminary Communication on the subject made to the Pathological Society of Great Britain and Ireland by the late ALEXANDER Bruce, M.D., LL.D., and James W. Dawson, M.D. Communicated by A. Nintan Bruce, M.D. (Plates XLV- LXXVII), HAY PART IV. (1913-14) XIX. Temperature Observations in Loch. Earn. Part Il. By HE. M. WEDDERBURN, D.Sc., and A. W. Young, M.A., B.Sc., ; a cal XX. On Hemonais laurentii, n. sp., a Representative of w little-known Genus of Naidide. By J. SrmpHenson, D.Sc., Professor of Zoology, Government College, Lahore. (Plate LXXIX), SS) vill NUMBER XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXYV. XXVI. XXVIL. XXVIII. INDEX, CONTENTS. On a Rule of Proportion observed in the Setx of certaan Nardida. By J. SrepHenson, M.B., D.Sc., Professor of fas Government College, Lahore, On the Seaual Phase in certain of the Nardide. I. The Anatomy of Sexual Individuals of the Genus Dero; with Remarks on Hemonais. II. The Genital Organs in the Genus Slavina. By J. StePHENSON, D.Se., Professor of Zoology, Government College, Lahore. (Plate LXXX), Geological Observations in South Georgia. By D. Frreuson, Mem. Inst. M.E., F.R.G.S. Communicated by Professor J. W. GreEcory, D.Sc., F.R.S. (Plates LXXXI-XCI), The Geological Relations and Some Fossils of South Georgia. By J. W. Grecory, D.S8c., F.R.S. (Plates XCII-XCIII), The Petrology of South Georgia. By G. W. Tyrreu, A.R.C.Sc., F.G.S., Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrology, University of Glasgow. (Plate XCIV), The Anatomy and Affinity of Deparia Moorei, Hook. By Joun M‘Lean Tuompson, M.A., B.Sc., Glasgow University. Communicated by Professor BowEr. (Plates XCV-XCVII), Morphology and Mathematics. By D'Arcy Wentworts THompeson, The Poisoned Arrows of the Abors and Mishmas of North-East India, and the Composition and Action of their Poisons. By Sir THomas R. Fraser, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Materia Medica and Thera- peutics in the University of Edinburgh. (Plates XCVIII-C), AANEH EH MUSE SS “ag i 2 s Sg es f oh : &. 4 <> Tura, wer’ PAGE 783 789 197 817 823 837 897 931 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH. VOLUME L. PART I.—SESSION 1913-14. CONTENTS. PAGR ; I. Sphezrostoma ovale (Conostoma ovale et intermedium, Williamson), a Lower Carboniferous Ovule from Pettycur, Fifeshire, Scotland. By Maraarer J. Benson, D.Sc., Professor of Botany in the University of London, Head of the Department of Botany at the Royal ong College, Englefield Green, age Communicated ns Dik: Tone F.R.S. (Plates I. and II.), 5 p ] andes Fandiers 7 1914. iy TT Studies on the Pharmacoloaical_Action of Tetra-alkul-ammonium Compounds. 1. The Action R. MARSHALL, ‘ ; ; Ws 2) tush National Antarctic Expedition Jarnegie Research Scholar, Christ’s oRTH. (Plate III.), 2 . 41 {,) Vational Antarctic Expedition. By Institution, Lund. Communicated gy v. On tie Fossil Flora of the Staffordshire Coal Fields. Part I1I.—The Fossil Flora of the Westphalian Series uf the South Sey Coal Field. Ps R. Kinston, LL.D., F.R.S. (Plates V.-XVT.), : : : : 73 Sacred Mareh 12, 1914.) 49 VI. The Anatomy of a New Species of Bathydoris, and the Affinities of the Genus: Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By T. J. Evans, M.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer in Zoology in the University of Sheffield. Communicated by Dr J. H. AsHwortru. (Plates XVII. and XVIIL.), & a akon (Issued April 1, 1914.) VII. Rupture Stresses in Beams and Crane Hooks. By Aneus R. Futon, B.Sc., A.M. Inst.C.E., - * 4 ‘ Engineering Department, University Goreees Dundee. Communicated by Professor A. H. Ro gs ’ Grson, D.Sc., A.M.Inst.C.E., ; ; : : ‘ oak ih (Issued yee 15, 1914. ) ane ta VIII. Scottish National Antarctic Expedition: A Description of the Systematic Anatomy of a Foetal nie 74 Sea-Leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyx), with Remarks upon the Microscopical Anatomy of Wares some of the Organs. By Harotp Axet Hate, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., late Lecturer in Histology and Embryology, University College, Cardiff; M‘Robert Research Fellow, University of Aberdeen. Communicated by Professor ARTHUR Ropinson, M.D. (Plates XIX.-XXI1Z.), , : : i 5 . - . d ys aa00 7 ‘ (Issued April 30, 1914.) EDINBURGH: PUBLISHED BY ROBERT GRANT & SON, 107 PRINCES STREET, AND WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET. COVENT GARDEN, LONDON, MDCCCCXIY. Price Twenty-five Shillings and Ninepence. vill NUMBER XXI. XXII. XAT XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. XXVIII. INDEX, CONTENTS. On a Rule of Proportion observed in the Setx of certain Naidide. By J. SrepHensoy, M.B., D.Sc., Professor of Zoology, Government College, Lahore, ; ' On the Sexual Phase in certain of the Naididx. 1. The Anatomy of Sexual Individuals of the Genus Dero; with Remarks on Hemonas. Il. The Genital Organs in the Genus Slavina. By J. STEPHENSON, D.Se., Professor of Zoology, Government College, Lahore. (Plate LXXX), ; ; Geological Observations in South Georgia. By D. Frereuson, Mem. Inst. M.E., F.R.G.S. Communicated by Professor J. W. GREGorRY, D.Se., F.R.S. (Plates LZ The Geological Relations « J. W. Grecory, D.Sc., F. The Petrology of South ¢ F.G.8., Lecturer in Mi Glasgow. (Plate XCIV), The Anatomy and Affinit. ee M‘Lean Tuompeson, M.A., B.Sc., Glasgow University. Communicated by Professor Bowgr. (Plates XCV-XCVII), Morphology and Mathematics. By D'Arcy Wentworta THomeson, The Poisoned Arrows of the Abois and Mishmis of North-East India, and the Composition and Action of their Poisons. By Sir THomas R. Fraser, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Materia Medica and Thera- peutics in the University of Edinburgh. (Plates XCVIII-C), ee MUSES. byes axa) TUpar ier’ Y PAGE 783 789 837 857 897 931 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH. VOLUME L. PART I.—SESSION 1913-14. CONTENTS. PAGR hy I. Sphzrostoma ovale (Conostoma ovale et intermedium, Williamson), a Lower Carboniferous : Ovule from Pettycur, Fifeshire, Scotland. By Marearsr J. Bunson, D.Sc., Professor of Botany in the University of London, Head of the Department of Botany at the Royal Ae sei College, Pape Green, “hae Communicated ce Dr. REREION, F.R.S. (Plates I. and II.), ] (Geagea Tanda i, 1914. ie II. Studies on the Pharmacological Action of Tetra-alkyl-ammonium Compounds. 1. The Action of Tetra-methyl-ammonium Chloride. By Professor C. R. MarsHatt, : : : 17 (Issued December 29, 1913.) III. Polychxta of the family Nereidz, collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition (1902-1904). By L. N. G. Ramsay, M.A., B.Sc., Carnegie Research Scholar, Christ’s College, Cambridge. Communicated by Dr J. H. Asawortu. (Plate III.), ; : 41 (Issued March 30, 1914.) IV. On the Genus Porponia and Related Genera, Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By Professor Oskar Caricren, Universitetets gous Institution, Lund. Communicated by Dr W. 8S. Brucz. (Plate EY); ‘ ; ; : : 49 (Issued March 30, 1914. ‘ie V. On the Fossil Flora of the Staffordshire Coal Fields. Part I1I.—The Fossil Flora of the Westphalian Series ov the South ea ema Coal Field. Sl R. Kinston, LL.D., F.R.S. (Plates V.-XVL.), ‘ ; : : 730 Gaceed Maren 12, 1914.) ox } VI. The Anatomy of a New Species of Bathydortis, and the Affinities of the Genus: Scottish National ae ' Antarctic Expedition. By T. J. Evans, M.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer in Zoology in the University eee m of Sheffield. Communicated by Dr J. H. Asawortu. (Plates XVII. and XVIII), Hot ; Co (Issued April 1, 1914.) VII. Rupture Stresses in Beams and Crane Hooks. By Aneus R. Futon, B.Sc., A.M. Inst.C.E., - Engineering Department, University College, Dundee. Communicated by Professor A. H. Gipson, D.Sc., A.M. Inst.C.E., : : é : : . : por.) Bl (Issued April 15, 1914.) VIII. Scottish National Antarctic Expedition: A Description of the Systematic Anatomy of a Fetal Sea-Leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyx), with Remarks upon the Microscopical Anatomy of some of the Organs. By Harotp Axet Hate, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., late Lecturer in Histology and Embryology, University College, Cardiff; M‘Robert Research Fellow, University of Aberdeen. Communicated by Professor ARTHUR Rosinson, M.D. (Plates Wh XIX.-XXIL), ; : ; : ; : : ; 3 ~ 225 , (Issued April 30, 1914.) EDINBURGH: PUBLISHED BY ROBERT GRANT & SON, 107 PRINCES STREET, AND WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET. COVENT GARDEN, LONDON, MDCCCCXIV. Price Twenty-fivé Shillings and Ninepence. 2 PROF. MARGARET J. BENSON ON divergence from the type under consideration than was formerly suspected—in fact, as the authors of the above treatise suggest, the resemblances of Spharostoma with Lagenostoma are greater than with Conostoma.* Hence one has been obliged to found a new form-genus for the geologically older type, and the term Sphxrostoma was chosen because of the rounded form of the free part of the nucellus within which lies the pollen chamber. Before proceeding to deseribe the ovule, | wish to express my indebtedness to Professor I. BayLEy Batrour, who presented me with the large block of Burntisland rock from which all but two of the slides used in the present paper have been obtained. One of these is a slide most generously put at my disposal by Dr D. H. Scorv, F.R.S. In the course of the paper it will be shown how much is derived from this slide which, as a section of a Pettycur petrifaction, cannot, I think, be surpassed for beauty of workmanship and interest of content. I take this opportunity of expressing my gratitude to Dr Scorr for this loan. The other slide is a fine radial section of the ovule, cut by Dr Gorpon, a photograph of which Dr Gorpon has been kind enough to send me (vide Pl. II. fig. 8). Sphxrostoma ovale has so far only been recorded from Pettycur deposits of the Calciferous Sandstone series of Scotland. In these it occurs at rare intervals, but generally, when found, is fairly abundant. About fifty have been sectioned from the above-mentioned block, but owing to the impossibility of orienting such small objects, a large proportion are cut obliquely. They are always closely associated with the vegetative organs of Heterangyum Grievit, and hence the ovule has long been suspected of being the megasporangial apparatus of this most fern-like of all would-be Pteridosperms. Deferring the evidence which I consider places this surmise upon a surer basis, it will be best to describe the ovule in detail. II. GENERAL FEATURES OF THE ORGANISATION OF THE OVULE, (Text-figs. 1 and 2.) In its complete state the ovule consists of two parts—-a central body representing the nucellus and inner integument, and an enveloping cupule or outer integument. For convenience, the inner part will often be referred to as the ovule, for it is most common to find it bereft of its cupule. A reference to text-fig. 1, which represents a restoration of a median longitudinal section of both parts, will readily show their relationship to one another, especially if this restoration be compared with that in text-fig. 2, ¢. Without the cupule the ovule is 3°5 mm. in length and about 2°2 mm. at its widest part. At first sight its most striking feature is the series of crests forming the so- called “frill” around the micropyle (text-fig. 1, /.). * Oniver and SALIsBuRY, loc. cit., p. 38. SPH HZROSTOMA OVALE FROM PETTYCUR, FIFESHIRE. 3 Within the sinus (sz.), surrounded by the free part of the inner integument or “canopy ” (ca.), may be seen the nucellar cap (v.c.) or free part of the nucellus. This Pad A x i yin Re. we (SN . XK NN % SR o, N SN ———s— pli. dig. ls pl. a figs. 2, 3; pl. iv. fig. 1; pl..xvit. fig. 5; pl. xxvii. fig. 3. 1886. 5 ‘ Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houtl. d. Valen., p. 338, pl. liv. figs. 2, 3; pl. lv. fig. 1. Note.—Common. Horizons and Localities. — Above Brooch Coal: Oldbury ; Himley ; Shut End, near Kingswinford ; Holly Hall, near Dudley. Shales, thirty yards above Thick Coal: Hamstead Colliery, Great Barr, near Birmingham. Roof of Thick Coal: Bradley Colliery, Bilston. Immediately below Thick Coal: Yew Tree Colliery, Rowley Regis. White Ironstone: Sandwell Park Colliery, West Bromwich. Roof of Bottom Coal: No. 120 Pit, Coneygre Colliery, Tipton. a Parkfield, near Wolverhampton. 2 Russell’s Hall, Dudley. 118 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Calamites Cisti Brongt. 1828. Calamites Cistii, Brongt., Hist. d. végét. foss., p. 129, pl. xx. 1886. e 5 Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin howil. d. Valen., p. 342, pl. lvi. figs. 1, 2. Note.—Not very common. Horizon and Localities.—Roof of Brooch Coal: Oldbury, near Dudley; Shut End, near Kingswinford ; Pensnett. Calamites undulatus Sternb. 1826. Calamites undulatus, Sternb., Essai flore monde prim., vol. i. fase. iv. p. 263 vol. ii. fase. v.-vi. p. 47, pl. i. fig. 2 (? pl. xx. fig. 8). 1828. ‘ “ Brongt., Hist. d. végét. foss., p. 127, pl. xvii. figs. 1-4. 1886. 3 9 Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houtl. d. Valen., p. 338, pl. liv. figs. 1 and 4. Note.—This plant, usually so common, I have only received from a single locality. This apparent rareness of Calamites undulatus in the South Stafford Coal Field may possibly arise from the plant having been passed over in collecting. Horizon and Locality.—Roof of Brooch Coal: Shut End, near Kingswinford. Calamites Waldenburgensis Kidston. 1828. Calamites approximatus, Brongt. (non Schl.) (pars), Hist. d. végét. foss., p. 133, pl. xxiv. figs. 2, 3 (? figs. 4, 5). 1855. re = Geinitz (pars), Vers. d. Steinkf. in Sachsen, p. 7, pl. xi. fig. 5, pl. xii. fig. 3. 1887. . * Stur (pars), Calamarien d. Carbon-Flora d. Schatz. Schichten, p. 119, pl. v. fig. 3, pl. viii. fig, 4. 1893. Calamitina approximata, Kidston, Trans. Roy. Soc. Hdin., vol. xxxvii. p. 311, pl. ii. figs. 5, 6. 1903. Calamites Waldenburgensis, Kidston, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xl. p. 789. TONE ~ 5 Jongmans, Anleitung, vol. i. p. 57, figs. 65, 66. Note.—Rare. Horizons and Localities.— Ten-foot Ironstone Measures : Cabbage Hall Pit, Netherton. Roof of Fireclay Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. Below Bottom. Coal: Ruiton, near Sedgley. Calamites Schutzei Stur. 1887. Calamites Schutzet, Stur, Calamarien d. Carbon-Flora d. Schatz. Schichten, p. 131, pl. iii. figs. 2, 26; pl. iv.; pl. iv.d, fig. 1; pl. xvii. fig. 2; text-figs, 33-38. Note.—Rare. Horizon and Locality.—Roof of Fireclay Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 119 Calamites ramosus Artis. 1825. Calamites ramosus, Artis, Antedil. Phyt., pl. il. Note.—Frequent. Horizons and Localities. — Roof of Brooch Coal: Oldbury ; Shut End, near Kingswinford. Brooch Binds Ironstone: Pensnett; Himley. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Roof of Fireclay Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. Below Bottom Coal: Ruiton, near Sedgley. Calamites Britannicus Weiss. 1888. Hucalamites (Calamites) Britannicus, Weiss, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. ii. p. 131, pl. vii. 1911. Calamites Britannicus, Jongmans, Anleitung, p. 123, fig. 118. Note.—Very rare. Only a single specimen of this species has been found by Mr C. BEALE in 1888. GEINITZ unites this species with his Calamitina oculata, but I believe the two species are quite distinct.* Horizon and Locality.—Above Thick Coal: Shut End near Kingswinford. Calamites sp.: Rhizomatic tuber. Pi IX. fig. 2. Remarks.—A rhizomatic tuber of-a Calamite is shown on Pl. IX. fig. 2, natural size. These tuberous structures, though well known to occur on some species of Hquwisetum, have not been previously known to occur on Calamites, as far as | am aware. ‘The specimen, which is preserved in an ironstone nodule, shows an inflation of the rhizome about 2°50 cm. long and 1 cm. wide at its centre. The tuber consists of three internodes, measuring respectively 1°30 cm., 0°70 cm., and 0°50 em., of which the centre internode is the widest; the two end ones narrow into the rhizome, which, where they join it, is about 8 mm. wide. At one end of the fossil only one internode of the rhizome is preserved, which is apparently incomplete, but measures 1 cm. in length. At the other end the rhizome decreases quickly in width and is much thinner, and contains seven very short internodes. Both the tuber and rhizome are distinctly ribbed, and rootlets are given off from all the nodes. This interesting specimen was collected by Mr H. W. Hucues. Horizon and Locality.—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, - Coseley, near Dudley. * GriniTZ, “ Die Calamarien der Steinkohlen-Formation u. d. Roethl. in Dresdener Museum,” Mitt, kongl. Miner.- Geol. u. Prachis. Museum im Dresden, Vierzehntes Heft, p. 12, pl. i. figs. 1, 2, 1898. 120 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Asterophyllites Brongniart. Asterophyllites equisetiformis Schl., sp. 1804. Schlotheim, Flora d. Vorwelt, p. 30, pl. i. figs. 1, 2; pl. il. fig. 3. 1820. Casuarinites equisetiformis, Schloth., Petrefactenkunde, p. 397. 1828. Asterophyllites equisetiformis, Brongt., Prodrome, p. 158. 1845. 5 43 Germar, Vers. v. Wettin wu. Libejun, p. 21, pl. viii. 1886. 5 Es Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houil. d. Valen., p. 368, pl. lviii. figs. 1-7. TY ~ Jongmans, Anleitung, i. p. 204, figs. 163-168. 1869. Calamocladus peenforae Schimper, Travté d. paléont. végét., vol. i. p. 324, pl. xxii. figs. 1, 2, 3. 1836. Hippurites longifolia, L. & H., Fossil Flora, vol. iii. pls. exe., exci. 1876. Calamostachys, Boulay, apr, houtl. du Nord de la France et ses végétaux foss., p. 24, pl. i. figs. 2, 2 bis. 1876. Calamostachys germanica, Weiss, Steink. Calamar., part i. p. 47, pl. xvi. figs. 3, 4. Note.—Very plentiful. Both sterile branchlets and cones. Horizons and Localities. — Blue Measures, above Brooch ‘Coal: Jubilee Pit, Sandwell Park, West Bromwich ; Hamstead Colliery, Great Barr, near Birmingham. Roof of Brooch Coal: Himley; Shut End; Pensnett; Bilston; Holly Hall, near Dudley. Brooch Binds Ironstone: Pensnett. Roof of Thick Coal: Bradley Colliery, Bilston. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley ; Kttingshall. Heathen Coal: Dudley. Between Fireclay Coal and Bottom Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton ; Ruiton, near Sedgley. Asterophyllites longifolius Sternb., s 1826. Bruckmannia longifolia, Sternb., Lssat flore monde prim., vol. i. fasc. iv. p. xxix and p. 50, pl. lviii. fig. 1. 1828. Asterophyllites longifolia, Brongt., Prodrome, p. 159. 1831. . a L. & H., Fossil Flora, vol. i., pl. xviii. 1888. Asterophyllites longifolius, Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houtl. d. Valen., p. 374, pl. lix. fig. 3. 1911. re i Kidston, Mém. Musée roy. @hist. nat. de Belgique, vol. iv. p. 118. WGI ss 7 Jongmans, Anlettung, vol. 1. p. 214, figs. 175-177. Note.—Very rare. Horizon and Locality.—Ten - foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Asterophyllites grandis Sternb., s 1826. Bechera grandis, Sternb., Essai flore monde prim., vol. i. fase. iv. pp. xxx and 46, pl. xlix. fig. 1. 1836. 5 BS L. & H., Fossil Hora, vol. iii., pl. clxxiii. (non vol. i., pl. xix. fig. 1). 1886. Asterophyllites grandis, Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houil. d. Valen., p. 376, pl. lix. figs. 4-7. 1911. . - Jongmans, Anlettung, vol. 1, p. 224, fig. 185. FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 121 Note.—Rare. Horizons and Localities. — Brooch Binds Ironstone: Pensnett. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Asterophyllites chareeformis Sternb., sp. 1826. Bechera charzformis, Sternb., Essai flore monde prim., vol. i. fasc. iv. p. xxx, pl. lv. fig. 3 (? fig. 5). 1845. Asterophyllites chareformis, Unger., Syn. plant. foss., p. 33. WOT. ae 55 Kidston, Mém. Musée roy. @hist. nat. de Belgique, p. 119, pl. xi. figs. 2, 3, 3a, 4, 5. 1911. ss Ne Jongmans, An/eitung, vol. i. p. 232, figs. 190, 191. Note.—Not very common. Horizon and Locality.—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Annularia Sternberg. Annularia radiata Brongt. 1822. Asterophyllites radiatus, Brongt., Class. d. végét. foss., p. 35, pl. ii. figs. 7a and 7. 1826. Annularia radiata, Sternb., Hssai flore monde prim., vol. i. fase. iv. p. 31. 1886. a », Geiller, Flore foss. bassin houtl. d. Valen., p. 394, pl. lix. fig. 8, pl. xi. hes, 1, 12. 1911. 5 » Jongmans, Anleitung, vol. i. p. 252, figs. 206-208 (? fig. 209). Note.—Common. Under this name are included the foliage branches of Calamites ramosus Artis, but most probably also those of other species. Horizons and Localities. — Roof of Brooch Coal: Shut End, near Kingswinford ; Holly Hall, near Dudley. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley ; Kttingshall. Roof of Thick Coal: Bradley Colliery, Bilston. Roof of Fireclay Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. Between Fireclay Coal and Bottom Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. Annularia galioides L. & H., sp. 1804. Parkinson, Organic Remains, vol. i. pl. v. fig. 1. 1832. Asterophyllites galioides, L. & H., Fossil Flora, vol. i. p. 79, pl. xxv. fig. 2. 1893. Annularia gulioides, Kidston, Trans. Roy. Soc, Edin., vol. xxxvii. p. 317, pl. ii. fig. 4. 1899. ' . Zeiller, Etude sur la flore foss, d. bassin howil. d’Héraclée, p. 63, pl. v. figs. 16, 17. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 5). 16 122 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE 1886. Annularia microphylla, Zeiller (non Sauveur), Flore foss, d. bassin houtl. de Valen., p. 392, pl. Ix. figs. 3, 4. 1887. 3 " Stur (non Sauveur), Calamaraen d. Carbon-Flora d. Schatzlarer Schichten, p. 211, pl. xiv. figs. 8, 9; pl. xv.d, fig. 2. 1907. * 3 Zalessky (non Sauveur), Bull. Comité géol. (St Pétersbourg), vol. xxvi, p: 429, pl. xviii. fig. 3. 1869. Annularia minuta, Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., vol. xiii. p. 347, pl. viii. fig. 2. 1884. < » Lesqx., Coal Flora, vol. iii. p. 725, pl. xcii. fig. 8. Remarks.—Until quite recently I believed that Annularia microphylla Sauveur * was synonymous with the Annularia galoides L. & H., sp. In this view I think I have been mistaken, and now identify as SauvEvrR’s plant specimens that have been in my collection for some years, and which have been derived from different localities, but which I had hitherto failed to identify. It may be stated here that in Annularia nucrophylla Sauveur the leaves are sickle-shaped and much narrower in proportion to their length than those of Annularia galiordes L. & H., sp. Annularia macrophylla Sauveur does not occur in this coal field, so a description of that plant is given in an Appendix to this paper, along with figures for comparison with Annularia galioides L. & H. All the plants which in the past I have recorded under the name of Annulania galiordes do, however, belong to that species, which is not common in the South Staffordshire Coal Field. : Horizons and Localities.— Ten-foot Ironstone Measures : Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Roof of Thick Coal: Bradley Colliery, Bilston. Annularia sphenophylloides Zenker, sp. 1833. Galiwm sphenophylloides, Zenker, Neues Jahrb., p. 398, pl. v. figs. 6-9. 1837. Annularia sphenophylloides, Gutbier, Isis, p. 436. 1882. ss > Sterzel, Zettsch. d. deut. geol. Gesell., vol. xxxiv. p. 685, pl. xxvilil. figs. 1-10. 1886. 5 5 Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin howil. d. Valen. p. 388, pl. lx. figs. 5, 6. 1911. “5 - Jongmans, Anleitwng, vol. i. p. 260, figs. 211, 212. 1887, Annularia sarepontana, Stur, Calamarien d. Carbon-Flora d. Schatzlarer Schichten, p. 221, pl. xiii.d, fig. 1; pl. xiii.b (d7s), fig. 1. Cones. 1876. Stachannularia calathifera, Weiss, Steink. Calamarien, Heft i. p. 27, pl. iii. fig. 11. 1884. Calamostachys, cf. calathifera, Weiss, ibid., Heft ii. p. 178. Note.—Very rare. Horizon and Locality.—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. * Vege. foss. d. terr. howil. d. Belgique, pl. lxix. fig, 6, 1848. FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 123 Annularia stellata Schl., s Pl. IX. figs. 1 and la. 1804. Schlotheim, Flora d. Vorwelt, p. 32, pl. i. fig. 4. 1820. Casuarinites stellatus, Schloth., Petrefactenkunde, p. 397. 1860. Annularia stellata, Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences Phil., p, 236. 1886. on Rs Zeiller, Flore foss. bassin houtl. d. Valen., p. 398, pl. 1xi. figs. 3-6. 1911. a Jongmans, Anleitung, vol. i. p. 238, figs. 193-196, 200-203. 1845. ata longifolia, Germar, Vers. v. Wettin u. Lobejun, p. 25, pl. ix. figs. 1-4. Cones. 1826. Bruckmannia tuberculata, Sternb., Hssat flore monde prim., vol. i. fasc, iv. pp. 45 and xxix, pl. xlv. fig. 2. 1876. Stachannularia tubereulata, Weiss, Steinkohlen Calamarien, Hefti. p. 17, pl. i. figs. 2-5, pl. ii. figs. 1-3 and 5 (left-hand figure), pl. iii. figs. 3-10, 12. 1884. Calamostachys (Stachannularia) tuberculata, Weiss, ibid., Heft ii. p. 178. Remarks.—The largest whorls of leaves on this specimen are only 1°30 cm. in diameter, but notwithstanding their comparatively small size I have no hesitation in referring the fossil to Annularia stellata. ‘The specimen is shown natural size on Pl. [X. fig. 1, and a portion enlarged 2 times at fig. la. The leaves are lanceolate spathulate and single-veined. Their widest part is about 3 of their length from the base, and they terminate in subacute or blunt points. They agree in form perfectly with the leaves of Annularia stellata Schl., sp., and only differ in size. This, however, may be explained by the specimen having occupied a position near the termination of a branch, or even possibly having been part of a young individual. In size the whorls are less than in Annularva sphenophyllordes, var. intermedia, Lesqx., as figured by SeLLaRDs,* but in this plant the leaves are broadly spathulate with blunt apices, quite typical of Annularia sphenophylloides, whereas the leaves of the Sandwell specimen are typical in form with those of Annularia stellata. This and another specimen from the same locality are the only examples I have yet seen from the Westphalian of Britain, but it occurs very near the top of the series. Annularia stellata has, however, been recorded from the Westphalian Series of the Continent. . Horizon and Locality.— Blue Measures, above Brooch Coal: Jubilee Pit, Sandwell Park, West Bromwich. Calamostachys Schimper. Calamostachys Solmsi Weiss. Pl. IX. figs. 4, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d. 1876. Macrostachya infundibuliformis, var. Solmsi, Weiss, Steink. Calam., Heft i. p. 73, pl. xviii. fig. 1 (pars), figs. 3, 3a, and 4. 1884. Calamostachys Solmsi, Weiss, Steink. Calam., Heft ii. p. 177. 1911. a a Jongmans, Anleitung, vol. i. p. 288, fig. 236. * Foss. Plants, Upper Paleozoic, Kansas, p. 425, pl. liii. fig. 5, 1908, 124 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Description.—Cone heterosporous, pedicellate, complete length and apical portion unknown ; cylindrical, of almost equal width, but gradually narrowing upwards and from 12 to 16 mm. wide, internodes from 5 to 7°5 mm. long. Bracts about length of internode or slightly longer, broadly lanceolate, with a base about 1°3 mm. wide, outer surface longitudinally striated and slightly keeled. Sporangiophores placed on the axis mid-way between the bract verticils as in Calamostachys, but the form of sporangio- phore and attachment of sporangia unknown. Microsporangia and megasporangia occur on same verticil and throughout all regions of the cone. Megaspores «573 to ».648 in diameter, with small triradiate ridge, outer surface smooth. Microspores #115 to #1380 in diameter, smooth, with small triradiate ridge. Remarks.—The cone is incomplete at the apex, but the portion preserved is 11°50 cm. long, and is given natural size on Pl. [X. fig. 4, and a portion enlarged 2 times at fig. 4a. It contracts at the base, where it is attached to a finely striated and, as far as preserved, unjointed pedicel 2 cm. long and 5 mm. wide. The broadest part of the cone is about 2 cm. above its base, where it is 1°60 cm. wide. From this point it gradually narrows upwards, and about 7 cm. from the base it is 1°40 cm. wide. Above this no satisfactory measurements can be made, as one of the margins is slightly covered by the matrix. The cone shows 19 internodes, which vary from 6 mm. in length at the base to about 5 mm. at the top of the specimen. The bracts are broadly lanceolate, about 7 mm. long, and terminate in sharp fine points which extend very slightly beyond the node next above them. They have a striated outer surface, and some of them show indications of a central keel, but no mid- rib is observable. There appear to have been 16 or 18 bracts in a verticil, as 8 or 9 are seen on the exposed surface of the cone. The sporangiophores are not seen on the specimen. Small portions of the carbonaceous remains of the cone were removed from the base, the middle, and from near the top of the specimen, which were treated by the maceration process, when in all cases, even though the material operated on was small, the samples yielded microspores and megaspores. It would appear, then, that each verticil bore both microsporangia and megasporangia, and that the two forms of spores were not restricted to a special region of the cone. Some microspores enlarged 50 times are given at Pl. IX. fig. 4b, and one enlarged 500 times is seen at fig. 4c, and a megaspore enlarged 50 times is shown at fig. 4d. Both microspores and megaspores do not seem to have been fully ripe, as their walls are thin and much crumpled. ‘Their outer surface is smooth, and they are provided with a small triradiate ridge. This is shown on the microspore at fig. 4c. On only one case could I discover the triradiate ridge on a megaspore, and it was feebly developed ; this, as well as their crumpled condition, indicates a somewhat early state of development. The occurrence in the same verticil, and at different FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 125 heights on the cone, of megasporangia and microsporangia, as evidenced by the occur- rence of the two forms of spores, is an interesting character of this cone. This species, which was collected by Mr H. W. Hucuss, has not previously been recorded in Britain. Horizon and Locality.Roof of New Mine Coal: Clattershall Colliery, Brettell Lane. Calamostachys sp. Among some specimens found at Netherton were fragments ofa small Calamostachys. None of the cones were complete, they are only 2°5 mm. broad, including the spread of the arcuate bracts, and the internodes are about 1 mm. long. ‘The bracts bend gently upwards, and are rather more than one internode long. It is larger than the Calamostachys ? nana Weiss,* and does not appear to belong to any known species; but the material is too fragmentary for a satisfactory description. The specimens were collected by Mr H. W. Hucuus. Horizon and Locality.—Between Fireclay Coal and Bottom Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. (K. No. 4620.) Calamostachys sp. Horizon and Locality.—Ten-foot Ivonstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. (K. No. 824.) Paleostachya Weiss. Paleostachya Ettingshauseni Kidston. Pl. IX. figs. 3, 3a—3c. 1854. Calamites cwummunis, Ett. (pars), Steinkohlenf. v. Radnitz, p. 24, pl. viii. figs. 1 and 4. 1869. Volkmannia elongata, Roehl (non Presl), Foss. Flora Steink.-Form. Westph., p. 19, pl. vii. fig. 1. 1869. Calamostachys typica, Schimper (pars), Traité d. paléont. végét., vol. i. p. 328 (pl. xxiii. fig. i.%), vol. iii. p. 457. 1890. Sp 35 Kidston, Trans. York. Nat. Union, pp. 14, 23. 1909. Calamostachys ? typica, Arber, Fossil Plants, p. 74, fig. 57. 1884. Calamostachys Ludwigt, Weiss (pars), Steinkohlen Calamarien, part ii. p. 163, pl. xviii. fig. 2 (non pl. xxii. figs, 1-8, pl. xxiii., pl. xxiv.). 1903. Palzostachya Hitingshauseni, Kidston, Trans. Roy. Soc. Ldin., vol. xl. part iv. p. 794. 1911. 5 3 Jongmans, Anleitung, vol. 1. p. 327, figs. 284-286. 1887. Calamites Sachser, Stur (pars), Calamarien d. Schatz. Schichten, pp. 188, 189, pl. ii. fig. 7, pl. xi. fig. 7. Description.—Cone cylindrical, short-stalked, verticillate, apparently only four in each whorl, the panicle ending in a terminal cone; cones attaining a length of 7 cm. with a width of 80 mm. Internodes short, about 3.mm. long; bracts arcuate, * Steimkohlen Calamarien, Heft ii. p. 175, pl. xxi. fig. 10. 126 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE slightly spreading, apex sometimes incurved, and when perfect about the length of two internodes, more numerous than the sporangiophores. Probably six sporangio- phores in a whorl, which arise from the axil of a bract, each bearing four sporangia ; sporangia oval, homosporous. Microspores « 70 to » 100 in diameter, smooth, with a small triradiate ridge. Remarks.—The cone shown on Pl. IX. fig. 3, natural size, wants a small part of both the apex and the base, but is otherwise very well preserved. It is slightly contracted at the base, and probably little is missing from that end. The part preserved is 620 em. long and about 0°80 cm. wide measured across the sporangia, but the bracts extend further outwards. It contains eighteen short internodes about 3°75 mm. long. Unfortunately, the specimen does not enable one to determine the number of the lanceolate bracts which compose the whorls. They at first spring outwards at almost right angles to the axis, and then bend upwards past the spreading sporangia which spring from their axils and reach almost to the top of the second internode above that from which they spring. The sporangia are large, oval, slightly narrowed at base, and from 2°70 mm. to 3°10 mm. long, and therefore occupy almost the whole length of the internode. It is difficult to determine the number of sporangial groups in a whorl, owing to the compressed condition of the specimen, but I do not think the sporangiophores were very numerous, perhaps not more than six in a whorl. If one examines the portion of the cone enlarged 2 times at fig. 3a, there do not appear to be more than three pairs of sporangia visible on the exposed surface of the cone; so we are therefore probably looking at the exposed surface of three groups of four sporangia. In the whole verticil there would therefore probably be six sporangiophores, each bearing four sporangia. One of the sporangia from the base of the cone was removed and treated by the acid-ammonia process, when it was found to contain very numerous circular microspores with a small triradiate ridge, measuring on an average » 80 in diameter. Palxostachya Ettingshausen is therefore probably homosporous. Some microspores are seen enlarged 50 times at fig. 3b, and one 500 times at fig. 3c. Palzostachya Ettingshauseni, which is the cone of Calamites Sachser Stur (pars), is closely related to Palzxostachya elongata Presl, sp., but is easily distinguished by its small size and less dense mode of growth. It is not common in the South Staffordshire Coal Field, where, though the cone has been found, no specimens of the parent plant, Calamuites Sachser Stur, have been discovered, as far as | am aware. The specimen figured by Linpuey and Hurton on pls. xv. and xvi. of their Fossil Flora as the foliage of Calamites nodosus (non Schlotheim) ( = Calamites ramosus Artis) are fortunately preserved. The small branch shown on pl. xv. has no organic con- nection with the stem which occurs close to it, and. its position is merely accidental. Both this and the specimen given on pl. xvi. are fertile branches of Palxostachya FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 127 Ettingshausent; the latter figure only shows one of several cone-bearing branches which occur on the slab. The originals of these figures are preserved in the “ Hutton Collection,’ Hancock Museum, Newcastle-on-Tyne. Horizon and Locality.—Roof of New Mine Coal: Mount Pleasant, Brierley Hill. Paleostachya elongata Presl, sp. 1838. Volkmannia elongata, Presl, Verhandl. d. Gesell. d. vaterlandischen Museums in Boéhmen, p. 27, pl. i. (fide Weiss). 1872. 5 Feistm., Abhandl. d.k. béhm. Gesell. d. Wissensch., vi. Folge, vol. v. p. 20, pl. iv. fig. 3, pl. v. fig. 2. 1874, 5 Fr Feistm., Vers. d. bohm. Ablager, i. Abth. p. 119, pl. xiii. figs. 1, 2. 1876. Palzostuchya elongata; Weiss, Steink. Calamarien, part 1. p. 108, pl. xv. ; part li. p. 181, pl. xxii. fig. 15. 19)1. si o Jongmaus, Anletung, vol. i. p. 324, figs. 281-2. Note.—Very rare. Collected by Mr H. W. Hucues. Horizons and Localities.— (2?) Ten-foot Ironstone Measures: Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. This specimen is fragmentary, and not in a suitable condition for a satisfactory determination. (K. No. 3700.) Roof of New Mine Coal: Merryhill Colliery, Mount Pleasant, Brierley Hill. Paleostachya gracillima Weiss. 1884. Palzostachya gracillima, Weiss, Steinkohlen-Calamarien, part i. p. 184, pl. xviii. fig. 1. 1886. 5b % Kidston, Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, p. 54, pl. i. fig. 3. 1910. 33 . Arber, Proc. Yorkshire Geol. Soc., vol. xvii. part ii. p. 1438, pl. xii, OTT, 3 . Jongmans, Anleztung, vol. i. p. 326, fig. 283. Remarks.—This species is rare in the South Staffordshire Coal Field, and I only know of the plant having been collected once by Mr H. W. Hucuss, F.G.S. Horizon and Locality.— Roof of Fireclay Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Palzeostachya minuta Kidston, n. sp. Pl. XI. figs. 1, la—le. Description.—Cone small, 1°5 cm. long and about 2°5 mm. wide, with somewhat blunt apex, bracts arcuate, distal portion upright, apex slightly incurved, about 13 times as long as internodes. Internodes 1 to 1°25 mm. long. Probably six sporangiophores in a whorl. Remarks.—Some small slabs were collected by Mr H. W. Hucuns, thickly covered with these cones, of which a slab is seen at fig. 1, Pl. XI, natural size. They are detached from their parent stems and are usually more or less imperfect, though 128 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE a few are complete. On the exposed surface of the cones three groups of sporangia are frequently visible, and probably the fertile whorls contained six sporangiophores. In any case, their number must have been small. Some of the cones are enlarged 2 times at figs. la to le to show their general character. Horizon and Locality— Between Fireclay Coal and Bottom Coal: Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton, near Dudley. (K. No. 4476.) Huttonia Sternberg. Huttonia spicata Sternb. Pl. XI. fig. 4, Pl. XIV. fig. 4. 1837. Huttonia spicata, Sternb., Verhandl. d. Gesellsch. d. vaterl. Museums, Bohmen, 1837, p. 69, pl. i. figs. 1-4 (fide Jongmans). 1851. Kidston, Proc. Yorks. Geol. and Polytech. Soc., vol. xiv. part i. pp. 204 and 225, pl. xxxv. fig. 1. 1899. Radicites columnaris, Zeiller, Etude sur la flore foss, d. bassin houil. d’Héraclée, p. 69. 1848. Asterophyllites Artist, Gopp., in Bronn (pars), Index palzxont., p. 122. 1869. Asterophyllites foliosa, Roehl (non L. & H.), Foss. Flora d. Steink.-Form. Westph., p. 24, pl. v. fig. 1. 1877. Roots and rootlets, Lebour, llustr. of Fossil Plants, p. 21, pl. x. Horizons and Localities. Blue Measures, six feet above Brooch Coal: Hamstead Colliery, Great Barr, near Birmingham. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures : Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Pinnularia capillacea L. & H. 1834. Pinnularia capillacea, L. & H., Fossil Flora, vol. ii. pl. exi. 1858. - 3 Lesqx., in Rogers, Geol. of Pennsyl., vol. ii. part ii. p. 878 (2 pl. xvii. fig. 22). 1869. i * Roehl, Foss. Flora d. Steink.-Form. Westph., p. 27 (2 pl. u. fig. 5a), pleive eis, Ui (fig. Va): 1893. Radicites capillacea, Potonié, Flora d. Rothl. v. Thiiringen, p. 261, pl. xxxiv. fig. 2. 1877. Rootlets, Lebour, I//ustr. of Fossil Plants, p. 118, pl. lix. * See ZEILLER, Veget. foss. d. terr, howil., p. 158, 1880. 172 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Horizons and Localities.— Above Brooch Coal: Grets Green, near West Bromwich. Ten-foot Ironstone Measures : Coseley, near Dudley ; Ettingshall. Roof of Thick Coal: Bradley Colliery, Bilston. Roof of New Mine: Merryhill Colliery, Brierley Hill. APPENDIX. Annularia microphylla Sauveur. PIX, figs. 1-3. 1848. Annularia microphylla, Sauveur, Végét. foss. d. terr. houil. de la Belgique, pl. |xix. fig. 6. Description.—Stem jointed, finely striated ; internodes on the ultimate branchlets short, 4 to 6 mm. long and about 0°75 mm. thick. Leaves as long as the internodes, 14 to 16 in a whorl, sickle-shaped, lanceolate, widest at their middle, gradually narrowing into a sharp point. Midrib very prominent and placed in a distinct furrow. Margins of leaf involute. Cones small, terminal, or given off the stem singly, apparently not in whorls. (K. No. 2122.) Remarks.—Savvrour figured two small fragments of his Annularia microphylla, one of which is a terminal portion and the other a piece of a small branch broken over at both ends. On both of his figures the leaves are distinctly bent or sickle-shaped, and narrower than those of Annularia galioides in proportion to their length. His figure, however, gives the idea that the leaves were somewhat blunt-pointed, and it was this which made me originally think his figure was a slightly inaccurate drawing of Annularia galioides L. & H., sp. The lowest whorl of leaves on the left-hand specimen (which is given in inverted position) illustrates well the bent and pointed leaves of the plant I now identify as SAuVEUR'S species. The absence of a description to his figures makes the identification of some of his plants very difficult. Some small specimens of Annularia microphylla Sauveur are given on Pl. X. That seen at fig. 1, natural size, shows the upper part of an ultimate branch. The internodes at the lower part are about 6 mm. long, but at the upper end are very much shorter. The larger whorls of leaves are 90 mm. in diameter, the individual leaves being about 40 mm. long and at their widest part 0°75 mm. wide. In springing from the stem they first assume an almost horizontal direction, but soon gradually bend upwards towards the stem. The whorl, as a whole, is thus saucer-shaped. The midrib is very prominent and lies in a little furrow, and the margins of the leaves are distinctly roiled in (involute) (fig. 1a). The base of a cone-like structure is attached to the apex of this branch, but it is not well preserved. FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. ie) Fig. 2 shows portion of three parallel leafy branches which appear to spring from the stem lying at their base, but I cannot observe any actual connection. This specimen is enlarged 2 times at fig. 2a, where the bent-up leaves with their incurved margins, and the prominent midrib placed in a furrow, can all be seen. It is also noticeable on this specimen that the leaves decrease in size towards the base of the branchlet (fig. 1). Another small specimen is given at fig. 3, and enlarged 2 times at fig. 3a. The bowl- or saucer-shape form of the leaf whorls is well seen on the enlargement fig. 3a. If the two species be now compared, it will be seen that in Annularta nucrophylla Sauveur the leaves are lanceolate and sharp-pointed, with involute margins and a prominent midrib placed in a furrow. In Annularia galroides the leaves are much broader in proportion to their length and do not end in such prolonged points. The midrib is not placed in a furrow and the leaves are flat.* Horizons and Localities. — | Westphalian Series; Barnsley Thick Coal: Monckton Main Colliery, near Barnsley, Yorkshire; and Wolley Colliery, Darton, near Barnsley. Collected by Mr W. Hemineway. Bensham Seam, Jarrow, County of Durham. Specimen preserved in ‘“‘ Hutton Collection,” Newcastle-on-Tyne. Lanarkian Series: Furnace Bank Pit,Old Sauchie, near Alloa, Clackmannanshire. Nores ON THE VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE FossiL PLANTS. In all 154 species are recorded from the Westphalian Series of the South Staffordshire Coal Field. Of these, 13 are only generically recorded, as the material at my disposal was not in a sufficiently good state of preservation for a satisfactory identification or description. Twenty new species are described, namely, Sphenopteris deltiformis, Sphenopteris Kilimlu, Coseleya glomerata, Pecopteris hepaticeformis, Neuropteris Carpentiert, Palzxostachya manuta, Sphenophyllum tenussimum, Sigillaria punctirugosa, Lepido- carpon Westphalicum, Sumaropsis quadriovata, Tripterospermum ellipticum, Triptero- spermum Johnsoni, Polypterospermum ornatum, Lagenostoma oblonga, Lagenostoma (?) urceolaris, Rhabdocarpus Renaulti, Rhabdocarpus Oliveri, Hexagonocarpus Hookeri, Whattleseya (?) fertilis, and Dicranophyllum anglicum; while the 10 following have not previously been recorded for Britain, as far as I am aware: Sphenopteris Schatzlariana Stur, sp. (emend.), cf. Sphenopteris Sancta- Felicis Stur, sp., Sphenopteris Souwcha Zeiller, Crossotheca Crepini Zeiller, Adiantites sessilis Roehl (pro. var.), Alethopteris integra Gothan, sp., Calamostachys Solmsi Weiss, Huttonia spicata Presl, sp., Lycopodites Meeki Lesqx., and Sigillaria cordigera Zeiller. Although a considerable number of species have been met with in the South * Note.—For references to Annularia galioides L. & H., sp., see ante, p. 121. 174 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Staffordshire Coal Field, many of them appear to be very rare, though perhaps they may be much more common than is at present suspected, for from many localities I have few or no records, and from some of the coal seams, especially in the northern area of the coal field, there are no records at all. The publication of this paper may call the attention of some to the deficiency of records from many of the coal seams, and I would ask such to lose no opportunity for collecting specimens, so that we may gain a more accurate conception of the vertical and horizontal distribution of the fossil plants of this coal field. The following table contains a list of all the species found in the South Staffordshire Coal Field, and gives their vertical distribution. The list is very typical of the Westphalian Series. UES FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. x : Ielplez wadaio ES || 3 uoIsplyy DUDIseybnET mS || 3s || ex Be | Se ‘ds “4s8u01g wnnybucuop “DI0YJOSSOLO x “SPL Sisuawnpyzgnyag "Drlanog DC llc allan x ‘ds “4Suoig s¢pvonwb “piyynouary alex ‘ds “1nqg sesuaimpzqnyay see x IaT[IeG vyamnog nist ‘ds “yg 209770 4 x "ds “u ‘uoyspryy 207uenry : x ‘ds ‘u ‘uoyspry sewuofigjep : x Taiqynx) saguphpzovprsponb |X INI svyag-ppIUDy “Jo x ; (‘puewte) m4g vuninpZwYIG > 83 uldaig saprorjo fersnwauo : x : ‘ddox) nsourds x x ‘qSuorg vpypount ; x ‘aerpuy ashurpjryog! x : ovVIPUY 27uawnvT ? x | x uidarQ timaanny x ‘ds ‘syay 1ynj0u0 fig ls RL By Oe x x alex “4youo1g 790718NIg0 *si.tazdouaydy g a $ ; 3 ey a OS) aisle als Picasa a ea Mee mie 8 ae Bo era ioqlseseaes |S | S| tol-7 1) Sins a\s = e ScaRea ea se/2/ 6 SO; |e) SS |e) S18 le lal - S) || 2 & |. Bie fa iS ioe eS 8/2 /S|2 Psi /ole Bl8|Slelglglelo(Sla/S lal elz 2/8 |e le is) aS} |} (elo) SF || ag | 2 a es 2S | S|] ala |S @ | Sl oO mM o | ie) 2 \s 2 —|O |O al e.4 Fi x ell Beh Be x , Pall eS wn 2 ~ =| 8 5 he re lil ale = s S\o al 2 lel Ae 2/3|° 8ols st Wieay || co ee a ey io} SB lep 2! ®| lig | aie €@/S |S ba Gi o nm S) » |S 5/8 o/|8|5 .8m)a © (5 (= Mg pte al le = BHA |\n > Rubble Coal. 6 OG Ge Oil Al Oh Gh iil Sil Gl il Ol @ 8S 2 OO GG a : ; og) ee eae ; 4 2 ; é : 3 : : ce Ne hea 6% ‘ : a lee : : 4 : 3 : é Fa [hase ; ; ; : A : F : ; a hess , 5 5 ; : F x Selle F i é ; : coal Wiscin ll : : F : ‘ Ak es é ; il og 3 : : f 5 =| 5 5 F j : : a ll A : 3 ae, F : : ; ; 5 o) - : ? falls : : Se ‘ : ; : ; Perlis ‘ < : ‘ ; 5 ; ; a |) Se F ‘ : ; F : au ll sg |= gx |O ; (o} — .|2|3 5 | Ss § 5 PDR s =) S) | Fi S) || iS) Sill = | |e ee) 1) Ronse ics CJOl/ai/S |B] aie] eres aA SS fo) alu|s o| a Oo ON ASE | fey MEE tet IS? |S) ee eh |S |] ae sy 25) |S oj ice S|) RM aS eh |} tet IO) Dy | an eM See lie || cave azul Sales as ro | iw Hw |S s\e lela els|8le S(Sl/E/8l el els Veoot Sey || iS) os HiSiQ@lalalalals Ajalslaisljalela ‘eolY UOYJION ayy Ul [VOD Youyy, Jo yuoreambay ‘penunyuoo—sawady fo sisdouhy xX X x Brooch Coal. Little Two-foot Coal. Aepnog vpypa ‘ds “4Suoag 2xnawanq ‘ds ‘say suatinvap : ‘ds “[yog vax2yaU07 ‘sauagdoyjal ‘ds “Tyg wyparunw ‘s1.ajdown py “ds ‘syay vsownjd “‘paayqojligo0q ‘ds ‘u ‘uogspryy svwsofearnday sf IMAANVY 2UNDUY 104 ‘ds ‘syay euoyapyr ‘s1uazdovag ‘ds ‘u ‘uoyspryy vyn.awo76 “‘phajasog ; ‘ds “xbsaT sapro.agsn “wnibun)a J, © cds “4q9q aassnagy ‘siwajdowyoup * ‘na ‘oud “Tyo, syassas ‘SoRUDIPY “ds “quieyg vyofersrmapup ‘sidajdowawy : : ‘ds -u ‘ds “quieyg nynqnorap ‘ds ‘myg sisuapjoay “DLde eZ ‘ds “quaieyy vnbrpgo ‘suwapdoshiydg Upper Sulphur Coal. aA FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. x x 2 x . x x P x x x 2 x . . x x . . x x . . . x x x x x ss x x x . 5 x . . . x . . . . . . LG 96 GS FB EZ GG 16.06 Gh SE ZL OE Gi V1 SI GL IL Ok.60% x xX xX X X X st XX . x X X oo xX X ‘ds “H % "J sapyoynb e * “qsuo0rgq DIVIPDL “DLUOINUL ‘ds “qu104g seulofeioyo : ‘ds “quieyg sepuvib : ‘ds “quieyg sn2jof2hu0) ‘ds “Tyog sxuwofyasinba ‘saguppliydo.ays 7 . . ‘ds SSTO A SNOLUUDILT SIV snsown.t ; ANAS PO2YOS! * UOSPIY seswabinquapyy : * *quLe4g snyopnpun ; : ‘qsuolg 24819 ; ‘ 4Suorg woyongy "sagqvUnjvy ‘ds ‘uoyspry thomburwezy ‘sagugasin ba c ‘ds “sasagdowdy : d . ‘ds ; ‘ds ‘retqgn4y) vdsi.00 “mngaryay . . . ‘ds ‘ds ‘u ‘moqspryy 21a2uadung : “MOFT wlazyonayay ‘ds ‘syiy #epunusc¢ ‘ds “qSuoig vnbiqo 7 i RIS LICL Fi qsuoig 2wabun1y : Amnqung siasaursoe : * "quieyg vagunb1b 5 ‘ds “Tyog nyofinuag : ‘qsuor1g pjhydo.wajay "92.4aqd0una AT Q ‘ds “quieyg vudjp “s24azdojzuopoO : : : psobnt "si.taqdoyouory : ‘ds ‘ueqyoxy v.ubazue : ‘ds “qsuoigq wuepunsy : * ds “qsuo0i1g aay 23 TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 5). * xX DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Sulphur Coal. White Ironstone. Intermediate Measures. Rubble Coal. Gubbin’s Ironstone. Bottom Benches Coal. Bottom Coal. Fireclay Coal. New Mine Coal. Stinking Coal Heathen Coal. Slipper Coal. Sawyer’s Coal. Patchell’s Coal. Stone Coal. John Coal. Foot Coal. Brassil’s Coal. Benches Coal. Tow Coal. Lamb’s Coal. \- Go GG TG OG OF OL ah OE Sh Viel at le One OM Gen een mye may ete an oo Jay’s Coal. Top Slipper Coal. Roofs Coal. Thick Coal. Brooch Coal. Little Two-foot Coal, Upper Sulphur Coal. ‘volY ULOYYAON OY} UI [ROD Yoryy, Jo yuepeammbyy 178 ‘panuyuoo—sawady fo sisdouhg mr iaey rere eee ‘snqo.igsopidaT *xbso'y sungsup *yo “quieyg wngnon “"quIeyg wnznacgo * “quseyg wnznaynon TS pees * Suoig snuneydo ‘uoLpuapopridaT : ° *xbsoryT 1ya0apr ‘sagupodoohT . . . ‘ds ‘ds ‘u ‘UOSpry wnwissenuay ‘ds “quieyg wn2yofauna “unjpiydouaydy *quiayg nyvords “"DLUojzyneT ‘ds ‘u ‘uoqspryy vynuru * SSIo A, 0Ul277000.6 ‘ds Ysoig vznbuoja UOJSpry 2uasnnyshurygT *phyonjsox2 1D qT . -ds . ‘ds SSTOM ISUjOy “shyavjsownpvy ‘ds “Tyg vpwp)a98 ‘ds ‘1oyue7z sapropjhydouayds ‘DIMLDINUU Ws) FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. ‘poynqtaystp ATTereuey) 4 ‘eID OUI MON x LG 96 GS VG x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . €% GG IG 02 6I 8I AT OL SI FI S&T GL TL OIG Sis d=.) g ‘ds “qSuoig vpzowixouddn LA, ‘ds “ueyqt\\ bunpunig ‘ds “ddox) srusofewjnd > ‘ds ‘aeurex sapdruud * eds “quieqg sniyofissp.10g ‘sazuop.Loy ‘ds ‘u ‘uoyspry wwnoanydzsa yy ‘wod.no0pidaT als “rea ‘ord “ddoxy nynjnoya.s 3 , f-ds “quieqg sapioox “prvoubag Slt lheoealiei : “HD “TT 270uU2.00029 ‘sagiwadlig . . . . . . ‘ds sl) a i oe Dead chce *$90.19801.L07)1619) Salle. lire ‘ds -u ‘uoyspry vsolinwyound 4ou01g Dsobnt 4ysuorg Dp0buU070 “4ouorgq s7wwofiuas . . . + . . . . ha lie : + JoT[le7z v.wabrp..09 Pra Maan Nak ; ds ‘say savnbyna a |Pe e * -qSuo0igq 020))07NaS ‘4qSuolg sivojjvUupw * ‘qSuoig v70))]08807 “ds “quieyg vuobr1g callie - ds ‘uvumogq vsopou “fo Paine : ‘qsuorcy swobaja 2 dpaselies * MOISpLIY, Vpnurayndrwas roe es : ‘ds “Stuoy vuoydoasap “11.l0] 0B! ealenceale* * «ds ‘Aemnog wnyofrnunu “woLpuapoLyzog 2 cil al tea : ‘HY "I vsonz.10} “DWUojo eT aaa) : " ‘quIe4g snur910D) ‘sovojydoprdaTy ry oor ie : ‘HY "TT wnipawsaque -wunpphydopidaTy amt Wa ee ; IOT[IOZ sauvpnbuvry * rodunryog gagourag DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE | | | | | Intermediate Measure Fireclay Coal. New Mine Coal. Stinking Coal Sulphur Coal. White Ironstone. Rubble Coal. Bottom Coal. — anil ——— a ee eee ee Os doa i a ea |S 2 » ds “quieyg 1yyn.1abbao ay “sndLDI0U0BiL, T, ‘ds ‘uoqspryy 2p7.M a | ee eee ts ; ‘ds “xbsarT snynzfur Sales sly 2 ‘ds ‘a ‘uoqspryy 2.000270 ‘ds ‘u ‘uoyspryy wpnnuaay * uojspry sngvbr079 ‘snd.mo0pqnyyy Soule mem altace ie tha > ‘ds ‘u ‘uojspry s2vvjoa0un >of sal Hoa Mc ag * ds ‘u ‘uoyspryy vbu0790 “‘puLojsouaboT So | Boo |] |e Iesieg pur -ddox) snaproi0 “sayqyod.iny See ee ee sill '* - ds ‘u ‘uoyspry wnzouw.to -unutedso.vagahjo 7 Meelis ali lit eeal lhe > -ds ‘u ‘uoyspryy 2wosuyor Malleealh ss lio ifs * -ds ‘u ‘uoqspry wnargdapja ‘wmnutsadso.agdrl, J, . ‘ds “ds “Hy 2 "T vynow Seg) hes ‘ds ‘u ‘uoyspryy vyn20ruponb allele Daa acs : UOISPIY] Mwayovapy SESS eee eal : ‘ds ‘zq1u1ax) 2.102q9NY) ‘sisdo..mvuny x . . . , . . ‘ds . . . . . . . ‘ds Soule Aiea (ps * sds “PT 2 "Y wawsnang Seer eee lib alls ; “ds “qq 2uunwyjo 4 “snyjunwp.Lop xX X X XK X Gubbin’s Ironstone. Bottom Benches Coal. op Slipper Coal, Thick Coal. Brooch Coal. Little Two-foot Coal. Heathen Coal. Slipper Coal. Upper Sulphur Coal. Sawyer’s Coal. Patchell’s Coal. Stone Coal. Brassil’s Coal. Benches Coal. Tow Coal. Jay’s Coal. Roofs Coal. Lamb’s Coal. An John Coal. Foot Coal. ‘RaLW UOYAON OY} UT 1209) Youpy, Jo uoyeamby 180 ‘panuyuoa—sawady fo sisdouhg 181 FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 96 GG FF EB GS 1G OG GI ST LAL OI ST FI EI ZI IL OT ‘ds ‘say saupuunjoo ‘HY “T #ea0n)71dp9 “DIDINUULT | ‘ds ‘u ‘uoqspry wnowbup sump hiydoun.wrwg ‘ds ‘u ‘uoqspry seqequas * Arraqmo yy suvbaja “phasaygoy M : ‘ds 21ayooey ssnd.imoouoboxa FT . ° ‘ds 182 INDEX. PAGE Adiantites 95 | Carpolithes . sessilis Roehl, pro. var. . 95 ovoideus Gopp. & Berge Alethopteris . : 101 | Cordaianthus Davreuxi Brongt., sp. 102 Pitcairniz L. & H. SD. decurrens Artis, sp. 102 Volkmanni Ett., sp. Grandini Brongt., sp. 103 sp. : integra Gothan, sp. 103 sp. lonchitica Schl., sp. 101 | Cordattes Serli Brongt., sp. . 103 borassifolius Stemibe sp. valida Boulay 102 Brandlingi Witham, sp. Annularia 121 palmxformis Gopp., sp. galioides L. & Fe sp. 121 princtpalis Germar, sp. . microphylla Siuvour 172 | Coseleya radiata Brongt. : ; rll glomerata adatom sphenophylloides Zenker, sp. . : . 122 | Crossotheca . stellata Schl., sp. . 123 Crepini Zeiller Aphlebia 115 Honinghausi Brongt. erispa Gutbier, sp. 115 Hughesiana Kidston sp. : 116 | Cyperites Avchaopteris 95 bicarinata L. & H. Reussii Ett., sp. 95 | Dactylotheca : Artista 152 plumosa Artis, sp. approximata Bronat, Sp. 152 | Dicranophyllum . Asterophyllites 120 anglicum Kidston. chareformis Sternb., sp. 121 | Hqutsetites . equisetiformis Schl., sp.. 120 Hemingway? Kidston grandis Sternb., sp. 120 | Hremopteris longifolius Sternb., sp. . 120 artemisizfolia Stamnt: , Sp. Bothrodendron 138 | Halonia minutifolium Boulay, sp. 138 tortuosa L. & H. Boweria é 89 | Hexagonocarpus . Cope Kidston : 90 Hookeri Kidston . Calamites 5 117 | Huttonia : Britannicus Weiss 119 spicata Sternb. Cisti Brongt. 118 | Lagenostoma ramosus Artis 119 oblonga Kidston Schutzer Stur 118 urceolaris Kidston Suckowt Brongt. 117 | Lepidocarpon : undulatus Sternb. . 118 Westphalicum Kidston ; Waldenburyensis Kidston 118 | Lepidodendron sp. (tuber) 119 aculeatum Sternb. Calamostachys 123 acutum Sternb. Solmsi Weiss 123 cf. distans Lesqx. . sp. 145) obovatum Sternb. 8p. 125 ophiurus Brongt. . DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE PAGE 159 159 153 153 153 153 153 150 150 152 151 151 97 97 90 91 90 91 146 146 99 99 169 170 117 117 95 95 137 137 165 165 128 128 160 160 161 147 148 132 134 135 135 134 132 FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. Lepidodendron. simile Kidston Lepidophloios laricinus Sternb. | Lepidophyllum intermedium L. & H. Lepidostrobus Geinitzt Schimper triangularis Zeiller variabilis L. & H. Lonchopteris rugosa . Lycopodites . Meeki . Mariopteris . muricata Schl., sp. | Neuropteris . Carpentiert Ridston gigantea Sternb. Grangert Brongt. . heterophylla Brongt. obliqua Brongt., sp. Osmundz Artis, sp. rarinervis Bunbury Scheuchzert Hoffm. Schlehant Stur tenuifolia Schl., sp. Sp. Baentonteris alpina Sternb., sp. | Palzxostachya elongata Presl Ettingshausent Kidston. gracillima Weiss . minuta Kidston Pecopteris hepaticeformis ae tdstone Miltoni Artis, sp. . Volkmanni Sauveur | Pinnularia . capillacea L. & ae columnaris Artis, sp. | Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston . Renaultia gracilis Brongt., sp. Rhabdocarpus . elongatus Kidston . inflatus Lesqx., sp. Olivert Kidston Renaultt Kidston . Wildi Kidston PAGE 134 137 137 137 137 136 136 136 136 105 105 132 132 100 100 106 112 108 111 106 111 112 110 112 lll 108 115 105 105 125 127 125 127 127 98 99 98 99 171 171 171 158 158 &9 89 161 161 164 162 162 164 Samaropsis . acuta L, & H., sp. Gutbiert Geinitz, sp. Meachemi Kidston quadriovata Kidston sp. Sigillarva cordigera Zeiller . discophora Konig., sp. . elegans Brongt. elongata Brongt. mamillaris Brongt. ef. nodosa Bowman, sp. punctirugosa Kidston reniformis Brongt. rugosa Brongt. scutellata Brongt. . semipulvinata Kidston . tessellata Brongt. . tregona Sternb., sp. vulgaris Artis, sp. Siyillariostrobus . ciliatus Kidston sp. ; Sphenophyllum 3 cunerfoliwm Sternb., sp. tenuissimum Kidston Sp. Sprenaplerts as artemisizxfolioides Oiepin deltiformis Kidston dilatata L. & H. furcata Brongt. Kilimlti Kadston . Laurenti Andrae . obtusiloba Brongt. quadridactylites Gutbier ef. Sancta-Felicis Stur . Sauveurt Crépin Schatzlarensis Stur, sp. . Schatalariana Stur Schillingst Andrae Souichi Zeiller spinosa Gopp. trifoliolata Artis, sp. Walteri Stur, sp. . Sphyropteris obliqua Marrat, sp. Sptropteris . F sp. Stigmaria Jicoides Stem, sp. 183 PAGE 154 156 154 154 155 156 138 144 138 139 145 143 139 145 145 145 143 138 142 140 143 146 146 146 129 129 129 131 78 83 85 80 83 86 82 78 85 84 81 89 84 82 88 83 81 88 91 91 116 116 147 147 184 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE PAGE PAGE Stigmaria. Tripterospermum. reticulata Gopp. . : 5 . 147 Johnsoni Kidston . ; . . Lg Telangium . ; . ; F ‘ 96 | Whittleseya . : ‘ : ; ; .. 166 asteroides Lesqx., sp. . : 96 elegans Newberry . : 5 : .. 166 Trigonocarpus . 4 ‘ : : dn) LOL fertilis Kidston. : : 5 . aes Noeggeratht Sternb., sp. . 164] Zeilleria . : ‘ ; i ‘ 92 sp. ; ; : : : 9 C165 Avoldensis Stur, sp... ; A 92 Tripterospermum . : : } : ja 156 delicatula Sternb., sp. . : 94 ellipticum Kidston : : ee i sp. : : : d f : 94 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Prats V. Fig. 1. Sphenopteris dilatata L. & H. , ; Fragment of pinna. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Specimen in the Collection of British Museum, Geological Department, (No. V. 1377.) Fig. la. The same specimen, enlarged 2 times. Fig. 2. Sphenopteris Schillingst Andrae. Termination of pinna. Natural size. Same locality and horizon as last. Fig. 3. Sphenopteris Kilimlai Kidston. Fragment of a frond. Natural size. Locality—Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Horizon—Blue — Measures, six feet above Fireclay Coal. (K. No. 1613.) Fig. 4. Coseleya glomerata Kidston. Small fragment, showing the sporangia clustered round the rachis. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley, near Dudley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 4a. Coseleya glomerata Kidston. Same specimen as the last, enlarged 2 times. At the broken pinna marked a the sporangia are seen surrounding the rachis on all sides. Fig. 4b. Coseleya glomerata Kidston. Some sporangia from the part lettered a in fig. 4a, enlarged about 9 times to show form of sporangia. Fig. 5. Coseleya glomerata Kidston. A small fragment, enlarged 2 times to show the form of the sporangia. Fig. 6. Coseieya glomerata Kidston. Fragment of a pinna, enlarged 2 times to show spiral or verticillate arrangement of sporangia at a. Same locality and horizon as last. Fig. 7. Archzxopteris Reussti Ett., sp. Fragment of frond. Natural size. Locality—Tividale, Dudley. Horizon—Above Brooch Coal. Specimen in the Johnson Collection, Geological Department, British Museum. (No, V. 1366.) g. Ta. Archxopteris Reussti Ett., sp. Some pinnules, enlarged 2 times to show their nervation. Fi _ Puate VI. Fi _ g. 1. Newropteris gigantea Sternb. Upper portion of pinna, showing terminal pinnules. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Open- work, Coseley. (K. No. 4016.) : FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 185 Fig. 2. Newropteris gigantea Sternb. Single pinnule, enlarged 24 times to show nervation. Same locality and horizon. Fig. 3. Neuropterts gigantea Sternb. Upper part of a pinna, showing the two terminal pinnules. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. (K. No. 4014.) Fig. 4. Newropteris gigantea Sternb. Specimen showing a (?) double dichotomy of the pinna rachis. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. (K. No. 207.) . 5. Neuropteris gigantea Sternb. ; Small portion of a partially developed frond. At a the main rachis is densely covered with scales. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. (K. No. 3760.) Fig. 6. Neuropteris gigantea Sternb. Portion of a circinately coiled pinna, shown natural size. The rachis is densely covered with scales. Same locality and horizon. (K. No. 3761.) Figs. 7a and 7b, Neuropteris gigantea Sternb. The two halves of the same nodule, natural size, showing a young pinna circinately coiled. The rachis is very densely covered with scales. Same locality and horizon. (K. Nos. 4117 and 4118.) Fig. 7c. Newropteris gigantea Sternb. The specimen shown at 70, enlarged 2 times. Fig. 8. Spiropteris sp. Young frond, showing circinate vernation and dichotomy of rachis. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. (K. No. 3334.) Fig. 9. Spiropteris sp. Very young, complete frond, showing thick petiole with scale scars, bifurcating at the apex, the two arms being circinately coiled. Natural size. Same locality and_ horizon. (K. No. 3321.) Fig, 9a, Spiropteris sp. Apex of last specimen, enlarged 2 times. Specimen from which fig. 4 is taken was received from the late Mr Henry Jounson, that repre- sented at fig. 9 from Mr W. Manzuey, and all the others on this plate from Mr H. W. Hueuss, F.G.S. Fi = ise} Puate VII, | Figs. 1 and 2. Lagenostoma oblonga Kidston. Two seeds enclosed in their cupules. Natural size. The seeds are seen at a and b. Locality— Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. | Figs. la and 2a. Lagenostoma oblonga Kidston. I The same specimen, enlarged 2 times. | Figs, 3 and 4. Newropteris heterophylla Brongt. Fully developed and young seed. Natural size. Same horizon and locality. Fig. 5. Zeilleria Avoldensis Stur, sp. Seed-bearing frond. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. Fig. 5a, Zeilleria Avoldensis Stur, sp. | Portion of last, enlarged 2 times to show the spread-out cupules and the central mamillz to | which the seeds were attached, 50. The cupule seen at a, fig. 5a, enlarged 6 times. |Fig. 6. Zeilleria Avoldensis Stur, sp. Portion of microsporangia-bearing frond. Natural size. Locality—Tividale. Horizon —Roof of Brooch Coal. Fig. 6a. Zeilleria Avoldensis Stur, sp. Portion of same specimen, enlarged 2 times. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 5). 24 186 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Fig. 7. Pecopteris ? hepaticeformis Kidston. Small portion of a pinna. Natural size. Locality—Coseley? Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 7a. Pecopteris ? hepaticeformis Kidston. A few pinnules, enlarged 10 times. Pruate VIII. Neuropteris Carpentiert Kidston. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 7. Natural size. Figs. 3a, 3b, 4a, 5a, 50, 6, and 7a, enlarged 2 times, Fig. 8. Portions of three ‘‘columns” of microspores, showing part of the complete spore contents of a sporangium, x 50. ; j Fig. 8a. Microspores, one showing triradiate ridge. x 500. For explanation of other figures, see text. Puate IX. Fig. 1. Annularia stellata Schl., sp. Portion of branch. Natural size. Locality—Jubilee Pit, Sandwell Park Colliery, West Bromwich. Horizon—Blue Measures, six feet above Brooch Coal. ; Fig. la. Annularia stellata Schl., sp. Portion of specimen enlarged 2 times. Fig. 2. Calamites tuber. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 3. Palzxostachya Ettingshauseni Kidston. Cone. Natural size. Locality—Mount Pleasant, Brierley Hill. Horizon—Roof of New Mine Coal. Fig. 3a. Palexostachya Ettingshausent Kidston. Part of cone, enlarged 2 times. Fig. 3b. Palzostachya Ettingshauseni Kidston. Microspores enlarged 50 times. Fig. 3c, Microspore enlarged 500 times. Fig. 4. Calamostachys Solmsi Weiss. Part of cone attached to its pedicel. Natural size. Locality—Clattershall Colliery, Brettell Lane. Horizon—Roof of New Mine Coal. Fig. 4a. Calamostachys Solmsi Weiss. Part of cone, enlarged 2 times to show form of bracts. Fig. 4b. Calamostachys Solmst Weiss. Microspores enlarged 50 times. Fig. 4c, Microspore enlarged 500 times, Fig. 4d. Megaspore enlarged 50 times. PuatE X. Fig. 1. Annularia microphylla Sauveur, Showing branch terminating in a cone. JLocality—Furnace Bank Pit, Old Sauchie, near Alloa, Clackmannanshire. Hortzon—Lanarkian Series, Natural size. (K. No. 92.) Fig. la. Annularia microphylla Sauveur. Portion of same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show form of leaves, Fig. 2. Annularia microphylla Sauveur, ; Small specimen, shown natural size. Locality— Monckton Main Colliery, near Barnsley, York- shire. Horizon—Thick Coal, Westphalian Series, (K. No, 2123.) FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS, 187 Fig. 2a. Annularia microphylla Sauveur. Same specimen as last, enlarged 2 times to show form of leaf and nervation, Fig. 3. Annularia microphylla Sauveur. Fragment of branch. Natural size. Same locality and horizon as at fig, 2. Fig. 3a. Annularia microphylla Sauveur. Portion of same specimen, enlarged to show the central vein. Fig. 4. Coseleya glomerata Kidston. Small specimen, enlarged 2 times to show bramble-like appearance of masses of sporangia. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 5. Sphenophyllum sp. Group of four united sporangia. Natural size. 5a. The same specimen, enlarged 2 times. Locality—Jubilee Pit, Sandwell Park, West Bromwich. Horizon—Blue Measures, six feet above Brooch Coal. Fig. 6. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Portion of seed, enlarged 2 times to show ornamentation. Locality—Shipley Clay Pit, Ilkeston, Derbyshire. Horizon—Below Top Hard Coal. Westphalian Series. (K. No. 4651.) Fig. 7. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston, Part of seed. Natural size. Same horizon and locality. (K. No, 4650.) Fig. 7a. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show the ornamentation. Fig. 8. Cf. Sphenopteris Sancta-Felicis Stur, sp. Small fragment of a pinna. Natural size. Locality-—Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Horizon— Roof of Fireclay Coal. Fig. 8a. Cf. Sphenopteris Sancta-Felicis Stur, sp. Same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show pinnule segmentation. Fig. 9. Sphenopteris deltiformis Kidston. Fragment of frond. Natural size. Locality—Race Course Pit, Round Oak. Horizon— Whitestone. Fig. 9a. Sphenopteris deltiformis Kidston. Some pinne from same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show form and segmentation of pinnules. Puate XI. Fig. 1. Palzostachya minuta Kidston. Small slab showing many specimens scattered over its surface. Natural size. Locality— Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Horizon—Between Fireclay Coal and Bottom Coal. (K. No, 4476.) Fig. la—le. Palxostachya minuta Kidston, Small fragments of cones enlarged 2 times, from the same specimen. Fig. 2. Cone of Lepidodendron ophiurus Brongt. Specimen showing cone attached to leafy branch. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Open- work, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. (K. No. 912.) Fig. 3. Cone of Lepidodendron ophiurus Brongt. Another specimen longitudinally broken through the centre and filled in with carbonate of lime, showing the axis and bracts. Natural size, Same locality and horizon, (K. No. 3765.) Fig. 4. Huttonia spicata Sternb. Portion of a cone. Natural size. Locality—Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Horizon—Blue Measures, six feet above Fireclay Coal. Puare XII. Fi — g. 1. Sigillaria, ef. nodosa Bowman, sp. Fragment of cortex, showing outer surface. Natural size. Locality—Merryhill Colliery, Brierley Hill. Horizon—Roof of New Mine Coal. Lighting parallel with ribs. (K. No. 3562.) 188 DR ROBERT KIDSTON ON THE Fi ~ g. la. Sigillaria, ef. nodosa Bowman, sp. Portion of same specimen, enlarged 2 times, with illumination at right angles to ribs, to show the form of the leaf scar. Fig. 2. Sigillaria trigona Sternb., sp. Natural size. Locality—Tipton. Horizon—Roof of Thick Coal. Fig. 2a, Sigillaria trigona Sternb., sp. Portion of same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show form of cushion and leaf scar. Figs. 3 and 4. Sigilluria trigona Sternb., sp. Two outline drawings of cushion and leaf scar to show opening of ligule pit and diverging lines on base of cushion. Fig. 5. Sigillaria cordigera Zeiller. Natural size. Locality—Mount Pleasant, Brierley Hill. Horizon—Roof of New Mine Coal. Fig. 5a, Sigillaria cordigera Zeiller. From same specimen, enlarged 2 times to show the leaf scars and surface ornamentation of cortex. Fig. 6. Stgillaria punctirugosa Kidston. Specimen, natural size. Locality—Mount Pleasant, Brierley Hill. Horizon—Roof of New Mine Coal. (K. No. 3474.) Fig. 6a. Sigillaria punctirugosa Kidston. A small portion, enlarged 2 times to show form of leaf scar and ornamentation of ribs, Pruate XIII. Figs. 1-6. Lepidocarpon Westphalicum Kidston. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Figs, 1 and 2. Natural size. Fig. 5. Enlarged 4 times. Fig. 3. Enlarged 2 times. Fig. 6. Enlarged 8 times. Fig. 4. Enlarged 4 times. For description, see text. Puate XIV. Figs. la, 1b, and le. Tripterospermum elliptieum Kidston, The seed seen on three of the surfaces into which the nodule split, and which corresponds to the three pieces of the nodule lettered a, 0, ¢, fig. 1d. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 2. Tripterospermum Johnson Kidston. Portion of seed, showing two of the wings. Natural size. Same locality aud horizon as last. (K. No. 3573.) Fig. 3. Dicranophyllum anglicum Kidston. Portion of small branch with leaves attached. Natural size. Locality—Shut End, near Dudley. Horizon—Roof of Brooch Coal. Collected by Mr D. Roperrs. (K. No. 4623.) Fig. 3a. Dicranophyllum anglicum Kidston, Leaf from same specimen, enlarged 2 times, Fig. 4. Huttonia spicata Sternb., Portion of specimen given on Pl. XI. fig, 4, enlarged 2 times to show bracts. Fig. 5. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Portion of seed seen natural size, showing ornamentation and longitudinal furrows indicating position of wings. Locality—Shipley Clay Pit, Ilkeston, Derbyshire. Horizon—Below Top Hard Coal. (K. No, 4651.) FOSSIL FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. 189 Fig. 6. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Part of another specimen showing ornamentation on surface between the wings and the narrow wing on the matrix at the right-hand side, Natural size. Same locality and horizon as last. (K. No. 4648.) Fig. 7. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston, Small specimen with wings. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 8. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Crushed specimen showing upward prolongation of the wings beyond the apex of the seed. Natural size. Same locality and horizon as last. Fig. 9. Polypterospermum ornatum Kidston. Large crushed specimen showing the furrows originally occupied by the wings, and their points projecting past the apex of the seed. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. Prate XV. Figs. 1-10. Whittleseya ? fertilis Kidston. Fig. 1. Natural size. Vig. 5a. Enlarged 4 times. Figs. la and 1b. Enlarged 2 times. Fig. 6. Natural size. Fig. 2. Natural size. Figs. 6a and 6). Enlarged 2 times. Figs. 2a and 2b. Enlarged 2 times. Figs. 7, 8, and 9. Enlarged 2 times, Figs. 3 and 4. Natural size. Fig. 10. Microspores enlarged 50 times. Fig. 5. Natural size. For description, see text. Fig. 11. Whittleseya elegans Newberry. Leaf natural size. Locality—Doulton’s Clay Pit, Netherton. Lent by Mr H. Hamsreap THOMAS, Puate XVI. Fig. 1. Samaropsis quadriovata Kidston. Seed natural size. Locality—Jubilee Pit, Sandwell Park, West Bromwich. Horizon—Blue Measures, six feet above Brooch Coal. (K. No. 3770.) Fig. la. Samaropsis quadriovata Kidston. The same seed, enlarged 2 times. Fig. 2. Samaropsis Gutbieri Geinitz, sp. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Figs. 3 and 4. Sphenophyllum tenwissomum Kidston. Two halves of nodule. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon— Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Fig. 4a. Sphenophyllum tenuissimum Kidston. Same spécimen, enlarged 2 times. Fig. 5a. Sphenophyllum tenuissimum Kidston. Group of united sporangia, of which three are shown but the fourth is broken off. Hnlarged. From same specimen. Fig. 6. Rhabdocarpus Oliveri Kidston. Natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures, Fig. 6a. Rhabdocarpus Oliveri Kidston. The same specimen, enlarged 2 times. a, micropyle; 0, pollen chamber; ¢, upper part of nucellus ; d, stony layer of seed (Sclerotesta) ; e, remains of contorted prothallus ; f, cavity left through decay of soft layer of seed (Sarcotesta), now filled with lime. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 5). 25 190 DR KIDSTON ON THE FOSSIL FLORA OF STAFFORDSHIRE COAL FIELDS. Fig. 7. Rhabdocarpus Oliveri Kidston. Other half of the same specimen after removal of the lime and other matter adhering to the matrix, as seen from a photograph of a plastocene cast of the impression in the matrix showing striated outer surface. Natural size. Fig. 8. Rhabdocarpus Oliveri Kidston. Photograph of a plastocene cast of the impression of another specimen to show the longitudinal striations. Natural size. Same locality and horizon. Figs. 9 and 10. Lagenostoma ? urceolaris Kidston. The two halves of the same specimen, shown natural size. Locality—Clayscroft Openwork, Coseley. Horizon—Ten-foot Ironstone Measures. Figs. 9a and 10a. Lagenostoma ? urceolaris Kidston. Same specimen, enlarged 2 times. a, integument; b, canopy; c, pollen chamber; d, micropyle, e, remains of nucellus; /, passage through which the vascular bundle enters the seed ; g, ‘space between cupule and seed. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Vol. L.—Piate V. Kipston: Foss. FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoaL FieLps—Part III. R. Kidston, Photo. M'Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. 1. Sphenopteris dilatata, L. & H. 2. Sphenopteris Schillingsi, Andre. 3. Sphenopteris Kilimlii, Kidston. n. sp. 4-6. Coseleya glomerata, Kidston. u.spy.7, Archzopteris Reussii, Ettingshausen sp, Roy. Soc. Edin: Vol. L.—Puate VI. Kipston: Fossiz FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE Coa, Fretps—Part III. |Photo M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. 1-7. Neuropteris gigantea, Sternb. 8-9. Spiropteris. rans. Roy. Soc. Edin: Vol. L.—Puate VII. Krpston : Fosstz FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL FreLps—Parrt III. R, Kidston, Photo. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. 1-2. Lagenostoma oblonga, Kidston.nsp. 3-4. N europteris heterophylla, Brongt. 5-6. Zeilleria Avoldensis, Stur. sp. 7. Pecopteris hepaticeformis, Kidston. n.sp. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Vol. L.—Puate VIII. Kinston: Fosstz FLoRA oF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL Frexps—Parrt III. oe | R. Kidston, Photo. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. Neuropteris Carpentieri, Kidston. n.sp. “rans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Vol. L.—Puate IX. Kipston: Fosstz FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL FIELDS-—-PArT III. 3a Ag 2 ° ‘ ; M'Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. ston, Photo. 1. Annularia stellata, Schl. sp. 2. Calamites tuber. 3. Paleostachya Ettingshauseni, Kidston. amostachvs So i Weiss ‘rans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Vol. L.—PuatE X. Kipston: Fosstz FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAaL Fretps—Parrt III. M'Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin 1-3, Annularia microphylla, Sauveur. 4. Coseleya glomerata, Kidston.n.sp. 5. Sphenophyllum sp. 6-7. Polypterospermum ornatum, Kidston. n. sp. 8. Sphenopteris cf. Sancti-Felicis, Stur sp. OOo, }. ., ... Bae Polio fo Tt Prats XE Fossiz FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL Fretps—Part III. Vol. ‘rans. Roy. Soc. Edin, KIDSsTON M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. ta, Sternb. ia spica 4. Hutton 1. Palzostachya minuta, Kidston. n. sp. 2-3. Lepidodendron ophiurus, Brongt. ‘rans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Vol. L.—Puate XII. Krpston: Fosstz FLORA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL Fretps—Part III. jidston, Photo. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. 1. Sigillaria cf. nodosa, Bowman. sp. 2-4. Sigillaria trigona, Sternb. sp. 5. Sigillaria cordigera, Zeiller. 6. Sigillaria punctirugosa, Kidston. n. sp. rans. Roy. Soc. Edin‘ Vol. L.—Puate XIII. Kipston: Fossr, FLorRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE COAL Fre.tps—Parr III. M'‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. Lepidocarpon Westphalicum, Kidston. n. sp rans. Roy. Soc. Edin‘ Vol. L.—Puate XIV. Kipston: Fossiz Fiona or THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoAL F IELDS—Part III. Bn, Photo. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. i. Tripterospermum ellipticum, Kidston. ». sp. 2. Tripterospermum J ohnsoni, Kidston. n. sp. Dicranophyllum anglicum, Kidston... .». 4. Huttonia spicata, Sternb. 5-9. Polypterospermum ornatum, Kidston. n. sp. ‘rans. Roy. Soc. Edin: Vol: E.—Prate. XV. Kipston: Fosst, FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE Coat Fietps—Parr III. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. 1-10. Whittleseya (?) fertilis, Kidston. n. sp. 11. Whittleseya elegans, N ewberry. ‘rans. Roy. Soe. Edin‘ Vol. L.—Priate XVI. Kipston: Fosstn FLoRA OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE CoaL Fre,ps—Parr IIT. ~ ton, Photo. M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith., Edin. Samaropsis quadriovata, Kidstona, sp. 2. Samaropsis Gutbier i, Geinitz sp. 3-5, Sphenophyllum tenuissimum, Kidston. n. sp. 6-8. Rhabdocarpus Oliveri, Kidston.nsp 9-10. Lagenostoma ? urceolaris, Kidston. n. sp. (Elia) VI. —The Anatomy of a New Species of Bathydoris, and the Affinities of the Genus : Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By T. J. Evans, M.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer in Zoology in the University of Sheffield. Communicated by Dr J. H. ASHWORTH. (MS. received October 3, 1913. Read January 19,1914. Issued separately April 1, 1914.) [Plates XVII. and XVIII] INTRODUCTORY. The genus Bathydoris was created by Bercu in 1884 in his Report on the Nudibranch Mollusca collected by the Challenger. In his account of the anatomy of the new genus Brercu draws attention to the anomalous combination of characters possessed by the animal, and gives it an annectent position between the Dorids and the Tritonids, but places it among the Dorids on account of the predominance of Dorid features. The single specimen of Bathydoris abyssorum was dredged off New South Wales in 2425 fathoms. A second specimen of this peculiar genus was obtained by the Danish Ingolf Expedition and described by Bercn in 1900. This specimen came from 1870 fathoms in Davis Strait, and resembled 6b. abyssorum, with specific variations. Thus Bathydoris came to be regarded as an isolated genus with the characters of a connecting link, and appropriately a denizen of deep water. Our anatomical knowledge of the animal is derived almost entirely from BERGu’s accounts of the two species mentioned, and is moderately extensive, considering the rather imperfect state of preservation of the material and the fact that he was dependent on single specimens in each case. Two more specimens were brought from the Antarctic by the Discovery and described by Sir Cuartes Exior in the Report of the National Antarctic Expedition published by the Natural History Museum in 1907. ‘These constituted separate species resembling Brren’s, but their state of preservation was such that Exior was able to add little to our knowledge of the anatomy of Bathydoris. The discovery of one of Hxror’s species in 100 fathoms dispels the idea that the genus is confined to the great depths. A specifically distinct specimen was also taken by the German Antarctic Expedi- tion, but THIELE, in the Report on the Mollusca recently published, confines himself to a superficial description in order to retain the rare animal intact as a museum specimen. It would seem to be the fate of polar expeditions to bring back single specific specimens of this genus; for the species which forms the subject of the present memoir is based on one specimen dredged in 1410 fathoms by the Scotva in March 1904. When the zoological material of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 6). 26 192 ME T. J. EVANS ON was distributed for identification, the animal went astray, and Sir CHarLEs Extot, who received the Nudibranchs, comments with surprise on the complete absence of Dorids. Dr Bruce has provided the following notes on the haul in which the animal was included: ‘ Locality, 71° 22’ 8., 16° 34’ W. Bottom temperature, 31°°9 F. Surface temperature, 29°°9 F. Depth, 1410 fathoms. Bottom, blue mud.” The haul included specimens of nearly every group of animals from sponges to fishes. It is proposed to name the new species Bathydoris brown, in honour of Dr R. N. RupmoseE Brown, naturalist to the expedition. To him and to Dr Bruce the author’s thanks are due for permission to undertake the investigation of its anatomy. The six known species of Bathydoris may be tabulated as follows :— — 1. B. abyssorum, Bergh. 2425 fathoms, off New South Wales. ‘ Challenger.” 2. B. ngolfiana, Bergh. 1870 fathoms, in Davis Strait. ‘ Ingolf.” 3. B. hodgsoni, Eliot. 100 fathoms, off Coulman Island. ‘‘ Discovery.” 4. B. inflata, Eliot. Depth not stated, off Coulman Island. ‘‘ Discovery.” 5. B. clavigera, Thiele. Depth not stated, Gauss Station. ‘‘ Gauss.” 6. B. browni, sp. nov. 1410 fathoms, off Coats Land. ‘“‘ Scotia.” The specimen was preserved in about 5 per cent. formaldehyde, and suffered very little distortion or contraction. The viscera were also in excellent condition for dissection, and even the histological preservation was found to be remarkably good when certain tissues were cut and stained for identification. EXTERNAL FEATURES. The animal, as preserved, was 75 mm. long, 40 mm. broad, and 35 mm. in height. A thin, flabby foot margin extended about 8 mm. beyond the body all round and was rather bluntly pointed behind, while anteriorly its thickened edge ran transversely across the body behind the head, and had a deep glandular furrow extending into the lateral margin for some distance. ‘The contraction of the foot when the animal was killed probably accounts for the distension of the dorsal integument and the extruded condition of the genital organs, which were forced out to the extent usual among Dorids during copulation. The mouth lies entirely on the ventral aspect, and is surrounded by crinkled lips surmounted by a bulging forehead, which extends laterally into rather long cylindrical oral tentacles. Nearly a third of the length of the ventral surface is occupied by the buccal region, the enormous size of which is a striking feature of the genus. The arched dorsal surface is covered by an integument which is delimited all round the body by a slight fringe at a distance of 4 or 5 mm. from the foot. Laterally this fringe or reduced mantle edge is represented by little more than a linear thickening of the skin. The dorsal] integument is thin, transparent, and destitute of spicules, but, as in hodgsont, inflata, and clavigera, the whole surface seems to have been originally studded with papille. Those that remain on exposed parts — - — LO THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 193 of the back are smallest; while round the dorsal tentacles and along the notzal margin they are much larger. They seem to be more numerous in brown than in any of the other three species possessing them. They are undoubtedly caducous, and, as recorded by Exior, the points of attachment of detached papille are marked on bare places by small circles with a spot in the centre. The only other conspicuous features of the dorsal surface are the dorsal tentacles and the anal complex, consisting of the anus, the renal pore, and the branchize. The rhinophores are club-shaped and perfoliated all round. There is no trace of a pocket. The branchie are two in number, and are placed symmetrically in front of the prominent anal papilla. Both numerically and structurally the branchiz appear to differ very considerably from those of all the other species of Bathydoris. Thus, B. abyssorum has five and ingolfiana ten arranged in a circle in front of the anus, while Exior’s species have eight and five or six respectively similarly arranged. The two tufts in B. brown are united by a ridge which, on dissection, is found to contain the afferent and efferent vessels of the branchiz. As the structure of the gills will be described later, it is sufficient here to mention that they are not fine dendritic structures like the gill-plumes represented by Bereu. ‘The anal papilla is much shorter than in the other species, but this is probably due to the relatively greater local distension of the hinder end of the specimen. The renal papilla is inconspicuous, and lies in the median line between the anus and the base of the gills. The extruded genitalia stand out conspicuously on the right side between the noteal margin and the foot, and are thrown further back than in the Dorids by the great size of the buccal region. ANATOMICAL DESCRIPTION. The importance of Bathydoris in any discussion of the interrelationships and classification of the Nudibranchs was recognised by both Beren and Exior, and, during the examination of the anatomical structure of the present species, this importance became increasingly impressive as system after system was considered. This was deemed to justify a more complete and detailed account of the anatomy than has hitherto been given, especially as facilities for such an account were amply provided in virtue of the excellent preservation of the specimen. In the course of this memoir it will be noted that the description disagrees with those of BergH and Etior on matters the bearings of which are of great theoretical interest. These contradictions are some- times so striking that the inclusion of the species in the genus Bathydoris seemed jeopardised. The points of agreement, however, form such convincing evidence of generic identity that the serious divergencies here given must be regarded as corrections, based on examination of a more favourable specimen, of observations partially frustrated by the poor condition of the material observed by previous workers. The various systems. will now be considered in order. 194 MR T. J. EVANS ON THE ALIMENTARY SYSTEM. It will be seen in fig. 2 that the general plan of the alimentary system of Bathydoris resembles that of the typical Dorid, but a detailed examination shows that there are very important differences. The great size of the buccal mass (b.m.) was emphasised by Brreu as a characteristic feature of the genus. Indeed, Bercu claimed its supposed relationship with the Tritonids solely on the character of the buccal mass and the radula. The mouth is surrounded by two sets of lips, an outer and aninner. ‘The outer lips are erinkled and fleshy, and leave a wide gape into which the inner lips project. These are merely the thickened rim of the outer integument limiting the buccal opening. The inner lips (p.m., figs. 2 and 3) are a pair of lateral pads enclosing a relatively small open- ing leading into the buccal cavity. The pads have the consistency and appearance of hyaline cartilage. Histological examination shows that the hyaline substance is a cuticular secretion which is continued in varying thickness as a lining of the alimentary tube from the buccal rim to the stomach. The underlying epithelium consists through- out of tall slender columnar cells, and corresponding columns of the secreted matter are faintly visible in the cuticle. The buccal cavity contains a pair of dark-brown horny jaws (J., fig. 3) supported on muscular pads (P.J., fig. 3) which separate them from the globular odontophore (o.) occupying the middle of the floor. The free edges of the jaws are quite blunt, and each is produced into a slight beak opposite the mouth; so that they are probably used as a prehensile organ. The mouth must be capable of far more extension than might be supposed from its preserved state in order to bring the jaws into action. The radula (R.) is narrow in front and broad behind where it enters the radula sac, and the sac is entirely contained in the substance of the odontophoral mass. ‘The first row of teeth has three teeth on either side of the rhachidian tooth and the radula broadens to 90. 1. 90, the formula of the youngest row. The total number of rows is about 50. The rhachidian tooth (Rh., fig. 4) has a broad base on which stands a backwardly directed cusp. The laterals (L.' to L.”) are formed on the same plan, but the cusp bends from the base towards the middle line. The first four laterals differ from the rest in having shorter and blunter cusps. Unlike those of the other species, the extreme laterals show little sign of reduction. ‘The teeth are firmly fixed in the specially thick cuticular covering of the radula mass, which is itself bilobed with a deep median depression. The direction of the cusps and of the underlying muscles suggests that the radula is used for gripping the food during trituration. ‘The approximation of the cusps of the first laterals thus entailed would also explain the broken and irregular appearance of the rhachidian cusps as well as the reduction in length of the cusps of the first few laterals. Comparison with the figures published by Bercu and Exior shows that the present species can be identified by its radula alone. The cesophagus (@. and cr., fig. 2) seems to differ from that of the other species in that it turns to the left, even at its origin from the buccal mass. It is a broad, sigmoid THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 195 tube with muscular walls lined, as already mentioned, by a thick cuticle. At its lower end it ends in a thin-walled sac, the stomach (s¢., fig. 5), lying below the liver, and partially imbedded in its substance. The lining of the cesophagus is, throughout its length, thrown into twelve raised longitudinal bands (b.0., fig. 5) which are covered with minute, blunt, brown cones of various sizes. As shown in fig. 6, the cones are partly imbedded in the cuticle of which they are specially resistent local modifications. The dark tint of the cuticle of the first half of the cesophagus and the extensive crinkling of its walls obscured the presence in it of the longitudinal bands which were only seen after clearing. Exior, who describes the denticulate bands in the second half of the cesophagus, may have overlooked them in the first half for the same reason. The same writer, in his account of B. hodgsoni, names the two regions of the cesophagus the first and second stomach—names which seem inappropriate for a thickly cuticularised tube which serves merely for the delivery of the food to the sac in which it is actually digested. The denticulate cuticle would, moreover, be quite ineffectual for the purpose of mastication, and probably serves as a protective layer against the coarse diet of mud, sponge, and small shells The thin-walled stomach stands at the junction of cesophagus, intestine (int., fig. 5), and main liver ducts (/.t.) into the expanded ends of which the food enters for some distance, as in Dorids generally. At its junction with the cso- phagus the stomach has a small pocket (s.7.) like that of the Dorids, which was not seen in any of the other species. Its function is not known, though such inapplicable names as “‘pancreas” and “ gall-bladder” have been applied to it by different authors. It may be mentioned that the similar stomach recess in Doris tuberculata secretes a glassy, refringent substance which is also found as a granular deposit on the mucosa of the intestine and on the massed Halichondria spicules passing down that tube. This suggests a protective function for the organ, its secretion acting as a lubricant for the passage of spiculose excrement down the intestine. The liver (/., figs. 2 and 5) isa bulky organ which is not invaded by gonad or kidney, and is unlobed except in so far as the intestine and the lower end of the cesophagus lie in furrows on its surface. The intestine is a rather broad, smooth tube making an are round the pericardium and end- ing by a sphinctered opening on the anal papilla. The alimentary tract contained one large piece of undigested sponge, and sponge spicules were present in all parts of the stomach and intestine. ‘There were also found much mud, bits of old shells, small pebbles, and the spines of Echinids. ‘he animal is therefore probably an omnivorous feeder, though the prevalence of sponge suggests that it has predilections for that group, like the Dorids. The salivary glands (s.g., fig. 2) are floceulent and voluminous, forming a mass on each side pressed against the wall of the cesophagus, and opening by stout ducts on the hinder wall of the buccal cavity. Bercu and Exior mistook them for the blood glands, but their histological structure puts their salivary nature beyond doubt. Moreover, the true blood glands were found elsewhere. 196 MR T. J. EVANS ON Tue Nervous System. (Fig. 7.) The brain of Bathydoris broadly resembles that of the Dorids, but with much less concentration of the ganglia. It lies on the top of the buccal bulb, the cerebral, pleural, and pedal pairs being quite separate, but lying close together. As fig. 7 shows, the ganglia are asymmetrical in shape and disposition. Each cerebral ganglion (c.g.) gives off four nerves from its anterior edge which go to the lips and oral tentacles, dividing as they go into a number of smaller nerves. The last bifurcations have small ganglionic swellings at the point of division, as in some Tectibranchs. On the posterior edge of the dorsal surface of the cerebral ganglion stands a small, almost sessile, proximal rhinophorial ganglion (p.rh.g.) which sends a stout nerve (rh.n.) to the dorsal tentacle. A distal rhinophorial ganglion swelling (not shown) marks the point of sub- division of the rhinophorial nerve as it enters the tentacle. No sub-cerebral commissure was found, so that the cerebrals are connected together below the alimentary tube by the stomato-gastric loop (s.g./.) only. The pedal ganglia (ped.g.) are connected by a stout pedal (ped.com.) and a slender parapedal commissure (p.ped.com.). In the notch between the pleural and pedal ganglia of the right side is placed a small] genital ganglion (gen.g.) which is broadly united to the pedal and connected with the pleural by a band of fibres from its lower aspect. From it four nerves go to the genitalia, both male and female, over the surface of which they distribute themselves with a number of local ganglionations on their courses. The pleural ganglia (pl.g.) give off two main lateral nerves on each side which supply the whole of the dorsal integument, with the exception of the anterior region which receives a number of very fine nerves from the pleurals not shown in the figure. The longer pair of pleural nerves pass back to the anal region, where they anastomose with each other and with a visceral nerve (br.n.) from the under surface of the right pleural ganglion. From the ganglia on this plexus the gills are supplied as in Doris tuberculata. ‘The visceral ganglion, so obvious on the under side of the right pleural ganglion of Doris, is not represented as a discrete mass in Bathydoris. The visceral ganglion of Doris would appear to include the visceral centres as well as the penial centre usually associated with the pedal. In Bathydoris, however, the genital centres of the visceral seem to be segregated from the rest and to be associated with the penial centre on the pedal to form a special genital ganglion. The long, finely ganglionated visceral loop (v./., v./.’) about the middle of its course sends backwards the chief visceral nerve (v.n.), which, after giving a branch to the gastro-cesophageal anastomosis on the stomach and liver, continues its course as the reno-cardiac. Two delicate nerves from the pleuro-pedal angle (see diagram) supply the branches of the aorta. The stomato- gastric ganglia (st.g.g.) are relatively very large, but their size is not surprising when we remember the dimensions and muscular complexity of the buccal mechanism which they innervate. ‘The inequality in length of the two cerebro-buccal connectives is pro- bably the result of the sharp sinistral bend of the cesophagus. There are no separate * THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. oi gastro-cesophageal ganglia, and the paired gastro-cesophageal nerves (g.0.n.) arise directly from the stomato-gastric ganglia. The paired nerves pass back in the con- nective-tissue investment of the cesophagus to the stomach, where they form a joint ganglionated anastomosis with the gastric branch of the visceral, as already described. From this plexus the stomach and liver receive their innervation, while the salivary glands are supplied from the gastro-cesophageals on their way down the cesophagus. This compound system of gastro-hepatic ganglia is paralleled in the Dorids, where it was described by ALDER and Hancock, while Dreyer has lately shown that an analogous arrangement is present in Aeolids and Tritonids. Like the other species examined anatomically, B. brown showed no trace of organs of sight, and otocysts could not be found by careful surface examination. They were, however, found on staining and clearing and also in sections of the brain. They are two small sacs placed close to the pleuro-pedal connectives on their lower aspect and partially imbedded in the connective-tissue capsule that surrounds the brain. The author has found small otocysts similarly placed in some of the Polyceratide. Otocysts were not found in the species examined by BEreu and by Extor. Tue Exorerory System. (Fig. 8.) The kidney of Bathydorvs is unusually well developed. This was also noted by Exroz, who described two fern-like organs lying over the liver as well as the renal syrinx. Extot, however, misconceived the nature of the renal organ, since he took the paired, fern-like structures to represent the main portion of the kidney, whereas they are merely outgrowths of its floor or ventral wall in the posterior half. The whole renal organ is a huge sac extending from almost the extreme posterior end of the body to within a short distance of the head, but narrowing in front on account of pressure between the alimentary canal and the genital mass. Posteriorly, its delicate dorsal wall is overlain by the pericardium, to which it is connected by fibres. Elsewhere it bulges free except where it is pinched by the intestinal loop (¢nt.). This dorsal wall is throughout non-glandular, except at two points—namely, at its extreme anterior corner (b.g.’) and at a place in front of the pericardium (b.g.”) where a diverticulum of it lies as a flap across the intestine. These two points will be further mentioned in connection with the vascular system, because the two phagocytic or blood glands lie here adherent to the wall of the kidney. The glandular part of the kidney is therefore almost entirely confined to its ventral wall and to those parts of it which are folded inwards into the renal cavity as the two fern-like structures seen by Exior. These, however, are not two but six in number, the posterior pair being more fern-like than the other two which lie on the surface of the gonad (/.g.). These glandular regions coincide with the areas of distribution of great branches of the aorta, and the narrow strip-like folds forming the two anterior pairs may easily be mistaken for the arterial trunks themselves, which actually lie within them below the renal wall. The vascular 198 MR T. J. EVANS ON supply of the kidney is therefore purely arterial, and all the renal arteries arise from an aortic bulb (a.c.) opening into the ventricle at the point o.v. in fig. 8, and continu- ing forwards as the cephalic artery (c.art.). The extensions of the renal arteries into the gonad are not shown in fig. 8. The blood delivered by the renal arteries—which, as we have seen, occupy the crests of the glandular folds—passes on into venous lacunee which lie deeper in the substance of the folds, and open into a great median venous space, lying between the kidney and liver behind, and between the gonad and liver in front. Into this median venous space also passes the blood that has traversed the gonad and liver. The main collecting reservoir of the kidney lies behind the gonad, and in its hinder wall is seen the opening into the renal duct which leads to the exterior. In it originates the reno-pericardial duct (7.p.d.), consisting of a median tube opening in front by a funnel into the renal chamber, and a renal syrinx (7.s.) opening on the floor of the pericardium. ‘The syrinx is a bulbous structure with a wide lumen which is almost filled with delicate laminate ingrowths of the epithelial lining. Sections of the floor of the kidney show that the gland cells lying in connection with the renal arteries contain concretions, often of large size, which stain faintly with basic dyes. The con- cretions collect in big vacuoles, which finally burst and liberate the excreted contents. The foliations of the wall of the syrinx are covered with cells of two kinds. The distal part of a lamina—namely, the free edge towards the middle of the lumen—is covered by ciliated cells only, the cilia being extremely long. The proximal part—namely, that nearer the wall of the syrinx—is glandular, and the cells contain fine granules of a substance which takes acid dyes. These cells are continued on to the wall of the pericardium. The renal organ of Bathydoris and its vascular supply are thus Dorid in type, the reno-pericardial duct, especially, being almost identical in structure with its homologue in Doris. ‘The association with the blood glands, non-functional though that may be, the absence of ramifications into underlying organs, and its forward extension into the head region are features not paralleled among true Dorids. THe Vascutar System. (Figs. 9 and 10.) In general, the vascular system of Bathydoris resembles that of the Dorids, but in several respects distinct affinities with the blood system of the Pleurobranchids are exhibited. It may be conveniently described under the following heads :— (1) The Heart. The most obvious feature of the heart and pericardium is their asymmetrical disposition, since the antero-posterior axis, unlike that of the true Dorids, lies at an angle to the long axis of the body. The pericardium is a spacious cavity lying posteriorly on the surface of the kidney, with the reno-pericardial opening in its extreme right-hand corner. THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. ng9 The asymmetry of position mentioned above is an insignificant matter compared with the structural asymmetry shown by the heart itself. The typical Dorid heart is roughly an isosceles triangle with three efferent ducts opening into its base, the efferent branchial in the middle and the two lateral integumental sinuses at the corners. The auricle of Bathydoris, on the contrary, receives but one efferent vessel, which enters it at the right-hand side, the efferent branchial vessel and the lateral sinuses being con- fluent outside the pericardium altogether, as in the Pleurobranchids. The left side of the auricle is fused for some distance with the pericardial wall, along which it sends a muscular wing. ‘This asymmetry, as we shall see later, is only one of many pre-Dorid and ancestral opisthobranch features exhibited by Bathydoris. (2) The Arterral System. Although the arterial system possesses no striking feature, it is proposed to describe it somewhat fully, because no comprehensive account exists of the arterial system of any Dorid except Hancock and Emsieron’s account of Doris tuberculata in their famous article in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society. The ventricle (v.) is immediately followed by a large aortic bulb (a.c.) from which arise the renal arteries (see kidney), as well as vessels to the intestinal loop, the gonad and the periphery of the liver mass lying below. The aortic bulb is continued forwards as the main cephalic artery (c.art.) This gives off on the left the visceral artery (v.art.), running below the intestine and supplying the liver, stomach, and cesophagus. In fig. 9 the arterial trunks lying below the outlined viscera are dot-shaded. After giving off the genital arteries (g.art.) on the right, the cephalic artery bifurcates, one branch passing over the cesophagus to the left and the other below the buccal mass to the right. The left branch provides both salivary glands (sal.g.), the brain (cer.art.), and the buccal muscles of both sides, while the right branch goes direct into a spacious infra-pharyngeal lacuna (/ac.), in which the left also ends. This lacuna was also found in Doris tuberculata. It should be noted that the cephalic artery forms a complete collar round the cesophagus and buccal bulb. From the central lacuna under the bulb arise a number of vessels. A median vessel passes straight up into the bulb (buc.avrt.) ; three run forward into the lips (/ab.art.) and floor of the mouth, while a broad median vessel dips into the foot and bends backward in its substance, to continue throughout _ its length as a median pedal artery (ped.art.) (3) The General Hemoceele. The irregular lacunar blood-space in which lie all the viscera is in Bathydoris nowhere spacious. It receives the blood that has passed through the tissues from the arteries, except the renal, gonadial, and hepatic blood, which is collected in another way already indicated in the description of the kidney. The hemoccelic blood passes partly into the gills and partly into the dorsal integument, but the proportion of blood TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 6). 27 200 MR T. J. EVANS ON that passes into the integument is much in excess of that in the Dorids. The thin skin, studded with papille, is conducive to this amplification of the tegumentary respiration in Bathydoris, while the thick, glandular, and spiculose skin of the Dorids has vitiated this system and necessitated the extension of the special gills. The dorsal wall of the hemoccele is a membrane more or less bound to the underlying organs by conjunctive-tissue fibres. ‘This membrane is separated from the dorsal integument by an empty space, but runs into it at the side of the body all round. ‘Thus, when an incision is made through the dorsal body-wall, the space entered is not the hemoceele, but this closed cavity between the body-wall and the dorsal wall of the hemoceele. The same arrangement is present in the Dorids alone among Nudibranchs, though the shell- cavity of Pleurobranchus closely resembles the problematic dorsal cavity of the Dorids. Whatever be the nature of the cavity, Hancock and EmBLeron’s name— peritoneum —for its lining should not be perpetuated. The passage of blood from the underlying heemoccele into the skin and its papillary outgrowths takes place below the level of the edge of the dorsal heemoccelic wall all round. ‘The blood that runs from the hemoccele to the gills passes along two narrow conduits on the posterior aspect of the liver (h.v., fig. 10). This must be regarded as of secondary importance in the afferent branchial system. (4) The Afferent Branchial System. (Fig. 10.) Blood enters the branchize from two sources: (a) from the hemoccele by the small paired ducts (/.v.) already mentioned, and (b) from a great median venous space (m.s.) lying above the liver, which receives the blood from the kidney, liver, and gonad. Just before narrowing in order to enter the gills (a.b.v.), it receives the paired ducts from the heemoccele (a). (See also the description of the kidney.) The afferent space at the base of the gills is not a circle, as in the Dorids, but a transverse expansion of the afferent vein from which ramifying tubes run up the branchie. (5) The Efferent Branchials. The afferent and efferent venules in the gill-leaflets form continuous loops from the afferent to the efferent side of a gill lobe, and the efferent veins from the two gills join together to form a transverse space at the base of the gills similar to the contiguous afferent space. This space is connected with the auricle by a tube (e.b.v.) running to the right and entering the auricle at its right-hand corner. (6) The Efferent Tegumentary System. The blood that enters the skin and its papillee from the hzmoccele returns from all sides into a circular sinus (c.s.) running round the edge of the pericardium. The efferent tubules returning blood into the sinus were described by BERGH as renal tubules in L. abyssorum. The sinus opens behind into the efferent branchial vein just before THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 201 it reaches the right corner of the pericardium to empty itself into the auricle. The circular sinus is also represented in the Pleurobranchids, where it also opens into the efferent vessel, but takes a wider sweep round the body. In the Dorids it is repre- sented by the two lateral sinuses, which there, however, enter the auricle separately and directly. (7) The Blood Glands. (b.g.’ and b.g.” Figs. 8 and 9.) ) The structures commonly called “blood glands” are characteristic of some Tecti- branch families (Bullids and Pleurobranchids) and of the Dorids. They are lymphatic or phagocytic glands situated on the course of the cephalic artery and supplied by it. In the Dorids they lie in the head region near the brain, but in the Tectibranchs they are placed further back. In Bathydoris they form two separate masses united to the wall of the kidney. It is of some interest to note that in the Prosobranchs possessing them they are also associated with the kidney, so that in this, as in many other respects, Bathydoris presents features more primitive than the true Dorids, the equivalents of which are found among Tectibranchs rather than Nudibranchs. As already mentioned, Beres and Exior confused the unusual salivary glands with the blood glands, the identity of which they did not recognise. THe ReEsPrraToRY SYSTEM. As already indicated in connection with the vascular system, the general pallial respiration is rendered more effective by the papillary outgrowths, and the blood so oxygenated returns into the circular sinus. The special respiratory organs or branchiz are two tufts placed symmetrically on a transverse ridge in front of the anus. Each tuft stands on a broad base or stalk in such a way as to give the appearance of a roughly pinnate condition. The lobate units of the tuft resemble the pinne of the gill of Pleurobranchza, being laminate on opposite faces of a wide rhachis, while the afferent and efferent vessels occupy its edges. The laminz vary in size from mere ridges across the face of the rhachis to longish leaves which may themselves be provided with lamine. In this way an irregular bipinnate condition is simulated. It will be seen that, by narrowing the rhachis so as to bring the ascending and descending vessels nearer together and regularising the pinnation, the Dorid plume would be produced. On the other hand, if the laminze were equal in size and the tufts stretched along the ridge in a regular row, the sessile portion of a Pleurobranchid ctenidium would result. The gill of Bathydoris brownw would therefore appear to be in a condition intermediate between a typical Dorid rosette of plumes and a Tectibranch gill. There is, however, no indica- tion of a circumanal circlet either in the gill itself or in the underlying vessels, and though the tufts are provided with muscles capable of reducing their height, they cannot be retracted below the general level of the integument. 202 MR T. J. EVANS ON Tue Repropuctive System. (Fig. 12.) No adequate description or figure of this system in a Bathydoris has hitherto been given, but both Enior and Bercu give a somewhat hesitating impression that it is constructed on the Dorid plan. Since the universal triauly of known Dorids is one of their most striking characteristics, it is essential that on such a critical point our knowledge should be clear and definite. The hermaphrodite gonad (h.g.) lies posteriorly below the kidney and above the liver within the are made by the intestine. It is a yellowish, bi-convex lenticular body, truncated in front and with a minutely lobulated surface. The specimen was captured at the stage of male activity in the protandric cycle, since the male acini and ducts are full of sperms, while the eggs are small and lightly yolked. Its blood supply is an extension of the renal arterial system, branches from which pass through the lower wall of the kidney into its substance. The common hermaphrodite duct (c.h.d.) leaves the gonad as a single slender tube. It is ampullated (amp.), as usual in Nudibranchs, but its extreme length escaped previous notice. After a short, slender portion beyond the ampulla, it divides into two tubes, the vas deferens (v.d.) and the oviduct (0.d.). The vas deferens is a comparatively short, coiled tube, expanded by the glands in its walls ito a prostate for nearly the whole of its length. It enters the penis sac (p.s.) some distance from the end and runs a straight course to the tip of the everted penis imbedded in loose connective tissue and muscle fibres. The mode of extroversion of the penis, deducible from dissection of the everted organ, is represented in the section- diagrams (fig. 11, a and 6), the dotted area representing loose fibrous tissue the perfusion of which with blood from the heemoccele causes the extroversion. The penis is seen to be a partial introvert, since the end is retracted into the sac unchanged. This terminal portion (p.) presents a remarkable appearance on account of the sucker- like pits covering one side of it. It is possible that the pits, under control of the blood-pressure in the penis, really act as suckers on the smooth surface of the female atrial wall. The oviduct soon enters the massive mucus-albumen gland complex (m.g. and a.g.), the structure of which could not be investigated on account of its stony hardness. The albumen gland could be recognised on the upper surface by its yellowish-brown colour and its granular consistency. The coils of the mucus gland end distally as the broad tube which opens into the female atrium. The atrium is turned out as in copulation : the first part of it has a highly crinkled surface, but inside this arise two leaf-like lips (a./.), or folds of its surface, which between them enclose the entrance (f0.) into the female channel. These valvular lips appear to be a characteristic feature of Bathydoris, because they are also partially shown in surface view in B. clavigera by THIELE. Within the valve on the posterior wall of the channel opens the vagina (vg.), which consists of a stout tube ending blindly in a globular recurved bursa copulatrix (b.c.). THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 203 There is no second sac on the course of the vagina, which is also the only connection between the bursa and the female channel. From this it follows that the herma- phrodite duct of Bathydoris divides but once—namely, into a male and a female duct. The Dorid duct bearing the so-called spermatocyst, and connecting the bursa with the region of fertilisation in the course of the oviduct, is totally unrepresented. In short, Bathydoris browna is typically diaulic, like Tvitonza and the Pleurobranchids. Externally, the everted organs are surrounded by a rim representing the limit of the common genital vestibule of the male and female system. SYNOPSIS OF SPECIFIC AND GENERIC CHARACTERS. When we come to analyse the differences between the foregoing account and those of the two previous investigators of the genus, we encounter considerable ditticulties in deciding which are specific differences and which may be put forward as corrections. To the latter category we may presume to relegate all differences in regard to which previous statements have been qualified or made with reservation. The specific distinctness of Bathydoris brownz is undoubtedly more striking than that of any of the other recorded species, and, since the animal was mature, there can be no question of its being the young of any one of them. Among characters pre- sumably not of generic rank which distinguish the species may be mentioned the following :— (1) The uniformity in size and shape of the lateral teeth of the radula. (2) The pitted pad on the glans penis. (3) The immediate sinistral bend of the cesophagus at its origin from the buccal mass and the unequal lengths of the cerebro-buccal connectives. The causal connection between these two features stamps them as true anatomical constants. (4) The two tufted gills placed on a traverse ridge symmetrically in front of the anus. On the basis adopted above, it is likely that the following features in which the present account differs from those of Brercu and Extor may be regarded as of generic value :— (1) The diauly of the reproductive system. (2) The circular canal embracing the pericardium and collecting blood from the dorsal integument. (3) The follicular nature and great size of the salivary glands. (4) The presence of two blood glands on the wall of the kidney (the structures described as such by Bercy and Extor turned out, on histological examina- tion, to be the follicles of the salivary glands; the true blood glands were not seen by these authors). (5) The asymmetrical opening of the efferent vein into the auricle. (6) The great saccular kidney with its ventral wall thrown into folds. 204 MR T. J. EVANS ON (7) The segregation of the genital elements of the visceral into a distinct ganglion on the surface of the brain. (8) The possession of a proximal and a distal rhinophorial ganglion. (9) The cuticularisation of the wall of the alimentary canal as far as the stomach (the horny cones imbedded in the cuticle were described by HExior for B. hodgson, but no armature was found by Brereu in B. abyssorum and B. ingolfiana ; its systematic value cannot therefore be assigned). (10) The presence of a gastric cecum. (11) The presence of small otocysts below the pleuro-pedal connective. The genus may now be defined in the following terms, of which some are supple- mentary to BerGu’s original definition :— Body highly arched and elliptical in outline. The edge of the noteeum slight or wanting. Dorsal papillae present or absent. Rhinophores placed rather far back, non- retractile, perfoliated. Gulls in front of the anal papilla, variable in number, non- retractile. Buccal mass very bulky. Radula sac not an appendage. Dental formula n. 1. n. Buccal cavity with a thick cuticle extending down the cesophagus. Powerful jaws present. (isophagus may have horny cones. Liver massive and unlobed, not invaded by any other viscus. Salivary glands follicular, flattened, with a stout duct. Cerebral and pleural ganglia distinct. Stomatogastric loop very long. No gastro-cesophageal ganglia, but the long gastro-cesophageal loop arises from the buccals. yes absent. Kidney saccular with laminate ingrowths of its ventral wall. Branchial and pallial efferents join before entering the right side of the auricle. Penis unarmed and massive. Hermaphrodite gland a compact mass. Reproductive system diaulic. Tue AFFINITIES OF BAaTHYDORIS. Berex and Exior have invested Dathydoris with a certain importance as a type combining the features of the Dorids with certain Tritonid characters, with prepon- derating affinities to the Dorids. The Tritonid features accentuated by BERGH were the buccal apparatus and the unarmed penis, while Exior rightly passes over the latter resemblance unnoticed, since an armature of the penis may be present or absent among the species of some genera of Dorids. As to the buccal apparatus, even a superficial examination shows that, when reference has been made to the great size of the buccal muscles and the jaws, the sole resemblance has been stated in full. In Zvitonia the odontophoral mass arises from the dorsal wall of the buccal cavity and bulges down- wards, while in Bathydoris that organ arises from the floor of the buccal cavity and bulges upwards. The mandibles are also quite differently placed and used in the two animals, those of 7’ritonia having their long, finely serrulated cutting edges facing the floor of the mouth cavity below the radula mass, while the blunt beaks of the mandibles of Bathydoris jut into the mouth above the radula. Moreover, the cesophagus takes its origin on the hinder aspect of the globular buccal bulb of Bathydoris, while the i Tse! CU THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 205 cesophagus of 7ritonia rises out of the dorsal surface of the bulb and well forward, the main bulk of muscles being behind it. These and corresponding differences in the muscular mechanism suffice to make good the statement made above, that the supposed resemblances are confined to size and the presence of powerful jaws. It should be mentioned that Brercu refers specially to Bornella in assigning Tritonid features to Bathydoris; without discussing the problematic relationship of Bornella to the Tritonids, suttice it to state that the large buccal apparatus of that form differs from that of both Tritoma and Bathydoris. It is indeed likely that these three cases of powerful and mandibulate mouth parts are examples of convergence in unrelated types. The only other reference to a non- Dorid affinity of Bathydoris is made by Exvior when he compares the armature of the “stomach” with that found in Bornel/la. This comparison is strange, coming from an author who has since, in the Ray Society’s monograph, separated the two genera in his first cleavage of the Nudibranchs. In any case the comparison is untenable, since the two armatures are totally unlike in structure and position, that of Bornella being situated in a region of the alimentary tube posterior to the point of entrance of the liver ducts. On the foregoing grounds we must regard the proposed Tritonid and Bornellid affinities of Bathydoris as inadmissible. It is, however, obvious that the investigation of this last species has brought out certain features of the genus which render necessary the reopening of the discussion of its affinities and, as we shall see later, those of the Dorids generally. It is no less certain that the genus presents a combination of characters far more significant than that considered by Bercu when he assigned its aflinities—namely, a Dorid gill of a primitive form, an asymmetrical heart and efferent branchial system, blood glands placed far back on the course of the aorta, a thin integument with scattered branchiate outgrowths, a diaulic reproductive system, a liver distinct from the gonad and kidney, a brain with separate ganglia, a nerve collar embracing the buccal bulb and not the cesophagus, and finally, but perhaps least significant, a powerful buccal apparatus. That Bathydoris must be definitely placed among doridiform animals follows from its possession of the following striking Dorid characteristics :— (a) The collocation of the anus, renal pore, and gills in the median line posteriorly. The gill is, however, more primitive than the typical rosette form common among Dorids, though primitive gills are also found in such types as Trevelyana and Nembrotha. (b) With the exception of the buccal mass and the protected cesophagus, the alimentary canal is Dorid, even to the possession of a gastric cecum, and those divergent features are adaptations to a coarser and more omnivorous diet. The enlargement of the salivary glands is probably due to the same cause. (c) The kidney is a Dorid structure, the reno-pericardial tube and syrinx being practically identical with those of Doris as described by Hancock 206 MR T. J. EVANS ON and by Hecut. The absence of ramifications is, doubtless, a primitive character. (d) The blood system is built essentially on Dorid lines, but presents a greater number of primitive features than any other. Chief among them are the possession of but one auricular efferent opening, the union of the circular collecting canal of the integumental system with the efferent branchial, and the position of the blood glands. It is noteworthy that these primitive features are points of agreement with the Tectibranchs, especially the Pleurobranchids. (e) As to the reproductive system, its diaulic condition makes it more primitive than that of any other known Dorid; but, apart from that very important divergence, it closely resembles that of Doris, since the separation of the gonad from the liver is found in a typical Dorid like Alloiodorvs. (f) The nervous system, in spite of a close similarity to the Dorid type in most respects, differs from it in several important points. Of these, the length of the nerve collar and the position of the brain on the top of the buccal mass are paralleled in Zritonva and the Pleurobranchids, and should probably be regarded as primitive, while the distinctness of the ganglia of the brain and the absence of separate gastro-cesophageals, if primitive features, take us back to a condition earlier than that found in the Pleurobranchids and Tritona. The fusion of the ganglia of the visceral loop with the pleurals is, on the other hand, a modern feature, as is the loss of eyes consequent on the adoption of a deep-water habitat. We conclude, therefore, that Bathydoris is a highly primitive Dorid possessing some characters that adapt it to a specialised habitat and mode of life, while those that are primitive connect it with the Tectibranchs, particularly the Pleurobranchids among existing forms. ‘The derivation of the Dorids from Pleurobranchid ancestors is, however, no new proposition. Gutart, for example, has recently advocated their union into one group, and PELSENEER has derived all Nudibranchs from the Pleurobranchids with 7ritonva as an intermediate link. BrErGu’s advocacy of a special relationship between Bathydoris and Tritonia on the evidence of the buccal apparatus has already been criticised. PELSENEER’S position, however, takes a wider outlook, but takes no cognisance of Bathydoris at all. He bases his contention of the Tritonid origin of all Nudibranchs on the possession by Tritonia, in common with the Pleurobranchids, of a large number of primitive Nudibranch characters which are not found together in any other Nudibranchs. These are :—a frontal veil, formed by the fusion of the oral tentacles of the Pleurobranchid, a wide foot, a ventricle turned to the right, a broad radula, a nervous system placed on the buccal bulb, an cesophageal crop, extensive salivary glands, a saccular, unramified kidney, a long reno-pericardial tube, pericardial glands on the auricle, male and female openings in a common vestibule, and a lateral anus. Of these, it will be noticed that THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 207 Bathydoris possesses all except the lateral anus. Further, it retains oral tentacles in a condition more strongly reminiscent of those of Plewrobranchea than that of the oral veil of 7ritonia, while the separate ganglia of the brain and the separate gonad of Bathydoris can certainly not be regarded as new and derived features in that genus. Thus, excluding the case of the lateral anus, which will be considered separately, Bathy- doris, which is essentially Dorid in construction, exhibits all the primitive features of Tritoma, some indeed being more primitive than the corresponding ones in 7ritonia, the supposed ancestor. At this reductio ad absurdum we arrive by considering only those primitive features selected by PELSENEER, without calling in the evidence of the blood and respiratory systems wherein 7vitonia, with its symmetrical auricle receiving blood from symmetrical lateral sinuses, appears very modern indeed. Itisin the complete avoidance of any comparison between vascular and respiratory systems in 7ritoma and Pleurobranchids that the weakness of the Tritonid theory of Nudibranch descent lies, and it is significant that on the characters of these very systems is primarily based any discussion of gastropod and even molluscan aflinities. Previous application of this eriterion in the Opisthobranchs has resulted in their cleavage into Tectibranchs with a ctenidial gill and Nudibranchs with pallial outgrowths of varied form and distribution replacing the lost ctenidium. Of these neomorphic gills the lateral tufts of Tritonia have been regarded as an early type, but it is not clear whether the Dorid circlet was derived from them by concentration or by local specialisation round a posterior anus or was evolved independently. Nor is it clear why modern writers on the Opisthobranchs have always accepted the neomorphic nature of the Dorid circlet. It is true that a comparison of the highly specialised, multipinnate plumes placed in a pit in the tuberculate dorsum of some Dorids provides no suggestion of homology with the etenidium of a Tectibranch ; but it is not such a comparison of extremes that evinces homologies. In Bathydoris, however, the gill is in two portions only, joined by a erinkled ridge, it shows but the beginnings of pinnation, its lobes have the broad laminze running from the afferent to the efferent side seen in the ctenidium of the Tectibranch, and there is no suggestion of the circumanal ring in either the gill or the underlying vessels. From this point of view the extreme similarity of the condition of the auricle, the efferent branchial vessel, and the circular sinus in Bathydoris and the Pleurobranchids acquires a special significance. Evidence derived from the nature of the innervation is perhaps of doubtful value; but, so far as it goes, it is favourable to the present contention, since the Dorid gill is jointly innervated from pleural and visceral centres, while other Nudibranch gills receive no visceral nerves unless invaded by ramifications of the liver. The dorsal position of the Dorid gill should present little difficulty, since the pallial edge of the Dorids is undoubtedly a new formation of mechanical value which progressively increases in width within the group and is absent in many genera. In any case, the same difficulty would apply to the anus and renal pore, and there is no proposal to class them as new formations in the Dorids. The separa- tion into two or more parts also forms no objection to the ctenidial nature of the Dorid TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 6). 28 208 MR T. J. EVANS ON gill, since it is a progressive process in the group and is incipient in many Tectibranchs, including Aplysia. Moreover, at least one Dorid, Trevelyana crocea, has a single un- divided laminate gill indistinguishable from a ctenidium. Furthermore, the three residual units of the pallial complex—namely, the kidney and its pore, the intestine with the anus, and the gill—occupy in the Dorids just those relative positions which they would occupy had they been turned over from the Tectibranch position into the median dorsal line. Here one is inclined to ask what is the nature of the great cavity, cut off from the underlying hemoccele, which lies under the dorsal integument of the Dorid, but is absent in all other Nudibranchs. An exactly similar cavity in Pleurobranchus or Oscanius contains a shell-remnant, and is the shell-cavity. In the absence of any information regarding the metamorphosis of the veliger of either Dorids or Pleuro- branchids, it is difficult to find any satisfactory reason for contradicting the homology of these two spaces. It is on the above grounds proposed to define the Dorids as ctenidiate Opisthobranchs that have retained the shell-cavity and in which the elements of the pallial complex have moved dorsally into the median line. In this position the ctenidium has under- gone progressive modification within the group, the retractile circlet being its highest development. In Tritonia, on the other hand, the residual members of the pallial complex have remained in a more anterior position than they occupy in many Tectibranchs, and in that position the old molluscan gill has been lost. Whereas in the Dorids and Pleuro- branchids the connection of the auricle with lateral integumentary sinuses is supple- mentary to the ctenidial connection, in Zritonia it is the sole remaining connection of the auricle with respiratory sinuses. As a primitive actenidiate animal, however, Tritona retains many common features with the Dorids and Pleurobranchids, its nearest ctenidiate relatives. BIBLIOGRAPHY. (1) Brreu, R., “ Report on the Nudibranchiata,” ‘‘ Challenger” Hapedition, vol. x., 1884. (2) —— “Nudibranchiate Gasteropoda,” Danish “Ingolf” Expedition, vols. ii.—iii., 1900. (3) Dreyer, T. H., “ Uber das Blutgefiss- und Nervensystem der Aeolididae und Tritoniadae,” Zedtschr, f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xcvi., 1910. (4) Enior, Sir Cuarues, A Monograph of the British Nudibranchiate Mollusca, part viii., Ray Society, 1910. “Report on the Mollusca Nudibranchiata collected by the Discovery,” National Antarctic Expedition Reports, 1907. (6) Gurart, J., ‘‘ Les Mollusques Tectibranches,” Causeries scientifiques de la Soc. Zool. de France, 1900. (7) Contribution a Vétude des Gastéropodes Opisthobranches, Lille, 1901. (8) Hancock, “On the Structure and Homologies of the Renal Organ in the Nudibranchiate Mollusca,” Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxv., 1865. (9) Hancoox and Emerton, “On the Anatomy of Doris,” Phil. Trans., London, 1852. (10) Hecur, E., ‘ Contribution a I’étude des Nudibranches,” Mém. Soc. Zool. de France, vol. viii., 1895. (5) THE ANATOMY OF A NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. 209 , (11) ps Lacazg-Dutuisrs, H., “Histoire anatomique et physiologique du Pleurobranche orangé,” Ann. Sct. Nat. (4), xi., 1859. (12) Mogur1n-Tanpon, G., Recherches anatomiques sur ?Ombrelle de la Méditerranée, Thése de Paris, 1870. (13) Peusenesr, P., Recherches sur divers Opistobranches, Gand, 1893. (14) Turetz, J., “Die antarktischen Schnecken und Muscheln,” Deutsche Stidpolar Expedition, Berlin, 1912. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVII. AND XVIII. Bathydoris browntt. Fig. 1. The animal seen from the dorsal side, natural size. Fig. 2. General view of the alimentary system from above. 0.m., buccal mass ; er., cesophageal crop ; int., intestine ; 1., liver; @., esophagus; p.m., lateral pads of the inner lips; s.g., salivary glands. ; Fig. 3. Buccal cavity laid open from above. J., jaws; o., odontophore; @., esophagus ; P.J., pads of the jaw ; p.m., pads of inner lips; R., radula. Fig. 4. Portion of a half-row of the radula. L.'-L.”, lateral teeth 1 to 5; Rh., rhachidian tooth. Fig. 5. Stomach and adjacent parts of the alimentary canal laid open; the cut is continued into the posterior lobe of the liver. 0.0., bands on the wall of the crop; /., liver ; int., intestine ; /.t., liver ducts; s.r., gastric cecum ; st., stomach. Fig. 6. Section across an cesophageal band. 0.c., brown cones; ct., cuticle; ep., epithelial layer; m., muscle layers. Fig. 7. Nervous system. 6.co., buccal commissure; c.y., cerebral ganglion ; gen.g., genital ganglion ; g.0.n., gastro-cesophageal nerves ; ped.g., pedal ganglion; ped.com., pedal commissure ; p.ped.com., parapedal commissure ; pl.g., pleural ganglion ; s.g./., buccal loop; st.g.g., stomato-gastric or buccal ganglion; v./., v.14, visceral loop ; v.n., visceral nerve. Fig. 8. Kidney with thin dorsal wall removed. a.c., aortic bulb ; 0.g.', 6.g.4, lobes of the kidney to which the blood glands are attached; c.art., cephalic artery; h.g., hermaphrodite gonad; znt., intestine; o.v., opening of aortic swelling into the ventricle ; 7.d., renal tube to exterior ; r.p.d., reno-pericardial duct; 1.:s., renal syrinx. Fig. 9. Arterial system. a.c., aortic bulb; b9.', b.g.4, blood glands; c.art., cephalic artery ; cer.art., cerebral artery ; buc.art., buccal artery; g.art., genital artery ; dab.art., labial arteries; /ac., lacuna under buccal mass ; ped.art., pedal artery ; sal.g., salivary gland ; v.art., visceral artery. Fig. 10. Diagram of the afferent and efferent vessels. a.b.v., afferent branchial vein; awr., auricle; ¢.s., circular sinus ; e.b.v., efferent branchial vein ; h.v., hemoccelic vessels ; m.s., median sinus. Fig. 11, a and 6. Diagram showing the relation of the penis to its sheath in the retracted and protruded condition, Fig. 12. General view of the reproductive system. a.i., atrial lips ; a.g., albumen gland ; amp., ampulla ; b.c., bursa copulatrix ; c.h.d., common hermaphrodite duct; f.o., female opening; h.g., gonad ; m.g., mucus gland ; o.d., oviduct; p., pitted pad on penis; p.s., penis sac; v.d., vas deferens; vg., vagina. ns. Roy. Soc. Edint. Volk Plate xvi EVANS: NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. \ th.n. | A-RITCHIE & SON, EDIN®™ B. Roy. Soc. Edin, Vol.L Plate XVIII. EVANS: NEW SPECIES OF BATHYDORIS. ib. FIG.U. 3 ped art. _- bue.art. a ay cr La = { { ‘ | = i ‘oa i ¢ * (211 ) VIl.—Rupture Stresses in Beams and Crane Hooks. By Angus R. Fulton, B.Sc., A.M.Inst.C.E., Engineering Department, University College, Dundee. Communicated by Professor A. H. Gipson, D.Sc., A.M.Inst.C.E. (MS. received November 4, 1913. Read February 16,1914. Issued separately April 15, 1914.) I. Benpinc Moment as IN A BEAM. In connection with a research into the failure of timber under stress, carried out by the author, and on which a paper was read before the Royal Society of Edinburgh and published in their Transactions,* many of the tests were made by cross-breaking. The probable development of the stress diagram of a beam of rectangular section, supported at two ends and loaded in the middle where the tensile and compressive strengths of the material are of different values, was illustrated in fig. 38 of that paper. It was there laid down that when the fracture point was ultimately reached either (a) the tension and compression stress areas both assume the rectangular form and are equal to each other, the stress ordinates respectively being equal to the ultimate breaking stresses of the material in direct tension and compression ; or (b) the cohesion between adjacent fibres measured from the neutral axis outwards is not sufficient to withstand the shear induced by the resisting moment of the beam, a shear which is at a maximum along the neutral axis of the beam. These assumptions made for the case of beams of rectangular sections might be said to have found verification in the experiments on such beams of various timbers supported at two ends and loaded in the middle, the results of which were tabulated in that paper. Expervments on Cast-Iron Beams. Since then the author has carried out a number of similar tests on rectangular beams made of cast iron, a material which differs from timber in that it apparently possesses no plastic stage such as characterises the latter. The specimens used for the purpose of obtaining direct tensile and compressive stresses were cast from the same melting as the beams and so were directly comparable. The average values obtained for these direct stresses were :— Cast Iron. Tension stress, T= 9°5 tons per sq. in. Compression stress, C=45°5 ,, 4, 5, The dimensions of test pieces used in compression were 23 in. long and 1% in. x £ in. The formula as derived in the paper referred to, and presumably applicable to all * Trans, R.S.H., vol. xlviii., 1912, pp. 417-440. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 7). 29 212 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON rectangular beams in which an ultimate rectangular distribution of stress is reached, gives :— i F f T+ M T+ = Z'0— —— = == Se “ a 5 (Sig SCL) “mee (1) where t= the ultimate extreme tensile fibre stress m beam, a Be ss compressive fibre stress in beam, M= ,, external bending moment, = ,, ultimate direct tensile stress of the material, C=a4 _ , compressive stress of the material, = ,, breadth, and d=depth of the beam. Substituting for M= a since the beams were loaded in the centre and supported at the two ends, and for T and C the average values obtained, we have b= "(O0—— ancl rere for cast iron. Table I. gives the results of the beam experiments, and it will be seen that the calculated values of the extreme fibre stresses t and ¢ agree very well with the TABLE I, Castv-Iron Beams. Tons per sq. in, Elastic Formula. LOR Breaking No.| Span. | 0. d. Weight in Tons. WL WL WL t 105° c=3 aa t=c bbs 1B, E,, 1 |} 36 | 2-00 | 1-02 8 97 46°17 20°77 1-48 2) 12 | 1:02 | 2:00 4°43 9°14 43:50 19°57 xe 3 | 36 | 1:00 | 1:95 1:45 9°65 45:93 20°67 1°85 4) 12 | 1:00 | 1:95 4°29 9°45 45:00 20°25 Date 2's | 1:95.) 1°00, Pos ir 9°31 44°33 19°95 6 | 36 | 1:05 | 2:05 156 oi 43°67 19°65 1°53 i) 12} 2:05 , 2°05 4°34 8°30 39°50 ane S| 12 | 2°06 | 1:00 2°2 8°61 41°10 18°45 “3s 9| 36 | 2°03 | 1:07 65 7:07 33°67 15°15 1°35 LOR L291 2703. | T07 al 9193 7:00 33°33 15:00 Ly 22s | Or. 2-03 4°43 8:47 40°33 18°15 7 12 | 36 | 2:00 | 1-05 ‘72 8°26 39°33 Miers 1:48 13 | 12 | 2:00 | 1:05 21 8-01 38:17 LALT. ie 14 | 12 | 1:05 | 2:00 4-4 8-75 41-67 18°75 a a 15 | 36 | 1°03 | 2:05 | 1:34 arene 37:00 16°65 1:51 | 1-5u 16 | 12 | 1:03 | 2-05 4:74 9:18 43°87 19°74 aon ae 17 | 12 | 2-065 | 103) 9:48 9°41 44:83 20°17 oe a | 18) 36 | 1:05} 2:04 | 1°55 8°94 42°57 19°15 1°48 | 1:67 | 199 22 27045) 105 2°33 871 41°47 18°66 a Z 20; 12 | 1°05 | 2°04) 4:75 9°14 43°50 19°57 aes is 21] 36 | 2°06 | 1°03 | ‘76 8°50 40°50 18°22 1°45 | 1°61 22 | 12 | 2:06; 1:03 | 2°38 8°88 42°30 19:03 sti 250 23 | 12 | 1°03 | 2:06 | 4:32 8°30 39°53 rer RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. 213 ultimate stresses obtained in direct tension and compression. The last two columns of the table give Youne’s modulus when the beam is placed on its broad or narrow face. General Case for Beams of any Section, but with the Ultimate Distribution of Stress a Rectangular One. The general case may be deduced as follows :— Let fig. 1 denote the section of the beam, and let A =total sectional area, A,= ,, area ultimately subjected to tensile stress, =e . 3 compressive stress. t, c, T, C, and M have the same meaning as before. Also let NN =ultimate position of neutral axis, the plane of which extends along the length of the beam and divides each cross-section of the beam into areas A, and A,, yr = distance of centroid of area A; from NN, mt Ue 5, ‘ ee AL . Fie and let the ultimate distribution of stress be a rectangular one. From the condition (a) that the tension and compression stress areas are equal to each other, we have tA,—cA,=0. ; : : : 7 ha) If the ultimate fibre stresses reached at the point of rupture be equal to the ultimate direct stresses T and C in tension and compression respectively, then T= Cs, 0) and Nye 9 a na er a am ic AAS TO: a eere: and similarly I A,=A : Dac We therefore obtain the position of the neutral axis of the beam at fracture point by dividing the total area A into areas A, and A, in the ratio of - Further, since the resisting moment of the section just up to the point of rupture equals the external bending moment, ie C | “. M=tAy,+ cAYo= tA(y, +Yy-) =CcA (y+ Yc) = tA aly +Yy.) = CAT rs aly as Yc) : (1.) M T+C SS ; : : : ; : »/ Ga Ati) C (Ta) and ¢= u Tee - 5 : . ‘ : : 2 (IB) A(yity.) °T 214 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON If T and C are equal, the final position of the neutral axis will divide each section of the beam into two equal areas and the value of the fibre stress 2M {on G—_———————— ; : : : : (1 oS RGAY) In such a case, if the section is symmetrical about the original neutral axis, the position of the latter does not change. Hxpervments. In order to verify the correctness of such a formula, some tests were made by the author on wrought-iron bars. These bars were stressed as beams, and since the Ore Fj maa i tie Fig,la material used here was ductile, no definite rupture took place. The ultimate load was therefore taken as that load at which the beam failed to stand up to the applied load and buckled up. Portions were cut out and tested to failure in direct tension. No tests, however, were made in direct compression, the fracture value of the material under compression being assumed to be equal to that under tension. The bars were of various sections, and are illustrated in fig. 1a. The sections A and B, which are circular, one solid and the other hollow, show an entire agreement between the direct tensile stress and the induced tensile stress. RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. 215 Of the rectangular specimens C and D agree fairly well, but E, which is square, falls short in the induced stress. F, G, and H are comparable as a group, and the results in the cases F and G are quite satisfactory. H, however, shows a deficiency in the induced stress which is somewhat marked on the 36-inch span, but less so on the 15-inch span. This may be explained by the fact that it is impossible for the web portion of the section as it is laid to be stressed to its full rupture value before the flanges give way. But if we consider this section as made up of the flanges only, as shown by the shaded portions of H, then the results are much nearer agreement, and are given in the table as ,H, and 2H». Section K was also tested for two lengths of span, the results of which differ somewhat. If the average of the induced stresses be taken, it agrees with the direct tension result. Table II. gives the results of these tests. Tapnr IJ. Bras. Tension TEsts. ea ak Central coon Fibre a east Total Tensile Stress Section. s y,t+y.| Load. L. “| tore=———_ aes Load. per sq. in, ee | Tons, a Aly e+ Yc) 4 ee Tons. Tons. | Tons per sq. in. A ‘7854 | -425 -428 | 36 23-08 ‘7854 | 18:75 23-87 B 463 By s}5) 485 36 24°98 -463 11°62 25°10 C *805 805 *805 36 22°36 805 18:8 23°35 D 1:8 “45 925 36 20-55 163 3:28 20'1 E 93 “48 ‘477 36 19-23 93 23°6 25°34 F 26 ‘445 135 36 21:00 123 3:09 25:1 G, 81 39 383 36 21:82 161 3°75 93°3 G, “81 39 1:055 15 25°04 161 3°75 23°3 Hi 448 266 109 36 16°43 7108 2°64 24°46 H, 448 266 "285 15 17°88 ‘108 2°64 24°46 iH, 285 *315 ‘109 36 21:86 108 2°64 24°46 oH, 985 | -315 | -285 | 15 23°81 108 2-64 24°46 K 67 1:31 87 36 17:84 alow 2°99 21°76 K, 67 1:31 2:725 15 23°29 ‘137 2°99 21:76 Il. Benprinc Moment 1n Cases or Eccentric Loapinc, as Hooks, Erc. Another and important case is where a section is subjected to non-axial loading, as in crane hooks. Under such conditions a section as AB of fig. 2 is generally said to experience :— (1) A uniformly varying stress due to the bending moment of a couple of magni- tude WL, the intensity at any point varying directly as the distance of that point from a fixed axis N in the plane of the section known as the neutral axis of stress ; 216 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON (2) A direct uniformly distributed stress due to the force W acting at the centroid of the section AB. 7 Thus if the strain produced was entirely elastic, the stress diagram of (1), when the material has approximately the same ultimate strengths in compression and in tension, would be as represented by AaNbB in fig. 3, Aa being the tensile stress of the extreme fibres AA, and Bb being the compressive stress of the extreme fibres BB of the section shown in fig. 2. The neutral axis NN passes through the centroid of the section. This diagram would be modified by the direct tensile stress AA, of (2) to the form AaN,),B, this a having the effect of changing the neutral axis from N to Ni: Tf NN, =@, atin increases the external bending moment to the extent of Wa, and correspondingly the resisting moment of the section must be increased to the same extent. If ¢ and c represent the values of the extreme stresses, then, by the ordinary elastic formula for determining these stresses, My W_ ¢ ) bm eee tn : ; : . (2a) _ My w= w(=! | Ce ae et . (20) Therefore the ratio of “= constant and the line ab;, though its slope varies, passes C through a fixed point N, so long as the condition of elastic stress is maintained. RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. 2% The very approximate nature of the results obtained by this theory of combined tension and bending moment is dealt with in a paper* by Mr EH. 8. AnpREws, B.Sc., and Professor Kart Prarson, F.R.S., the magnitude of the error being there proved to depend upon the radius of curvature to which the hook is bent. They too arrive at the conclusion that the stress at any point in any fixed section under a given load is only a function of the distance of that point from the centroidal line, the maximum stress being obtained at the maximum distance from that line. Since the stress, then, depends directly on the load and this function, it follows that there will be a true neutral axis. An expression for its distance from the centroidal line is obtained, and this is a constant for a given section. The stresses, however, do not vary directly as the distance from this neutral line. If the section, which is that of a 15-ton hook, is as shown in fig. 2a, with the centroid at N, then the diagram Aa,N,b,B of fig. 3a represents the diagram of stresses to some scale, as got by ANDREWS’ theory, right up to the true elastic limit on the tension side, and N, is a fixed point. If it were possible for the material to behave elastically right up to the point of fracture, then our ultimate stress diagram in accordance with the two theories would be as in figs. 3 and 3a, but of greater magnitude, and would be represented by AaiN,b,B in figs. 4 and 4a. But the extreme stresses Aq, on the tensile side, as calculated from (2a) and by ANDREWS’ formula and as shown on these diagrams, are much greater than the tensile strength of the material. Let AT and BC represent the fracture value of the material in direct tension and compression respectively. (While the fracture value in direct tension is easy to determine, that of a ductile material in direct com- pression cannot be determined absolutely. The term is here used to mean that value of the stress at which the strain exceeds a certain fraction, having regard to initial section and length of test piece.) Through T and C draw lines parallel to AB to intercept ab, in T,; and C,. Then the areas Ta,T, and Cb,C,, where the stresses would exceed the fracture value, cannot exist. Note the area Cb,C, is a minus quantity in fig. 4a. But the resisting moment of the internal stresses just before rupture must be equal to the external bending moment, and therefore areas within the stress limits, the summation of whose moments is equal to the summation of the moments of these excess areas, must be found to replace them. These can be represented by N,T,N, and N,C,C,N,, possibly involving another alteration of the neutral axis to N2. The conditions involved in this redistribution of stress areas are (a) that the summation of the moments of the complete resisting stress areas CC,N. and TT.N,» should be equal to the moment of the external load W about an axis through N, ; and (6), that the algebraic sum of the tensional and compressive stress areas should be equal to the external load W. * Drapers’ Co. Research Memoirs, Technical Series I., London, 1904. 218 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON It is now possible to proceed to establish a connection between the extreme fibre stresses at fracture point of a non-axially loaded body and the moment of the ex- ternal load. Let the symbols A, A;, A., T, C, t, and ¢ have the same meaning as in the case of beams, and whatever may have been the elastic distribution of stress, let the ultimate distribution be a rectangular one. If the resultant foree W was very small and L very great, then only the bending ' ture Stress SI ae ._Ttuplure_ Stresses with Andrews’ Formula = a kg A a In 00 EN ro eg ee OO Ae ies ray peienges [eee ae) moment stress need be considered. For this special case, if Ay and Ag be the tensile and compressive areas respectively, then Be = Pues before, for tA, —-cA,=0. AGEs If the ultimate stress reached be equal to the ultimate direct strength of the material, then In order to obtain the position of the neutral axis NN under this condition, we RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. vals) divide up the section of the hook in the above ratio as shown in fig. 5. Let y, and ye be the distances of centroids of Ar and Ag from the neutral axis NN. Then we have, since the external moment equals the internal resisting moment, WL=tayy,+ cAcy, C I (Na eta eS TEC" = TC"? and at the fracture point, when ¢ and ¢ equal T and C respectively, : (Yet Yc) . 0S) WL= ONG, + Y.) = cA a T+C Now, when the resultant tensile foree W becomes important and is taken into consideration, we have tA, a cAg = W. We may imagine that this is the previous case, with L diminishing as W increases. Since the stress limits at fracture are T and C as before, these cannot be altered Fig. 9. to meet the resultant W, which can only be balanced by a transfer of part of the compression.area to the tension side. Of course, the moment of these rearranged areas must be equal to the external moment. Let the shaded area in fig. 5 be the part so transferred from compression to tension, and let the actual final position of the neutral axis be N, at a distance «x from N, and % and z, be the respective distances of the centroids of the areas A; and A, from those of the areas Ay and Ag of the special case. From the equation of moments we have W(L+2) =tay,+%—%) +cA(y,—#+%,). Now Cc A,=A = ASG ea eG ali A.=A,-a=A = OT A aa eG (3) and 2,=a Z Cc . C ab T+C T+C TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL..L. PART I. (NORD): 30 “. W(L+2)=tA Y+cA y,+ x(tA,—cA,) — as(t +c). 220 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON But WwW T+C atY—a(-C)=W. .. a(T+C)=W; anda= ‘. when the ultimate stresses are T and C we have W(L+2)=tA = (yt y) + We - a — oe Eliminating balancing moments, this aad becomes +Y.) = WL+ 22 ‘bay, cA 5 et ye) =# This means that what was the beh moment of the section before this alteration of the neutral axis has, by reason of the rearrangement, become equal to the original external bending moment plus the moment of the weight about half the displacement of the neutral axis.: Since w is usually small, — may be considered to be negligible, and therefore for all practical purposes the relationship between the external moment and the resisting moment of the section just at the point of rupture may be taken as the same as when there was no resultant, that is: WL=ta7— (ut Ue) = . cp a Tre HONS ee . (IIL.A) — Swi TC c or O SMensca ae : : : . , . (IIT.8) Now, if T=C =f, as is approximately the case for W.I. and mild steel, then WL 2 4 Silas wie : : : 3 z A (Ye+Ye) 4 Experiments. The results of experiments undertaken by the aetHOn with hooks made from various materials show that the values obtained for “f,” as calculated from formula (3) when the ultimate stress-point is reached, agree more or less accurately with the direct stress values. The first tests were carried out on galvanised wrought-iron hooks used for suspending ship’s boats. The hooks were of circular section, and had ends long enough to enable ordinary tension test pieces to be cut off. Afterwards a series of tests were made on hooks specially manufactured from round bars of various materials. In addition to the length necessary for the pre- paration of the hook, two other lengths were cut off each bar, one being tested in direct tension cold, and the other was first annealed before being so tested. In this way a direct comparison was made between the stress induced in the hook by bending and the ultimate tensile stress as found after heating. A hook was also made from a bar of rectangular section, and also another prepared with an approximately rectangular section by flattening the sides of a round bar. RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. 221 In addition an examination was made of the investigation * by Professor GoopMan into the strength of drop-forged steel hooks, which was published in Engineering, and also of the results contained in his paper ¢ on “ Crane Hooks,” which followed on the lines of ANDREWS’ theory and which was published in the Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers. The values of (y,+y-) in terms of the depth of section and of the consequent values of “f” in formula (3) is given below for the various sections investigated:— Description of Hook. (Yet Yo)» ie (1) | Circular . : - : ‘ , ‘425d a WL 2 aes : ‘ : 3 ‘bd y lees (2) | Rectangular Te (3) . with rounded ends . é ‘43d 46540 (4) | Goopman’s drop-forged steel. ‘ 1:43h 1650 (5) = wrought-iron Ist set. ; “48h ae WL 6 ; 53 : “4 Ao) fa (6) ; 2nd set 8h 17 ah These were found to justify the conclusions which are set forth in the present paper, and an analysis of these along with the experimental results are given in Table III. Tasze III. >,8 M : eae ee ax. Direct Ne =o Tensile Stress. : Description. | Material. me rat ara ee es : ere ns. q. In. ons, Ss |= &, ormula, I ¢ ‘ #8 | (Cold). | (Annealed). No, 1 round Walt a 95 4:25 | 1:3 25°97 | 24°6 chs 46°64 pee a 1:0 ‘78 DO!) del 25°70 | 25:1 ae 48:58 ee 5, BB. 1:02 83 4°35 | 1:0 24°45 | 23-05 23°41 46°61 ae Swed. 1:02 82 3°24 | 1°15 20°83 | 20-00 20°12 39°38 eo” 5, S.M.S. 1:00 ‘78 3°8 fel 25°20 | 25-00 25°80 46°97 ae Mild S. 1-02 82 30 13 21:92 | 24-4 24-17 40°70 pe erect. is 93 “46 25 1:2 27:90 | 26°8 se 48°86 eS. 55 Wel 1:02 82 30 1:3 21:7 24°6 ba Average value | 24:20 | 24:20 * See GoopMAN on the “Strength of Drop-forged Crane Hooks,” Engineering, Ixxii. p. 537. + GoopMan on “ Maximum Stresses in Crane Hooks,” Minutes of Proc. of Inst. of Civil Engineers, vol. clxvii. p. 296 222 MR ANGUS R. FULTON ON TasLeE IIl.—contenued. i a AF Max. Direct SN) BEF Tensile Stress. : Ste 2 Depth. | Area. | Load. ” eae Elastic Pesce pinen.. || Material. Ins. Sq. in. | Tons. - E |< 3 Formula. I 4 ‘*. 2 |(Cold).| (Annealed). Goopman’s Tests. tons : 4 drop-forged Steel "82 33 1'76 95 27°45 no value given 52°92 4 < A “90 38 1:85 | 1:04 26:04 a 44°30 4 . bd 1:01 910) ZAG) ail 24°18 aus 41:13 1 es < 1:40 "95 (el a org 36°60 a 68°38 1} Ks 1:60 1:26 1:29 | 1:83 30°69 5 54°49 2 " a 2-00 1:94 | 11°49 | 2°10 28°93 5 52°64 3 a : 2°32 2°60 | LS") 252 35°11 33 64:00 4 A 5 2°68 3°34 | 23°23 | 2°83 34:14 ss 62°27 5 3 im 3°00 ._| 4:01 | 26°87 | 3:20 33°34 55 59°86 Average value 30°92 5A Ist set Wel 3°49 559 | 32°5 3°35 23°35 | 23°5 A: 416 5B re 5 3°47 5:84 | 34-1 3°42 23°93 5 ae 42°6 LON 45 53 4°36 9°20 | 57:3 4°32 25°4 5 ae 45:3 10B 3 5 4:34 O76) | 59 4°33 25°4 > 6, 45°8 DAS, sig 55 4:78 | 12-57 | 62° 4°65 20°14 Fe sh 36°1 15B - - 4:97 | L265" 9) 90:0 4:44 26°27 5 Sa 47:7 Average value 24:08 5A 2nd set W.I. 3°79 543 | 31-0 3°54 22°24 | 23°4 ee 39-1 5B i ‘ 3°36 578 | 33°6 4°18 30°16 a 48°2 OA Bs 4:75 | 10°96 | 54:0 4:48 US ere <5 ae 33°9 10B e 55 4:63 | 10°80 | 59:0 4:71 23°17 ae 42°] 15A 3 5:27 | 14:53 | 76°9 5:00 20°93 3 Be 39°9 15B 9 eo 4:78 | 13°51 | 82°9 4:84 25°91 *, an 47-7 Average value 23°63 _ CONCLUSIONS. 1. It may be taken as conclusive that the final distribution of stress at rupture point in a member subjected to an external bending moment is a rectangular one, unless where the cohesion of adjacent layers is not sufficient to withstand the shear induced by the resisting moment of the section. 2. That, provided shear does not take place, the neutral axis moves always to the position which reduces the summation of the tensile and compressive stress areas, across a section, to the equilibrant of the external forces. (In the case of RUPTURE STRESSES IN BEAMS AND CRANE HOOKS. 223 a beam this reduces to zero; in that of a hook, at the principal section to the suspended weight.) 3. That the total resisting moment of these stresses must be equal to the ex- ternal bending moment as measured to the neutral axis at rupture point, but that these balancing moments do not differ materially from those measured to an axis obtained by dividing the sectional area into tensile and compressive stress areas which are in inverse proportion to the magnitude of their respective ultimate direct stresses. The advantage of these formule are important. It is possible to indicate with certainty the magnitude of the load which will cause rupture in a beam or a hook provided there is known the point of application or the effective arm of the load, the cross-section of the beam or hook, and the breaking strengths of the material when subjected to the different forms of direct loading. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 7). 31 (295°) VIII.—Scottish National Antarctic Expedition: A Description of the Systematic Anatomy of a Fcetal Sea-Leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyx), with Remarks upon the Microscopical Anatomy of some of the Organs. By Harold Axel Haig, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., late Lecturer in Histology and Embryology, University College, Cardiff; M‘Robert Research Fellow, University of Aberdeen. Com- municated by Professor ARTHUR Rosinson, M.D. | (MS. received January 26,1914. Read February 16, 1914. Issued separately April 30, 1914.) [Plates XIX.-XXII.] During the Scottish Antarctic Expedition of 1892-93 Dr W. 8. Bruce secured foetuses of Stenorhynchus leptonyx and Lobodon Carcinophaga, and on his return passed them over, with other material, to Professor D’Arcy W. THompson for the Zoological Museum of University College, Dundee. While some of the material has unfortunately been lost sight of during these twenty-one years, one specimen, viz. that of a foetus of Stenorhynchus leptonyx, was still in existence, and was returned by Professor D’Arcy THompson to Dr Bruce, who in turn asked me to examine and report upon it. Furthermore, during the voyage of the Scotia embryos of Leptony- chotes weddellt were obtained by the Scotva naturalists, and these were passed on for description to Professor WaATERSTON, at that time in the University of Edinburgh. It is on this material that the present monograph is based. PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS. The feetus of Stenoryhnchus leptonyx, which is in a good state of preservation, measures 122 mm. from the tip of the tail to the most prominent part of the mid- brain ; the greatest breadth is about 43 mm., and the ereatest dorsi-ventral measure- ment is in the mid-dorsal region, measuring 35 mm. The umbilicus is situated 36 mm. from the cloacal aperture, the umbilical cord being relatively short, owing to the fact that the umbilical vessels soon undergo division into several large branches; a portion of the placenta with fragments of the foetal membranes is still attached to the cord. The actual mode of placentation and the disposition of the fcetal membranes are points which will be discussed at a later stage (see wfra, on the Placenta). The skin is in many places thrown into folds, some of these being normal, but others undoubtedly due to shrinkage consequent upon the action of the preservative medium. The flippers are fully formed, nail rudiments being present upon the dorsal aspects of the distal phalanges. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 8). 32 226 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON The head is at this stage not large in proportion to the trunk; rudiments of the vibrissee are to be seen at the sides of the snout, and the eyelids are formed although the palpebral fissure is not as yet open. ‘The tongue is an elongated organ, with a cleft tip, the two divisions appearing between the lips in the middle line. No sign of an external ear is present, nor is there any opening indicating the position of an auditory meatus. The whole trunk is curved towards the ventral aspect, but some of the curvature is probably due to mechanical causes subsequent to removal of the foetus from the uterus. Reference to Pl. XIX. fig. 1 will render the above points clear. SECTION I. GENERAL TOPOGRAPHY AND ANATOMY. A. Appearance of the Main Viscera in situ, from the Ventral Aspect. A median ventral incision was made, and flaps of skin and deeper tissues turned back to expose the structures in the neck, thorax, and abdomen; the sternum and ribs being also removed for the purpose of demonstrating the thoracic viscera, whilst the attachments of the diaphragm to the lower ribs were likewise severed. A separate flap was raised in the neck region to expose the larynx, trachea, thyroid, and parathyroids, and finally the parietal pericardium was cut away. . In the region of the umbilicus, care was taken not to sever the connection of the urinary bladder with the umbilical cord, and the umbilical vein passing from the cord to the liver was also kept intact ; subsequently, however, these connections were severed for greater convenience of examination. Reference to fig. 2, Plate XIX., will show that the heart is at this stage a large organ filling the greater part of the thoracic cavity ; from the ventral aspect, the right ventricle appears larger than the left, and the right auricular appendix wider than the left; the right appendix has a deep notch in its lower border, whilst the left one possesses three such notches. A portion of the aortic trunk shows above and dorsal to the right appendix. The thymus is relatively large, and extends from the root of the neck, where it is bifurcated, towards the left of the middle line, until it reaches a point just anterior to the left auricular appendix: the main mass of the thymus is subdivided into a number of lobes and lobules, and there are a few small isolated masses situated at the sides of the trachea just anterior to the upper bifurcated extremity.” The /ungs lie compressed against the walls of the thorax, and are not very obvious from the ventral aspect, the right upper lobe being most prominent, and below * Microscopical examination showed that these isolated masses possessed a typical thymus structure, THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FQ@TAL SEA-LEOPARD. 227 this a small portion of the middle lobe, whilst none of the lower lobe is visible ; both lobes of the left lung show, the anterior edges and portions of the lateral surfaces being seen. In the neck region the larynx and trachea form prominent features, whilst at the sides of the trachea the lateral lobes of the thyroid gland with the lower parathyroids are to be seen; no thyroid isthmus is, however, to be detected, a point which is noteworthy. The abdominal viscera from the ventral aspect (Pl. XIX. fig. 2):—The liver forms the most prominent organ in the abdomen, its right and left lobes, together with certain accessory lobes, occupying about one-half the available space; the right lobe appears to be larger than the left, but in reality this is not the case, since, when viewed from the dorsal aspect (see Pl. XXI. fig. 5), the left lobe is seen to be much the bulkier of the two. A fissure passes obliquely downwards and inwards from the middle of the lateral aspect of the right lobe, and effects a partial subdivision of this lobe into two, but the cleft does not extend deeply into its substance; whilst a small flap of the upper of the two subdivisions is seen a short distance internal to the right lateral margin, and partly conceals an aperture in the lobe in which the fundus of the gall-bladder appears (Pl. XIX. fig. 2”). Between the right and left lobes there isa fairly wide cleft, in which may be seen the umbilical vein passing from the umbilicus towards the ductus venosus. Coils of small intestine are seen lying caudal to the liver, but the stomach is not visible, being largely hidden by the left hepatic lobe. The urinary bladder is a very elongated structure, and is attached ventrally to the umbilicus: it opens caudally into the cloaca. The umbilical arteries pass along the lateral aspects of the viscus towards their destination in the placenta, and are well seen in transverse sections. (See Pl. XXI. fig. 4.) The chief points of interest in connection with the above description of the ventral aspect of the viscera are :— (i.) The relative size of the thymus, which, although as a rule large at this stage of development, appears in the present case to be markedly so; the left lateral deviation of its caudal extremity is also a point worthy of note. The presence of isolated lobules of this gland suggests a possible origin of these from some of the higher branchial clefts. (ii.) The deep notching of the auricular appendices in the heart is a feature which seems very striking upon opening the pericardial cavity. One other point also, viz. the well-marked interventricular furrow, is a characteristic which becomes more marked as development proceeds, the external subdivision of the ventricular portion of the heart giving it in the full-grown seal an almost bifid appearance. (iii.) The great longitudinal extent of the liver, an organ occupying at this stage of development a relatively large proportion of the abdominal cavity. 228 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON (iv.) The peculiar shape of the urinary bladder. According to Heppurn,* the bladder in the adult seal is represented by the whole length of the foetal organ, since no shrinkage takes place in the cephalic portion to form a definite urachus. B. General Topographical Anatomy of the Head. I. The oral, nasal, and cranial cavities, with their contents (Pl. XX.). A median sagittal section of the head was made, so that the oral, nasal, and — cranial cavities were laid bare; whilst, in order to expose the contents of the nasal fossze, the nasal septum was subsequently removed. Rudiments of the incisor milk-teeth were cut through in the upper and lower jaws, and the surface of the mesial section of the hypophysis cerebri exposed, the hypophysis lying in the sella turcica of the developing sphenoid bone at the base of the skull (Pl. XX. fig. 3°). } Other points worthy of note in such a hemisection of the head are :-— (a) The elongated tongue (PI. XX. fig. 3°). (b) The falx cerebri, covering the mesial surface of the right cerebral hemisphere (Pl. XX. fig. 3°); about the middle of the concave edge of the falx the corpus callosum is seen in section (Pl. XX. fig. 3.) (c) The optic thalamus (Pl. XX. fig. 3°) continued posteriorly into the mesencephalon and pons; dorsal to these latter, the Sylvian aqueduct with its roof, in which the rudiments of the corpora quadrigemina (fig. 37) are to be made out; posterior to these are seen the mesial section of the cerebellar vermis, and, ventral to this, the 4th ventricle and medulla oblongata (Pl. XX. fig. 3°%**). (d) The cavity of the 8rd ventricle, with its extension into the infundibulum of the hypophysis. After the removal of the falx cerebri and nasal septum, the following additional structures come into view :— In the cranial cavity (Pl. XX. fig. 5) :— (ce) The mesial surface of the cerebral hemisphere (h.). (f) The olfactory lobe (olf. U.), lying between the fore-brain and the anterior boundary of the cranial cavity: the lobe is not a large one, and does not appear to give off many nerve-filaments to the ethmoidal region of the nasal fossa. In the region of the nasal fossee :— (g) The rudiment of the ethmo-turbinal bone (eth. t.) lying at the superior angle; this rudiment, which at the present stage is cartilaginous, shows three ridges * Trans, Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlviii. part i., No. 3, 1913. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FG@:TAL SEA-LEOPARD. 229 with two intervening depressions, and represents the olfactory region of the nasal fossa. (h) The large maxillo-turbinal rudiment (mz. t.), presenting upon its mesial surface a number of narrow lamelle with intervening sulci: it is carti- laginous and is covered by a mucous membrane lined by ciliated epithe- lium. Anteriorly the maxillo-turbinal bone is attached to the outer wall of the fossa, whilst posteriorly it fuses by an elongated pedicle with the periosteum of the base of the skull. The buccal cavity is lined by a mucous membrane covered by stratified epithelium with but few cell-layers. At the present stage of development, the membrane bones of the cranial vault are partially ossified, but the bones of the base of the skull (basi- sphenoid, basi-occipital) are still partly cartilaginous ; the sphenoid bone (see text-fig. 3, 6) is in the “irruption”-stage of endochondral ossification, the process being seem- ingly delayed by the rather late persistence of the epithelial connection between the hypophysis cerebri and the buccal epithelium.* The brain.—General superficial anatomy (Pl. XX. figs. 1 and 2). The brain of the present specimen shows some very well-defined characters, and on the whole may be said to conform to the mammalian type: viewed from the dorsal aspect (Pl. XX. fig. 1), the following features are obvious :— (i.) The large cerebral hemispheres separated by the longitudinal sulcus in which the falx cerebri is normally lodged. (ii.) Behind the hemispheres, the crura cerebri and region of the mesencephalon, covered by fragments of torn pia mater. (iii.) The cerebellum, consisting of the mesially situated rudiment of the vermis, and on either side of this the cerebellar hemisphere: the latter already present a number of flattened laminze with intervening sulci. (iv.).The 4th ventricle in its lower half, with the restiform bodies bounding it on either side ; the floor of the ventricle is seen owing to previous removal of the roof of pia mater. | The surface of each cerebral hemisphere is quite smooth upon its superior aspect, and shows no indications as yet of any convolutions. Viewed from the side, several additional features become apparent, viz. (Pl. XX. no 2) — (v.) The olfactory lobe, and its connection with the ventral part of the fore-brain. (vi.) A wide shallow depression passing from the lower aspect of the fore-brain upwards and backwards towards the hind-brain (future occipital lobe) : this depression indicates the position of the future Sylvian fissure (Pl. XX. fig. 2°), and ventral to its posterior extremity a forward extension of the hemisphere represents the rudimentary temporo-sphenoidal lobe. * See also P. T. HERRING on “Development of Mammalian Pituitary Body,” Journ. Exper. Physiol., 1909, 230 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON Upon the ventral aspect, at the base of the brain, the infundibulum forms a down- ward projection from the floor of the 3rd ventricle (Pl. XX. fig. 2°), whilst half way between the infundibulum and a projection which marks the position of the ventral part of the pons the 3rd nerve forms a noticeable feature (Pl. XX. fig. 2*). Additional features to be made out in a sagittal section taken through a cerebral hemisphere, the optic thalamus and mid- and hind-brain (Pl. XX. fig. 4) :—In such a section the general relations of the various regions of the brain may be studied to a certain extent, and, moreover, by stainmg with hematoxylin and eosin the main distribution of grey and white matter at this stage of development may be made out. The cortex cerebri (Pl. XX. fig. 4*°) is made up of two parts, viz. :-— (i.) A superficial layer of white fibres and neuroglia, forming a very narrow zone (PIX aa?) (ii.) A deeper layer of deeply-staining nerve-cells, with neuroglia, of somewhat wider extent than (1.). Deep to the cortex comes the white matter of the hemisphere, which is at this stage not very thick. A section taken so as to pass completely through the cavity of the prosencephalon shows in addition an inner layer, somewhat deeply stained, which later on will form the ependymal lining of the lateral ventricle. Below the main mass of the hemisphere, part of the descending horn of the lateral ventricle is seen (Pl. XX. fig. 4"), and this becomes continuous anteriorly with the rhinencephalon, passing into the olfactory lobe. The anterior boundary of the descending horn is formed by a layer of grey matter, which above takes the form of radiating streaks, alternating with white matter. In the region of the optic thalamus, small isolated patches of grey substance appear near the dorsal surface, but in the region of the corpora quadrigemina white matter seems as yet to predominate. The grey matter of the cerebellar hemisphere appears to he chiefly on the surface, but there is a deeper zone of small nerve-cells, the two layers being separated by a clear zone of white matter: the cells of Purkinje do not as yet appear to have become differentiated as a distinct line of neuroblasts. In the region of the medulla oblongata, the nuclei of the 10th and 12th cranial nerves form a series of groups of rather large nerve-cells (Pl. XX. fig. 4"); whilst the pyramidal tract appears as a well-defined longitudinal set of fibres. The infundibulum, with a small portion of the cavity of the 3rd ventricle, has been already noted; the ventral mass of the pons is a very obvious feature lying just anterior to the medulla (Pl. XX. fig. 4). A fold of pia mater (Pl. XX. fig. 4°) shows between the overhanging posterior extremity of the cerebral hemisphere and the mesencephalon, whilst in the deep fissure anterior to the optic thalamus a small piece of choroid plexus appears. Points for comparison with the brains of other carnivora are the following :— THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FCQTAL SEA-LEOPARD. 231 (a) The relative shortness of the corpus callosum, a structure which, for instance, in the cat, at a corresponding stage of development has assumed a much longer antero-posterior measurement; moreover, it would seem that in this Seal embryo the corpus callosum is taking a more vertical course than is usual. (b) Altogether the general appearance and stage of development of the brain under discussion corresponds very closely with one figured by His* of a three- months human foetus, with the exceptions that the hypophysis cerebri is much further advanced (see infra) and the cerebellum has assumed greater complexity. C. Anatomical Details of the Remaining Viscera. The thyroid and parathyroids, the thymus, pancreas, and tongue, will be described under the histological section of this pamphlet ; in the present instance the following organs will be considered, and comparisons made with other types, where this is possible :— (i.) The lungs. (ii.) The heart. (iii.) The liver, stomach, and intestines. (iv.) The spleen. (v.) The kidneys and adrenal bodies. (vi.) The genital glands and ducts: the urinary bladder. The histology of some of these will be dealt with later. (i.) The lungs (Pl. XXI. fig. 3)—Both lungs are somewhat compressed against the thoracic walls, owing to the large size of the heart, and it is only upon removing the latter organ that a good view can be obtained of the roots of the lungs and their ventral aspect; posteriorly the inner margins of the upper and lower lobes of both lungs are grooved longitudinally by the vertebral column, whilst laterally the surfaces of all the lobes are grooved by the ribs. In the right lung, three lobes, upper, middle, and lower, can be distinguished + ; the middle lobe is peculiar in that at the root it gives off two caudally directed subdivisions, the largest of which is almost a separate lobe, and presents dorsal, right lateral, and anterior surfaces (Pl. XXI. fig. 3 a). The cranial and caudal lobes of both lungs are somewhat similar in shape, the caudal lobes being the larger, being not unlike the corresponding lobes of a human lung. Marked trabecule of con- nective tissue are to be seen upon the surfaces of all lobes, with finer strands passing off in all directions, and these subdivide the surface into polygonal areas, the bases, as it were, of the superficial lobules; on being placed in water the lungs sink. At the root of the lung the bronchi and pulmonary vessels are seen entering (or * Hertwie, Handbuch der Entwickelungslehre der Wirbeltiere. + The terms “upper,” etc., are here used with reference to the vertical position of the trunk, and not the natural position of the adult animal. 232 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON emerging from) the upper lobes, the bronchi being dorsal to the pulmonary arteries, although the left bronchus is much closer to the artery than the left. (ii.) The heart (Pl. XX. fig. 2 and text-fig. 1).—All four cavities of the heart contain firm clot, which extends into the auricular appendices; on section in the coronal plane, the cavities of the auricles appear to be larger than those of the ventricles, whilst the auricular appendices add considerably to the auricular capacity. Moreover, although from the ventral aspect the right ventricle appear larger than the left, there is not the same relative difference between the capacities of the ventricles, both appearing to possess much the same size in median coronal section ; the thickness of the myocardium is rather greater in the left than in the right ventricle, that of the auricles being about equal on both sides. The aortic bulb is Fic. 1.—Dissection to show the relations of the aortic trunk, pulmonary trunk, and ductus arteriosus. L.V. Left ventricle in section. R.S. Right subclavian. R.V. Right ventricle in section. AO. Aorta. B.AO. Aortic trunk and bulb. P.A. Pulmonary artery. IN. Innominate trunk. D.A. Ductus arteriosus. R.C. Right common carotid. The dotted lines show the connection of the pulmonary trunk with the right ventricle ; the lumen of the aortic bulb is opened, and two semilunar valves are seen. full of firm clot, and passes at once into a relatively short but thick aortic arch; the pulmonary trunk shows the same relations to the aortic trunk as it does in the case of the human foetus of a corresponding stage of development, whilst the ductus arteriosus is relatively wide and is a continuation of the main pulmonary trunk after the latter has given off the two branches to the lungs (see fig. 2). The ductus joins the arch of the aorta close to the origin of the latter from the bulbus aorte. The cardiac valves are well developed, the semilunar valves consisting of thin plates of fibrous tissue, the free edges of which project into the aortic and pulmonary trunks, whilst the mitral and tricuspid valves have their free edges projecting into the ventricular cavities. The columne carne are not marked features, nor do the chord tending appear to be strongly developed at this stage. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FATAL SEA-LEOPARD. 233 Serial sections taken coronally through the heart show that the foramen ovale is a feature at this phase, but the aperture is a very narrow one, and will not admit a glass seeker of more than 1 mm. diameter. From the above description it will be seen that the heart of Stenorhynchus during early foetal life corresponds more or less closely with the typical mammalian organ in its developmental aspects; the interventricular furrow, however, is a marked ex- ternal feature, and during development, at least in the Weddell Seal, it becomes deeper, so that the full-grown heart possesses a bifid apex, the tips of the two ventricles being separated by a deep notch.* (iii.) The liver, stomach, and intestines (Pl. XXI. figs. 1 and 5).—In some respects the liver of this specimen shows characters similar to those of the human fceetal organ, but the accessory lobes, and the clefts which produce these, are to a certain extent atypical ; thus the right lobe shows from the ventral aspect a fissure which passes obliquely inwards from the lateral surface, but this fissure is not seen from behind, as it extends for only a short distance into the substance of the lobe. From the dorsal aspect (Pl. XXI. fig. 5) it appears that the left lobe is the bulkier of the two, and the inner surface of this lobe shows depressions corresponding to the ventral surface of the stomach, a small area of the spleen, and anteriorly the cesophagus and vena cava; the inner surface of the right lobe shows dorsally de- pressions corresponding to the numerous subdivisions of the right kidney, whilst the lateral aspects of both lobes are grooved by five or six of the posterior ribs. In the middle line ventrally the umbilical vein (Pl. XXL. fig. 5, lv.) forms a thick cord, passing towards the ductus venosus. The gall-bladder is not seen from the dorsal aspect except when the lobes are - widely separated, when it appears as an elongated sac, deeply embedded in the deep surface of the right lobe, the fundus presenting ventrally in the small opening noted in the topographical description (see supra). Certain accessory lobes show up when the two main lobes are separated from one another: these may possibly be the homologues of the Spigelian and quadrate lobes of the human organ, but their relations are somewhat different. The main points for comparison to be noted in this organ are :— (i.) The relative longitudinal extent of both lobes, this being distinctly greater than is the case with most other carnivora. (ii.) The small accessory flap guarding the aperture in which, ventrally, the fundus of the gall-bladder is to be seen. (iii.) The large volume of the abdominal cavity, occupied by the whole liver, at a stage when other abdominal viscera have assumed a relative importance in size. The stomach and intestines (Pl. XXI. fig. 1) are seen from the ventral aspect, after * See Hupzurn, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlviii., 1913. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 8). 33 234 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON removal of the liver, by which organ they are largely concealed; the stomach is placed with its long axis nearly parallel to the long axis of the foetus, and possesses a well-marked cardiac extremity lying with its fundus pressed against the diaphragm, and a pyloric end which is narrow and passes by a sharply curved portion into the first part of the small intestine. The lesser curvature of the stomach looks towards the ventral aspect, the greater curvature and fundus are dorsally situated, whilst a peritoneal fold, the representative of a great omentum, is attached to the whole length of the larger curvature; the lesser curvature and the duodenum have passing between them a narrow peritoneal sheet, which holds up the duodenum so that its first part runs parallel with the stomach. The stomach is an inch and a half in length, and at its cardiac end is joined by the cesophagus, the latter being a somewhat wide tube, two inches long and quarter of an inch in diameter. | The first part of the small intestine (duodenum) makes three bends, and possesses four distinct portions, the first of which is parallel with the smaller curvature of the stomach, whilst the second, third, and fourth divisions enclose a portion of peritoneum, between the layers of which the pancreas is held in position. The coils of small intestine proper are already many in number, and their general arrangement may be made out by reference to Pl. XXI. fig. 1. With regard to the large intestine, the position of the czecal pouch is noteworthy : this pouch is placed opposite the level of the third bend of the duodenum, being con- nected with the latter by a short fold of peritoneum. No sign of a vermiform ap- pendix is to be made out; as a matter of fact, this organ is not seen in the full-grown animal.* (iv.) The spleen (Pl. XXL. fig. 6) has a situation upon the left side of the abdomen, parallel to the greater curvature of the stomach and attached to this by a fold of peritoneum ; in thickness this organ does not measure more than one-eighth of an inch, but in length exceeds two inches. There are no notches in either its ventral or its dorsal edge, and the hilus occupies a large proportion of a ridge forming its inner margin which lies close to the stomach ; the outer surface of the spleen is grooved by two or three of the posterior ribs. (v.) The kidneys (Pl. XXI. fig. 4).—These organs are somewhat elongated oval bodies lying low down at the back of the abdominal cavity and close to the middle line; each kidney belongs to the type common to the Pinnipedia, viz. the per- manently subdivided type, where the organ is made up of a large number of anatom1- cally distinct renal pyramids,{ the secreting tubules of which open into a common pelvis, from which latter a ureter conducts the secretion to the urinary bladder. In this specimen there are in each kidney about two hundred and forty small * Herpourn (Trans. Roy. Soc, Hdin., vol. xlviii. part i., No. 3, 1918) regards the cecal diverticulum as a combined cecum and vermiform appendix. + “Renculi” of German authors. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FCITAL SEA-LEOPARD. 235 raised areas, circular in contour, representing the bases of the renal pyramids: these are mostly uniform in size, but some, smaller than the majority, lie rather below the general surface. A mesial coronal section of the kidney passes through many of the pyramids and also opens up the calyces and pelvis; according to CHIEVITZ,™ a certain amount of reduction takes place during development, so that whereas in certain instances about two hundred calyces may be present, in the full-grown animal only one hundred and forty remain, the reduction apparently commencing in those of the 6th and 7th order of origin. The ureter emerges from about the middle of the inner and dorsal margin of the kidney, and passes down parallel to the mid-line, crossing the Millerian ducts dorsally at right angles, and finally opens dorsally into the lower segment of the bladder; the hilus of the kidney from which the ureter emerges and into which the renal vessels pass is not a marked feature. The “pelvis” mentioned above is also but little developed, since the ureter divides almost at once into two main branches, the latter undergoing further subdivision in the kidney until the final divisions are reached close to the surface of the organ in the cortical zone of each renal pyramid. Hach kidney measures about one inch by half an inch. The adrenal bodies (Pl. XXI. fig. 4) are small reniform structures lying one on each side just anterior to the kidney ; there is a loose connection with the latter organ by means of a peritoneal band. In actual shape the adrenal is a flattened pyramid with a convex base facing outwards and ventralwards, whilst the hilus is placed at about the middle of the inner, or rather dorsal, edge, close to the vertebral column ; the length of each gland is half an inch, and the breadth one quarter inch. Some points in the histology of both the kidney and the adrenal gland will be described later. (vi.) The genital glands with their ducts (Pl. XXI. fig. 4) are in the present specimen already sufticiently established to be able to determine the sex of the animal —1.e. they are ovaries, and the Fallopian tubes pass from the outer ends of the glands to fuse in the middle line dorsal to the bladder and ventral to the rectum, and from the rudimentary uterus; the outer ends of the Fallopian tubes are dilated to form large ampullz for the reception of the ova, and these ampulle lie ventral to the outer pole of each ovary. Hach gland is an ovoid body lying obliquely from without backwards and inwards just behind the posterior pole of the kidney ; from its anterior extremity an elongated narrow muscular band, the diaphragmatic ligament of the mesonephros, passes towards the diaphragm and becomes attached to the dorsal wall of the abdomen. The urinary bladder (Pl. XXI. fig. 4°) is an elongated organ attached above by a patent allantoic duct to the umbilicus ; on transverse section, three apertures are seen —a median one, the bladder, and two lateral, the lumina of the umbilical arteries. The latter are passing to the umbilicus from their origin in the aorta. The bladder opens into the cloaca by a transversely elongated slit-like aperture, * Archiv Anat. u. Embryol., Supplement, 1897. 236 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON and the ureters are to be seen opening into the bladder laterally upon its dorsal aspect ; it is noteworthy that in the seals the bladder is represented by the entire intra-abdominal extent of the allantois.* Summary of the Anatomical Features. From the foregoing description it will be readily gathered that the Sea-Leopard Seal, during the middle phase of fcetal life, presents fairly typical embryological features; the age of the present specimen can hardly be worked out with any approach to accuracy, but it may be stated that the stage of development of most of the organs would place the foetus at about the end of the first third of intra- uterine life. The exact period of gestation of seals is, however, somewhat difficult to determine owing to the peculiar habits of mating which these animals have, so that the above estimate should be accepted with some reservation. In summarising the main anatomical features, it is possible to pick out the following more obvious characters :— (a) In the brain: firstly, the relatively advanced stage of the cerebellum, the hemispheres of this portion showing distinct evidence of folds and sulci which are not to be made out in a three-months human feetus; secondly, the comparatively advanced development of the pituitary body, a feature which will be more readily appreciated when the histology of the hypo- physis is considered (see infra). (b) In the heart: the most prominent feature is the late persistence of the bulbus aortee, whilst the peculiar shape of the auricular appendices is also worthy of note. (c) In the lungs: the possession of an accessory lobe by the right lung, and the relative size of these organs, which are certainly large, are points of com- parative value. (d) Other points which may be emphasised are the large size of the thymus and the left-sided deviation of this organ, the apparent absence of a thyroid isthmus, and the large size of the lowest parathyroids ; in connection with the alimentary tract, the forward position of the czecal diverticulum and the great length of the lobes of the liver. The kidneys are noteworthy on account of their surface lobulation into numerous renal pyramids, whilst the adrenal bodies do not lie directly upon the anterior poles of the kidneys. Moreover, the adrenals are relatively much smaller than is.the case with these bodies in the human foetus at a corresponding stage of development. Lastly, certain external characters, such as the absence of an external ear and the protruding bifid tip of the tongue, are features so obvious as to need no further comment. * Hepsurn, Trans, Roy. Soc. Hdin., vol, xlviii. part i., No. 3, 1913. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FC@TAL SEA-LEOPARD. 237 SECTION IL. AN OUTLINE OF THE MiIcROSCOPICAL ANATOMY OF SOME OF THE ORGANS. The histological characters of certain of the viscera were examined in this foetus, and in a few instances, viz. kidney and pituitary body, were found interesting from the point of view of the histogenesis of their essential secreting portions. The following account must, however, be looked upon as purely descriptive in character, since from the mere observation of features presented by a single specimen at one stage of development it is hardly possible to formulate a complete account of the histogenesis of any one organ. (i.) The thyroid and parathyroids (see Pl. XXI. fig. 2).—The lateral lobes of the thyroid gland are situated rather far forward in the neck region, reaching the level of the lower border of the cricoid cartilage ; each lobe measures about half an inch in length. The largest parathyroid is the posterior one, and is placed upon the mesial surface of the thyroid at the ventral and posterior angle of the lobe. The anterior parathyroid is quite small, and is found about the middle of the dorsal margin of the lateral lobe. In minute structure the thyroid is seen to be made up of a large number of small vesicles, some of them showing evidence of recent origin from branched tubular columns of cells, and in some of them colloid is already to be detected ; the vesicles are lined by a cubical epithelium, and there is a small amount of interstitial connec- tive tissue, but no sign of a basement membrane outside the epithelium. The whole lobe is subdivided into relatively few rather large lobules by coarser trabecule of connective tissue which are given off from the inner surface of a rudimentary capsule which surrounds the lobes. Blood-vessels are fairly numerous, the larger branches being supported by the coarser trabecule of connective tissue lying between the lobules. The parathyroid (Pl. XXI. fig. 2, p.th.) shows a quite typical structure: it is enclosed by a capsule of somewhat open connective tissue, which gives off trabeculee passing into the interior of the gland. The essential secreting cells occur in the form of folded columns of cuboidal or polyhedral cells, whilst these columns are in close apposition to the blood-channels, the latter being at this stage lined by a definite endothelium ; the latter, however, is not so marked a feature as it is in the blood- channels occurring in the pars anterior of the pituitary body of this foetus. (ii.) The thymus shows on section and microscopical examination a number of lobulated masses of lymphoid tissue supported by a framework of open connective tissue in which run a few rather large blood-vessels; here and there in the actual substance of the lymphoid masses there occur a few areas which appear clearer and which probably represent the remains! of the original lumina of the epithelial tubules from which the gland arises, 238 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON The accessory portions of the thymus, noted in the general description of the viscera as being isolated from the main mass, are in all probability derived from the 2nd branchial cleft, and do not fuse with the portions derived from the 3rd and 4th clefts. GROSCHUFF and VERDUN state that the thymus in carnivora arises invariably from the 3rd and 4th clefts, but in the rabbit, according to VeRpuN, additional parts may arise from the 2nd cleft.* In the present instance, paired accessory portions were found lying dorsal to the sterno-mastoid muscle on either side of the trachea, and these on examination showed a typical thymus structure. The lymphoid nodules of the thymus present a more or less uniform density with the exception of the occurrence of the above-mentioned clearer areas, and no sub- division into cortex and medulla is as yet obvious; nor are any corpuscles of Hassall to be observed. (iii.) The lungs (Pl. XXII. fig. 3)—Microscopical examination reveals in these organs a structure entirely comparable to that of a compound tubular gland, the branching tubules of which he embedded in connective tissue; the latter exists in large amount and is of a fibro-cellular character. The epithelium lining all of the ramifications of the bronchi is of the high columnar type, with the nuclei lying next the basement membrane, whilst immediately outside the latter there is seen a fairly wide zone of tissue, more densely cellular than the true interstitial connective tissue ; this denser zone is the anlage of the fibro-muscular and elastic coats of the bronchioles. The epithelium of the branching tubules is ciliated, and it is only during later stages that the cilia disappear in those portions of the bronchioles where the latter expand into the infundibula and alveoli; at the present stage, although in some places the tubules appear to widen out into sac-like expansions, the epithelium remains of the ciliated variety, since no true alveoli with air-sacs are as yet developed. The interstitial connective tissue, which during later stages becomes compressed and relatively diminished in amount by the preponderating development of the alveoli, contains some large blood-vessels, but these are as yet relatively few in number. (iv.) The pancreas (Pl. XXII. fig. 5).—The histological features presented by this gland are quite typical: branching tubules supported by a fine meshwork of con- nective tissue, the whole enclosed by a capsule of somewhat open character, from which trabecule pass into the substance of the gland. The tubules are lined by columnar epithelium, but there is as yet no definite basement membrane;f the lumina of the developing alveoli are quite small. The blood-vessels are quite small and apparently not very numerous at this stage; no signs of any cell-groups com- parable to islets of Langerhans are to be detected, but probably it is too early for * See Hertwic, Handbuch der Entwickelungslehre der Wirbeltrere, 1906. + The connective tissue appeared to have shrunken away from the tubules, leaving a considerable space between the two (see fig. 5), THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FG@ITAL SEA-LEOPARD. 239 these to have been formed. When a section of the pancreas stained with heema- toxylin is examined, it appears that the cells lining the alveoli are not characterised by the deeply-staining outer zone which is so marked a feature in the pancreas of the armadillo; moreover, the nuclei lie at the outer or attached borders of the cells. (v.) The spleen.—In minute structure, the spleen presents the following features :— (a) Externally, a somewhat dense fibrous capsule, in which also unstriped muscle cells are undergoing development. (b) Trabeculee passing from the capsule into the substance of the gland, and forming a network in the interior: near the surface some large arteries may be seen passing in, more especially in the vicinity of the hilus, and corresponding venous branches are emerging. (c) The bulk of the organ is made up of a mass of erythrocytes, erythroblasts, and lymphocytes; here and there cells suggesting the splenic cells of the adult organ may be seen, but giant-cells are apparently not present. A section taken through the splenic artery and vein with the blood contents of these vessels shows quite clearly that the vein contains many more lymphocytes than the artery, a feature which indicates that the lymphoid function of the spleen is already established ; whilst the presence of ery- throblasts in fairly large numbers in the spleen-pulp leads to the inference that heemogenesis is also a splenic function at this stage—a point which is well established in the case of the rabbit and some other mammals. No Malpighian corpuscles are to be seen in a section of the organ, but in some places the lymphocytes seem to be more densely aggregated than in others, with an indication of a small artery in their neighbourhood : these masses are not, however, well defined. (vi.) The kidneys and adrenal bodies (Pl. XXII. figs. 1 and 2).—At this stage the kidney presents histogenetic features which correspond fairly closely with those seen in the kidney of a four-months human foetus; that is to say, each renal pyramid when sectioned in a plane passing through the cortex and the apex of the papilla is seen to be made up of the following parts :— (a) A cortical zone, in the outermost layer of which are to be seen the di- chotomously branched endings of the tubules derived from the ingrowth into the metanephros of the diverticulum from the Wolffian duct ; in many of them the ampullary portions are continued into a coiled tubule—cut across many times and in various planes—the first or proximal convoluted tubule. At a somewhat deeper region of the cortex, the first set of Malpighian capsules are to be seen, these being relatively large as com- pared with those arising later: no sign of Henle’s tube is as yet evident, 240 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON since no downgrowth has occurred from the convoluted tubule to form the loop.* (b) A deep zone, in which as yet connective tissue preponderates, and through which course the branching tubes derived from the Wolffian diverticulum ; these tubules possess wide lumina, and are lined by a clear cubical epi- thelium. They represent the rudiments of the straight and collecting tubules, those nearest the papilla becoming later on the ducts of Bellini ; in the Phocidee, according to Cu1Evirz,} many of the secondary and tertiary branches of the Wolffian diverticulum disappear during development. The epithelium lining the convoluted tubules of the cortical zone is clear and cubical, the nuclei stainmg but feebly with basic stains: the portion of the tubule, however, which joins the ampulla is lined by smaller cells, the nuclei of which stain deeply. The glomerulus in each Malpighian capsule is a well-developed capillary tuft with already an indication of lobulation. Between the renal pyramids and supporting them there is a certain amount of connective tissue (columns of Bertini) in which small blood-vessels are seen cut across (capsular vessels of later stages). The adrenal bodies (Pl. XXII. fig. 2).—Relatively speaking, the adrenals are much smaller than one would expect at this phase of development, but their histogenetic features are none the less instructive: each gland is enclosed in a capsule of connec- tive tissue in which course branches of the adrenal artery and vein, whilst smaller vessels (arterial) pass at right angles to the surface into the gland, being supported by the fine septa which are given off from the inner aspect of the capsule. The substance of the adrenal is made up of the following parts :— (a) An outer zone, the commencing zona elomerulosa, composed of folded columns of small cuboidal cells. (b) A wide intermediate zone composed of anastomosing broad columns of large polyhedral cells: this is the developing zona fasciculata, amongst the columns of which ramify the small vessels noted above as passing in from the capsule. The cells of this zone are characterised by their small clear nuclei, and their deeply-staining cytoplasm, which takes up eosin very readily. Throughout this zone are scattered small masses of rounded cells, with deeply- staining nuclei, the sympathetic ganglion rudiments. These are aggregated in larger masses in the central region of the gland, where they form the anlage of the medulla. In the medullary region the blood-channels are wide, and as yet are lined by a well-defined endothelium. * Curevirz (Archiv Anat. u. Embryol., Supplement, 1897) found Henle’s tubule present in an embryo of Phoca, 145 mm. in length. The present foetus is only 122 mm. in length. + Op. cit. Se eS + = = THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FATAL SEA-LEOPARD. 241 Compared with mammals, such as the pig, the adrenal of this Seal appears to be somewhat behindhand in the relative rate of its development; thus, in a pig embryo of 119 mm. the medulla is well defined, and most of the sympathetic derivatives are confined to it alone; but in a pig embryo of 70 mm. the histology of the gland is much as has been described above.* (vii.) The genital glands (Pl. XXII. fig. 4).—As has been noted, the genital glands in the present instance are ovaries; each ovary has a well-defined histological appear- ance, and it is possible to recognise— (a) An outer layer of rather high cubical epithelium. (b) A wide cortical zone composed of masses of rounded cells or primordial ova (some of these being considerably larger than others, and forming potential ova which will later become surrounded by a follicle of smaller cells to form the commencing Graafian follicles). Between the ova a good deal of fibro-cellular connective tissue is to be seen, and this forms a dense interlacing network supporting the ege-cells. (c) Deep to the above cortical zone comes a layer of fibro-cellular stroma, com- parable to the tunica albuginea of the testicle, but having a relatively different position in the gland. (d) A central portion, composed for the most part of dense stroma, with here and there masses of ova, which are the remains of the so-called medullary cords of somewhat earlier stages. In the mesovarium, which forms a wide peritoneal band of attachment, there are to be seen mesonephric tubules and glomeruli, whilst at the point of attachment of this band to the ovary there are some tubules, supported by stroma, forming the rete ovaril. The above histological appearances correspond closely with those to be seen in the ovary of a cat embryo of 94 mm.;{ no signs of developing Graafian follicles are to be seen, as the follicular epithelium has not as yet been formed round any of the larger ova. (viii.) The placenta (Text-fig. 2).—The details of the placenta and placentation have been acquired in the present instance from the study of a specimen lent to the author by Professor WarErston of King’s College, London; this specimen shows a foetus of the Weddell Seal, a closely allied species, a setu in the uterus, with the membranes in their proper relative position with regard to foetus and placenta.{ The relations of the amniotic sac to the foetus and umbilical cord are such that the former appears to be enclosed in a small complete sac, which is quite closed towards the ventral aspect of the embryo, the umbilical cord upon reaching the line of closure dividing up into a number of branches each containing twigs from the * See HERTWIG, op. cit. + Figured by Comrz, Inaug. Dissert., Leiden, 1898. { Figured in Sir Wini1am Turner’s Catalogue of Marine Mammals. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 8). 34 242 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON arteries and vein. The amnion then spreads out on either side of the line of closure, the resulting folds passing anteriorly, posteriorly, and laterally to the margins of the placenta, over which it then spreads, covering the foetal surface of that structure. The branches of the umbilical arteries and vein are conducted by the above-mentioned folds to the margins of the placenta, and finally divide up into numerous twigs which enter the substance of the chorion. The placenta itself is of the zonary type, occupying a median zone of the uterus: its histology corresponds very closely with the descriptions of GrossER™ and Duvau for the zonary placentee of the cat and bitch, with the exception of certain minor OD ew RN RoHS AWC 6&6 SST iB 42 ao “OS fp be olfOu] 2 } e\acca GE o8 @ WY \ A Ya| Zl xe rokhenemecse wall OAL oes 6 Q Ghp i NY a> Uy 0 Gab noo Ch S| [XS Ld hip € £80 Go a NCE, Z 7208) EN OX sg 8 00 § e BR 0D bre oso Fic. 2.—A portion of a transverse section of the uterine wall and placenta of the Weddell Seal. (Semi-diagrammatic. ) m. Muscle layers of uterine wall, 1. Lumina of glands containing secretion (em: b, Maternal blood-vessels. bryotrophe of Grosser). e, Epithelium lining uterine glands. tr. Interglandular fastening septum. v. Villi of placental labyrinth. The fcetal blood-vessels exist in considerable numbers in the villi, but are not represented in the figure ; the fetus contained in the above uterus had undergone about one-third of its development. details. Thus we find that a vertical section taken through the placenta and uterine wall presents the following main features (fig. 2) :— (a) A sheet of amnion (not shown in the figure) covering the foetal surface of the numerous “ cotyledons” of the placenta. (b) The foetal portion of the placenta, composed of the rather wide laminz of the so-called “ placental labyrinth” + between which mesodermic tissue lies ; the sheets of this labyrinth are made up of a syncytium (derived from the trophoblast of earlier stages) which encloses and surrounds large * Vergleichende Anat. und Entwickelungsgesch. der Hihaute wu. Placenta, 1909. + See GROSSER, op. cit. — —__. 7 THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FETAL SEA-LEOPARD. 243 numbers of fcetal capillaries, whilst maternal vessels of rather wider calibre lie in the mesodermic septa and become at times surrounded by portions of the syncytium. (c) A zone in which an invasion of the superficial gland-layer of the uterine mucosa has taken place, the syncytium of the villi having at an earlier phase converted the uterine epithelium into what GrossErR terms a “ sym- plasma,” and becoming as it were welded with the mucosa at numerous points; the partitions between the glands become also fixed to other villous tufts. (d) A deeper layer which comprises the bases of the uterine glands, and lies next the uterme muscle. The muscular coat, which is in the present case thin, contains large branches of the maternal blood-vessels, and these, where the interglandular septa pass to become fixed to the syncytium of the villi, pass into the mesoderm lying between the lamelle of the placental labyrinth. It appears that zone c noted above (so-called “umlagerungszone” of STRAHL and GROSSER) is, during the earlier phases, of the greatest importance in establishing the connection between the uterine epithelium and the syncytium of the villi; a further action of the syncytium is to convert some of the decidual cells lying between the uterine glands into trophoblastic masses not unlike the invading syncytium itself. During earlier stages, stress is also to be laid upon the probability that the secretion of the uterine glands serves as an additional source of nutriment (‘‘ embryo- trophe”) to the foetus. From the above account it will be seen that there is a considerable histological similarity between the zonary placente of the cat and Seal; one notable difference is to be seen in the relatively narrow extent of the gland-layer in the uterus of the Seal, and another in the greater width of the laminz of the placental labyrinth. (ix.) The internal ear (Pl. XXII. fig. 6).—The semicircular canals, utricle, ampulle, and cochlea are well advanced in development, and lie in the cartilaginous rudiment of the osseous labyrinth ; the membranous labyrinth is represented by a somewhat thick connective tissue with a certain amount of elastic tissue entering into its composition. A transverse section across one of the semicircular canals im situ shows that the canal is placed very excentrically, lying against one side of the cartilaginous labyrinth, to which the connective tissue fixes it quite firmly. From the projecting part of the canal, strands or bundles of fibres pass to the opposite circumference of the cartila- ginous tube, and, joining here a continuation of the membrane, help to fix the canal, so that practically no contraction of the lumen is possible. The spaces between the fixing strands are filled with perilymph, whilst the canal itself is lined by a somewhat flattened epithelium, which later on secretes endolymph. In the utricle and ampulle 244 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON small elevations or “ cristae” project into the lumen, and are lined by a much higher type of epithelium than that found in the canals; but as yet there is no evidence of hair-like structures upon the free internal borders of the component cells. The cochlea is rather more advanced in development than would be the case in a three-months human feetus; according to Kravsz,* the organ of Corti in the human foetus at birth shows that the membrana tectoria is only commencing to form, whilst the sensory epithelium lying upon the basilar membrane shows only a larger and a smaller group of columnar cells. The author’s preparations of the cochlea of a three- months human foetus show the sensory epithelium as a group of columnar cells higher than the remainder in the tube, but no sign of the membrana tectoria. The scala tympani is present, but no membrane of Reissner as yet divides the upper cavity into scale media and vestibuli, whilst the rudiments of the spiral ganglion and cochlear nerve are certainly to be made out, but are not at all advanced. In the Seal embryo under discussion, all three scale are present, the spiral ganglion is a marked feature, the membrane of Reissner is well defined, and the epithelium of the organ of Corti is becoming differentiated, the component cells being higher upon the outer side, and their free borders showing a well-defined clear zone. (x.) The pituitary body (see text-fig. 3).—A specimen of the pituitary gland of an adult Weddell Seal (Leptonychotes weddelli) was examined histologically by the author some time since,} and found to possess all three portions, viz. pars anterior, pars intermedia, and pars nervosa, highly differentiated. The Sea-Leopard Seal in its earlier phases of development possesses a very interesting hypophysis, which more- over sheds some light upon the origin of the pars intermedia. Although a complete account of the histogenesis of this structure is not possible in the present instance, there are certain points in its development which are worthy of somewhat detailed — description, and for purposes of comparison the developing hypophyses of the rabbit (at the twelfth, fourteenth, and nineteenth days) and of the three-months human feetus were submitted to microscopical examination. A nearly median sagittal section taken through the pituitary of this Seal embryo (the gland being im situ in the sella turcica of the ossifying sphenoid bone) shows the following features :— (i.) The anterior lobe (pars anterior), consisting of irregular columns of rather large polyhedral cells, separated by wide blood-channels, the latter possess- ing a well-marked endothelial lining ; at the posterior extremity of the lobe 8; the blood-channels are observed to open into large venous tributaries, which ultimately join up and communicate with the cavernous sinus, the latter being seen in section lying just anterior to the dorsum selle of the sphenoid bone (fig. 3, g). * See Hnrrwia, op. cit. + Trans. Roy. Soc. Kdin., vol. xlviii. part iv., No. 31, 1913. — ee THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FQTAL SEA-LEOPARD. 245 (ii.) An intermediate cleft lying dorsal to the pars anterior, which is the remaining evidence of Rathke’s pouch; this cleft is towards its lateral aspects (not shown in the figure) partially filled by proliferating columns of epithelial cells, some of which are to be seen in the mesial section at the anterior extremity of the cleft. (ii.) The pars nervosa, or posterior lobe, lying dorsal to the cleft, and connected with the floor of the 3rd ventricle by the infundibulum ; part of the cavity of the ventricle is seen extending into the infundibulum, but this feature disappears during later stages to a large extent. Sz 4 = ——S—=s — =e, = SSS as a ————> os a TEnoe — = ati SCTE ent rate nay See =3 Zeer topos mee COSC LUC Int Fac O“NUM naar oUnOOND \ a ié oe Fic. 3.—A vertical section through the base of the skull to show the hypophysis cerebri in stu, lying in the sella turcica of the sphenoid bone. (Semi-diagrammatic.) a. Epithelium of the roof of the nasal cavity. Developing basi-sphenoid bone ; the “‘irruption ”-stage of ossification in cartilage is represented. ce, Large anterior lobe of hypophysis showing cell-columns and intervening blood-vessels ; the dark masses are cells staining more deeply with eosin. d, infundibulum, showing communication with the 8rd ventricle of brain. e. Posterior lobe (pars nervosa) of hypophysis. f. Cleft between the anterior and posterior lobes ; at the anterior end of this is seen a mass of cells, derived by an infolding from the anterior lobe, which will ultimately give rise to the pars intermedia, g. Cavernous sinus. h. Dorsum selle of sella turcica, = In connection with the pars intermedia, it appears that the columns of cells found partially filling the above-mentioned cleft are derived by a proliferation of cells at the upper and anterior angle of the pars anterior. HrERrine* describes (in the cat) the pars intermedia as an epithelial investment of the posterior lobe, but in the Seal, at least during later stages, the intermediate mass is a well-defined strip of closely * Journ. of Hxper. Physiol., 1909. 246 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON packed cells, which curves round the ventral aspect of the posterior lobe and appears to end abruptly in a broad club-shaped extremity at the posterior and ventral margin of that lobe. The dorsal portion, however, passes over the upper surface of the pars anterior and seems to fuse with the anterior and dorsal margin of that lobe. No remnant of Rathke’s pouch is to be seen in the fully formed pituitary of the Seal, whereas in the rabbit, cat, and man the pouch persists as a distinct cleft between the pars anterior and the pars intermedia. In the present instance the roof of Rathke’s pouch is lined by a columnar epithelium, which at the anterior extremity merges into the cell-columns which later on fill up the pouch. Upon the dorsal aspect of the posterior lobe no epithelial investment is to be seen, whilst the floor of Rathke’s pouch is formed by the super- ficial cells of the pars anterior, which are arranged in the form of an epithelium. The very close union maintained between the buccal and cerebral portions of the pituitary from the earliest stages is commented upon by Herring * and emphasised as having a direct bearing upon the functional importance of the gland. In the Seal, at the stage of development now under discussion, the union between the two portions is very intimate, but becomes even more marked as develop- ment proceeds. Compared with the hypophysis of a three-months human foetus, that of this Seal is a good deal in advance. In the human fcetus at three months the connecting strand passing between the pars anterior and the buccal epithelium is still present, whilst the posterior lobe is only represented by a very narrow diverticulum from the floor of the 3rd ventricle. Again, sections taken sagittally through the pituitary of the rabbit three days before birth show that the size of the posterior lobe is small as compared with the anterior, and the cavity in the infundibulum is represented by a mere cleft lined by ependyma. During earlier phases in this animal (twelfth and fourteenth days) the relation between the size of the lobes is such that the posterior lobe is proportion- ately larger than during later stages. In the Seal, at the stage under discussion, the posterior lobe is at least one-half the size of the pars anterior; but this relation does not holdin the full-grown animal, where the anterior lobe is five or six times as large as the pars nervosa. More detailed histological examination of the pituitary of the present foetus shows certain characters which differ from those observed in similar anatomical regions during later stages ; in the first place, the blood-channels in the pars anterior still retain their endothelial lining, a feature which disappears during development to a large extent, although in some parts of the full-grown anterior lobe endothelial cells are to be seen forming at least a partial lining to the blood-vessels. The cell- columns of the anterior lobe are composed of closely packed polyhedral cells, which, when stained with an acid stain such as eosin, may be differentiated into two * Op. cit. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FETAL SEA-LEOPARD. 247 varieties, viz. a majority which stain lightly, and here and there isolated cells staining intensely; the cytoplasm of the latter cells is also more granular in appearance. In the fully formed gland these deeply staining cells are more numerous, and collected into small groups instead of being isolated cells. The pro- liferating columns seen in Rathke’s pouch are composed of rather cuboidal, or in some cases columnar, cells, which do not possess any special affinity for eosin, but the nuclei of which stain deeply with basic dyes; no evidence of the syncytial structure seen in the pars intermedia of later stages is to be made out, nor does any colloid appear to have been formed as yet. The pars nervosa appears to possess much the same minute structure as does that part of the adult gland; for the most part, neuroglia cells and fibres predominate, some of the former being spindle-shaped and occurring in that portion of the lobe which les next the epithelium forming the roof of Rathke’s pouch, their long axes being at right angles to the ventral surface of the lobe. The portion of the cavity of the 3rd ventricle which passes into the infundibulum is lined by an ependyma of the usual type, viz. rather high columnar epithelium, the component cells being ciliated, whilst the basal portions of these cells are continued as neuroglia fibres into the substance of the pars nervosa. There is no colloid to be detected as-yet in this part of the pituitary, although in the fully formed gland small particles of colloidal material derived from the pars inter- media are to be seen scattered throughout the posterior lobe. Lying just dorsal to the infundibulum is a folded portion of the floor of the 3rd ventricle, which encloses a small fold of pia mater; this portion later on becomes modified to form a small ovoid mass lying on the dorsal aspect of the posterior lobe, and contains syncytial strands of nucleated cytoplasm more fully described by the author in a previous communication.* When fully formed it is very vascular, but its functional signi- ficance is not at all obvious. The above somewhat brief description of some of the developmental aspects of the pituitary of the Sea-Leopard Seal are, of necessity, incomplete, on account of the fact that only a single specimen was available for investigation. It would be interesting to follow some of the earlier phases, inasmuch as the gland appears in this animal to have a high functional significance—quite as much so, in fact, as in some higher types.t GENERAL COMPARATIVE CONCLUSIONS IN CONNECTION WITH THE ANATOMICAL AND HISTOLOGICAL FEATURES PRESENTED BY THE Farus or STENORHYNCHUS. (i.) The foetus, in the light of the above considerations, shows many points in common with the human fcetus at the beginning of the fourth month of intra-uterine development. If the relative rates of growths during the earlier developmental * Op. cit. + For further details of the cytological characters of the various regions of the mammalian pituitary, see ScuAreEr, “Text-Book of Microscopic Anatomy” (Quain’s Anatomy, vol. ii. part i.). 248 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON phases are at all comparable in the two cases, then the present foetus should have completed about one-third of its development. In many respects, however, this foetus shows an advance upon the three-months human embryo, notably in connection with the pituitary gland, the cerebellum, and the internal ear. (ii.) The other mammals (rabbit, cat, and pig) with which incidentally the foetus has been compared show on the whole a fairly close agreement, both anatomically and histologically ; one marked exception, from the anatomical point of view, is in connection with the kidney, which places the Seals in a small sub-group of the carnivora, to which the bear also belongs. (iii.) The developmental features of the pituitary, kidney, and brain are sufficiently instructive to necessitate, when possible, investigation of the earlier phases of development of these organs; the acquisition of early Seal embryos is, however, a dificult matter, but they might with advantage be sought for, as large numbers of Seals are killed annually. In conclusion, the author wishes to thank Dr. W. 8. Bruck and Professor WaTERSTON for their courtesy in lending Scotia specimens of foetal Seals for investi- gation; also Professor Heppurn for many valuable suggestions in connection with anatomical details, and Mr. T. H. Burwenp, of University College, Cardiff, for much useful criticism concerning the arrangement of the above report. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Baiutey and Miter, Text-book of Embryology, 1909. Bryce, T. H., Quain’s Anatonyy: vol. 1., Hmbryology. Cuievitz, Archiv Anat. u. Embryol., Supplement, 1897. Grosser, Vergleich. Anat. und Entwickelungsgeschichte der Kihaute u. Placenta, 1909. Hare, V’rans. Roy. Soc. Edin., ibid. Hepsurn, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlviii., 1913. HERRING, Journ. of Exper, Physiol., 1909. Hertwie, Handbuch der Entwickelungslehre der Wirbeltiere, 1906. Kerpet and Matt, Teat-book of Embryology, 1912. Scnarer, E. A., Quain’s Anatomy: vol. ii. part. i., Teaxt-book of Microscopic Anatomy. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate XIX. Fig. 1. Foetus of the Sea-Leopard Seal :— a.f. Anterior flipper. am. Amnion. p.f. Posterior flipper. p. Placenta. ¢., Laal, b. Tongue: the bifid extremity showing cl.a, Cloacal aperture. between lips. u. Umbilicus. pal.f. Palpebral fissure, u.c. Umbilical cord. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FQ@ITAL SEA-LEOPARD. 249 Fig. 2. Dissection of the Sea-Leopard Seal, to show the principal viscera 2m situ (ventral aspect) :— 1. Thyroid and lowest parathyroid. 10. Patent allantoic duct. 2. Trachea. 11. Urinary bladder. 3. Thymus. 12. Coils of small intestine. 4. Left lung (upper lobe). 13. Umbilical vein. 5. Left auricular appendix. 14. Right lobe of liver. 5a. Left lung (lower lobe). 15. Gall bladder. 6. Ventricular portion of heart. 15a. Right lung (middle lobe). 7. Diaphragm. 16. Right auricular appendix. 8. Left lobe of liver. 17. Right lung (upper lobe). 9, Umbilical cord. 18. Arch of aorta. PuatE XX. Anatomical details of the brain and cranial and nasal fosse. Fig. 1. The brain from the dorsal aspect :— 1. 4th ventricle (floor). 3. Superior surface of cerebral hemisphere. 2. Lamelle of cerebellar hemisphere. 4, Crura cerebri. Fig. 2. The brain from the side :— 1. Olfactory lobe. 5. Medulla oblongata. 2. Fissure of Sylvius. 6. Cerebellum, 3. Infundibulum. 7. Cerebral hemisphere. 4, 3rd nerve. Fig. 3. Mesial surface of a median sagittal section of head :— 1. Lower jaw. 7. Corpora quadrigemina. : 2. Tongue. 8. Optic thalamus. 21, Lamina terminalis. 9. Falx cerebri. 3. Hypophysis cerebri. 9!. Corpus callosum. 4, Medulla oblongata. 10. Nasal fossa (lower). 5. 4th ventricle. 11. Nasal septum. 6. Cerebellum. 12. Buccal cavity. Fig. 4. Nearly mesial sagittal section of brain to show distribution of grey and white matter, and general relations of parts :— 1, Nuclei of vagus and hypoglossal nerves. 7. Portion of choroid plexus. 2. Grey matter of cerebellar hemisphere. 8. Portion of 3rd ventricle in infundibulum, 3. Pia mater. 9. Grey matter in optic thalamus. 4, Grey matter of cortex cerebri. ii. Part of prosencephalon communicating with 5. Superficial white matter of cortex. lateral ventricle. 6. Grey matter lining cavity of prosen- iv. 4th ventricle. cephalon, just showing. Fig. 5. Mesial surface of sagittal section of head, the nasal septum and falx having been removed :— t. Tongue. | op. Optic thalamus. hy. Hypophysis. h. Cerebral hemisphere. m.o. Medulla oblongata. olf.l. Olfactory lobe. cb. Cerebellum. eth.t. Ethmo-turbinal bone. p. Pons. ma.t. Maxillo-turbinal bone. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART I. (NO. 8). 35 250 MR HAROLD AXEL HAIG ON Puate XXI. Anatomical features of some of the viscera. — . Coils of small intestine. bo curvature of stomach. . Pyloric end of stomach. . Peritoneal fold attached to greater . 1. The stomach and intestines from the ventral aspect :-- 5. Csophagus. 6. First bend of duodenum, 7. Pancreas. 8. Part of transverse colon. 3 4, Cardiac end of stomach. 2 . A coronal section of the thyroid and lowest parathyroid :— th. Lobules of the lateral lobe. p.th. Parathyroid, showing arrangement of cell-columns with intervening blood-channels and con- nective tissue. v. Vein in capsule, with a small nerve-trunk. Fig. 3. The lungs from the ventral aspect :— a. Part of right middle lobe. d. Pulmonary vein emerging from right lung. b. Upper and lower lobes of left Inng. e. The three lobes of right lung. c. Bronchi entering root of lung. Fig. 4, The retroperitoneal and pelvic viscera :— 1. Cloacal aperture. 7. Adrenal gland. 2. Severed allantoic duct. §. Diaphragmatic ligament of mesonephros, 3. Urinary bladder. 9. Genital gland. 4. Ureter (cut across). 10. Rectum, with rudimentary uterus just ventral 5. Genital duct. to ib. 6. Left kidney. Fig. 5. The liver from dorsal aspect :— rl, Right lobe. 1.2. Left lobe k. Surface of right lobe which lies over l.v. Umbilical vein (=ligamentum teres of later kidney. stages. ) Fig. 6. Deep surface of the spleen :— a. Elongated hilus with blood-vessels. | 6.and ec. Dorsal and ventral margins. Pirate XXII. Figures (semi-diagrammatic) illustrating the histological features of some of the viscera. Fig. 1. Portion of a longitudinal coronal section of a kidney showing a quadrant of one renal pyramid and some intervening connective tissue :— a. Ampulle of terminal branches of ™ w. Secondary, tertiary, etc., branches of Wolffian Wolffian diverticulum. diverticulum. con.t, Convoluted tubule seen cut across 2. Intervening connective tissue between neigh- several times. bouring pyramids. m.c. Malpighian capsules. Fig. 2. Part of a longitudinal coronal section of an adrenal body :— ce. Capsule. s. Sympathetic ganglion cell masses. z.g. Zona glomerulosa. b. Blood-channels in medulla between large z.f. Zona fasciculata. groups of sympathetic cell-masses. m. Medulla. THE SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FATAL SEA-LEOPARD. Zot Fig. 3. Part of a section of lung, showing the branching tubules embedded in discrete masses of con densed connective tissue with rudiments of muscular and elastic layers lying next the tubules, The in- terstitial connective tissue is also present in large relative amount. Fig. 4. Portion of a longitudinal section of the ovary :— ep. Surface epithelium (germinal epi- s. Dense stroma forming a kind of tunica thelium). albuginea. ec. Cortical zone with primitive ova and m. Medulla with a few masses of ova and some stroma. much stroma separating them. Fig. 5. Part of a section of the pancreas, showing typical arrangement of branching tubular acini, with but little interstitial connective tissue. Fig. 6. Portion of a vertical section through the developing cochlea showing one turn of the spiral in section :— s.v. Scala vestibuli. B. Basilar membrane, with rudimentary organ R. Membrane of Reissner, of corti resting upon it. c.c. Canal of the cochlea. S.T. Scala tympani. G. Spiral ganglion. PRESENTED 1 UCL 1914 Vol.L. Plate XIX. oy. Soc. Edin®, SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FOETAL SEA-LEOPARD. HAIG ey) ye A. RITCHIE & SON, EDIN® as. Roy. Soc. Edin", Vol. L. Plate XX HAIG: SYSTEMATIC ANATOMY OF A FOETAL SEA-LEOPARD. ro) { 2 : recs 4 7 10 M4 i ——— Zi Aa Gi Do A 5 ft ( 253 ) |X.—Stalk-eyed Crustacea Malacostraca of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By the Rey. Thomas R. R. Stebbing, M.A., F.R.S., F.LS., E.Z.8., Hon. Fellow of Worcester College, Oxford. Commumicated by Dr J. H. ASHWoRTH. (MS. received December 2, 1913, Read March 16, 1914. Issued separately June 4, 1914.) [Plates XXIII.—-XXXII.] As the Scotia was engaged in marine research throughout the whole of its long voyage out and home, it was only to be expected that Antarctic specimens would form but a small fraction of the result. In like manner, as several of the halting- places, such as the Cape of Good Hope and the Falkland Islands, had been visited by many keen naturalists on earlier occasions, it was quite likely that species of the group with which this report is concerned would have been in numerous instances already observed. Accordingly, out of some fifty species here discriminated, only six claim to be new, and not more than ten can be regarded as Antarctic or sub- Antarctic in their place of capture. In the vast extension, however, which marine zoology has for some time past been receiving, some retardation in the stream of discovery may not be unwelcome to the systematist. Familiar forms which would otherwise amply repay a thorough reinvestigation are apt to be thrust on one side, when striking novelties are for ever appealing to be introduced. This expedition, like others before it, affords fair evidence that the Macrura are both abundant and varied in great depths of the ocean. But only too often the frailty of their fabric leaves them in a tantalisingly mutilated condition when they reach the surface. CONSPECTUS OF THE SPECIES. BRACHYURA. Brachyura genuina. Tribe OXYRRHYNCHA. Family Inacuipé. Achxopsis thomson (Norman), Gough Island, 40° 20’ S., 9° 56’ W. Coryrhynchus algicola, n. sp., 18° 24’ S., 37° 58’ W. Eurypodius latreillit, Guérin, Falkland Islands, and Burdwood Bank, 54° 25’S., aa 32) W. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9). 36 254 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Family Mamatp&. Macroceloma concavus, Miers, 18° 24’ S., 37° 58’ W. Family ParRTHENOPIDA. Lambrus verrucosus, Studer, off Pyramid Point, Ascension Island. Tribe CYCLOMETOPA. Family XANTHIDA, Xanthodius parvulus (Fabricius), Porto Grande, St Vincent. Family Portunips. Lupa say, Gibbes, from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Family CorystTip&. Nautilocorystes ocellatus (Gray), entrance to Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Tribe CATOMETOPA. Family GoNEPLACIDA. Goneplax angulatus (Pennant), off Dassen Island, near Saldanha Bay, South Africa, Pilumnoplax heterochir (Studer), Gough Island, 40° 20’ 8., 9° 56’ W. Family GRAPSID&. ; Grapsus maculatus (Catesby), St Helena, St Vincent, and Ascension Island. Cyclograpsus punctatus, Milne-Edwards, False Bay, South Africa. Planes minutus (Linn.), from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Plagusia capensis, de Haan, Saldanha Bay and Cape Town. Percnon planissimus (Herbst), Porto Grande, St Vincent. Family GECARCINIDA. Gecarcinus lagostoma, Milne-Edwards, Ascension Island. Family HyMENOSOMATID&. Hymenosoma orbicularis, Desmarest, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Halicarcinus planatus (Fabricius), Falkland Islands and South Orkneys. Tribe OXYSTOMATA. Family CALAPPIDz, Mursia cristimanus, de Haan, otf Dassen Island, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 255 Brachyura anomala. Family Dromimp. Dromia dormia (Linn.), 48° 06’ S., 10° 05’ W. Droma sp.?, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Pseudodronia latens, Stimpson, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Family Larreriiip sé. Latreillia elegans, Roux, off Pyramid Point, Ascension Island. Macrura anomala. Tribe PAGURIDEA. Family Lirnopip 2. Lithodes antarcticus, Jacquinot, Burdwood Bank, 54° 25’ §., 57° 32’ W. Pardlomis granulosus (Jacquinot), Burdwood Bank, 54° 25’ 8., 57° 32’ W. Family Pacurip&. Pagurus arrosor (Herbst), Cape Town. Pagurus calidus, Risso, Ascension Island. Eupagurus forceps, Milne-Edwards, Falkland Islands. Eupagurus modicellus, n. sp., Pyramid Point, Ascension Island. Calcinus talisman, A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier, Porto Grande, St Vincent. Tribe GALATHEIDEA. Family GALATHEIDA. Mumda subrugosus (White), Falkland Islands. Munda gregarius (Fabricius), juv., Falkland Islands. Tribe HIPPIDEA. Family ALBUNEID#. Albunea gueriniw, Lucas, St Helena. Macrura genuina. Tribe SCYLLARIDEA. Family ScyLLarip&. Scyllarides elusabethe (Ortmann), off St Helena. 256 REV. T. RK. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Family PaLinurip#&. Jasus lalandic (Milne-Edwards), Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Tribe PEN HIDEA. Family PEna&IDs. Gennadas kempi, n. sp., 39° 48’ S., 2° 33’ K. Gennadas parvus (2), Bate, 48° 00’ 8., 9° 50’ W. Family LEvcrIFERID. Petalidium foliaceus, Bate, 48° 00’ S., 9° 50’ W. Tribe CARIDEA. Family PaL#Monip&. Leander squilla (Linn.), Porto Grande, St Vincent. Leander affinis (Milne-Edwards), Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Leander tenwcornis (Say), from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Family Hrprotytip&. Hippolyte acuninatus, Dana, from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Latreutes fucorum (Fabricius), from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Nauticaris brucei, n. sp., Gough Island, 40° 20’ 8., 9° 50’ W. Nauticaris magellanicus (A. Milne-Edwards), Falkland Islands. Family PasipH@#ID&. Phye scotiz#,n. spi,,68> 32_8.,12, 49° We: (As 22) Seal 34, We Phye rathbune, n. sp., 48° 00’ 8., 9° 50’ W. Family NEMATOCARCINID&. Nematocarcinus lanceopes, Bate, 71° 22’ S., 16° 34’ W.; and (?) 39° 48’S., 2° 33° Hi. SCHIZOPODA. Order MYSIDACEA. Sub-order LOPHOGASTRIDA. Family Hucopim”. Eucopia sp., 39° 48’ S., 2° 33’ E. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 2G STOMATOPODA. Family SQumLLips. Squilla avmatus, Milne-Edwards, off Dassen Island, South Africa. Lysioerichthus edwardsii (Eydoux and Souleyet), juv., 19° 59’ N., 22° 34° W. Though not properly coming within the scope of this report, the occurrence of the following species may for convenience’ sake be mentioned here :— Bopyrina latreuticola (Gissler), from Gulf weed, Sargasso Sea. Lanceola xstivus, Stebbing, 68° 32’ S., 10° 52’ W., surface. Nebalia bipes (Fabricius), Saldanha Bay, South Africa, 25 fathoms. BRACHYURA. Brachyura genuina. Tribe OXYRRHYNCHA. The classification here adopted is substantially the same as that used in the General Catalogue of South African Crustacea, to be found in the Annals of the South African Museum, vol. vi. part iv., issued in 1910. Family [vacnip. Genus Achxopsis, Stimpson. 1857. Achzopsis, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. ix. p. 219. 1873. Dorynchus, Norman, in Wyville-Thomson’s Depths of the Sea, p. 174, fig. 34. 1880. Lispognathus, A. Milne-Edwards, Etudes Crust. rég. Méxicaine, p. 349. 1886. Achzopsis, Miers, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 18. 1886. Lispognathus, Miers, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 27. 1886. Perrier, Explorations sous-marines, p. 298. 1893. Lee Ortmann, Zool, Jahrb., vol, vii. p. 36. 1910. a; Stebbing, Annals S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 285. 1910. Dorynchus, Stebbing, Annals S. Afr. hie, vol. vi. part iv. p. 285. 1911. Achxopsis, Rathbun, 7. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv. part ii. p. 247. Miers states that Achxopsis is distinguished from Inachus “merely by having the postocular as well as the preeocular spine distinctly developed, and by the more or less faleiform dactyli of the three posterior ambulatory legs.” From A. spinulosus, Stimpson, 1857, he says that his own A. giintherz, 1879, is distinguished “ by having but a single very long perpendicular spine on the gastric region.” Like these, A. superciliaris, Ortmann, 1893, has the rostrum not deeply divided. From Inachus and Achxopsis Miers considered Lispognathus “ distinguished by the well-developed rostral spines.” For that genus PERRIER notices as also characteristic the long slender ambulatory legs. Miss Rarupun, however, in 1911, without discussion, sinks Inspognathus, and by inference also Dorynchus, as synonyms of the earlier Achxopsis. 258 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA The generic name Dorynchus depended not on a definition but on the dorsal view of a specimen. The word Lispognathus, signifying “a smooth jaw,” is not very appro- priate for Norman’s species, in which the large third joint of the external maxillipeds is well studded with tubercles. Further, it has been shown by Dortern that in respect of length and divergence the rostral spines of Dorynchus thomsoni are very variable, so that its removal to Achxopsis is made the less difficult, and two rival claimants to the generic name may conveniently be dispensed with. Achexopsis thomsoni (Norman). 1873. Dorynchus thomsoni, Norman, Depths of the Sea, p. 174, fig. 34. 1880. Lispognathus furcillatus, A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Meaic., p. 349, pl. xxxia. fig. 4. 1886. Lispognathus thomsont, Miers, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 28, pl. v. fig. 2. 1886. 3 5 Perrier, Explor. sous-marines, p. 298, fig. 218. 1900. a a A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier, Crust. Decap. “ Travailleur-Talisman,” p. 148, pl. iii. fig. 8, pl. xxi. figs, 8-14. 1904. a _ Doflein, Ergebn. Deutschen Tiefsee-Exp., vol. vi. p. 75. 1908. 4 - Hansen, Ingolf-Exp., “‘ Crust. Malac.,” vol. iii. part ii. p. 11. 1910. Dorynchus thomsont, Stebbing, Annals S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 286. 1911. Achxopsis thomsoni, Rathbun, Tr. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv. part 11. p. 247. A. Mitne-Epwarps and Bouvier in 1900 still regard L. furcillatus as specifically distinct (loc. cit., p. 148), and on pp. 151, 152 (twice by a slip calling it L. furcatus) say that “LZ. thomsona is distinguished from L. furcillatus by the more slender form of the carapace, narrow front, rostral spines less divergent, spines of carapace more marked.” DorLein with ample material decides that the differences are based on a young specimen. Miss Ratruspun says of an adult male example taken at Seya de Malha from a depth between 300 and 500 fathoms: “This example has parallel horns about a quarter as long as remainder of carapace. It differs from typical specimens in having the anterior gastric and anterior branchial spines obsolete or reduced to low tubercles. The species is very close to A. spinulosus, Stimpson (Smithson Misc. Coll., xlix., 1907, p. 21, pl. iii. figs. 5, 5a), which has shorter legs, described as minutely spinulous above, but there is no indication, in description or figure, of the terminal spine on the merus joints. A. spinulosus is an inhabitant of shallower water (10 fathoms in Simon’s Bay, Cape of Good Hope).” As sug- gested above, the conspicuously long legs of A. thomsona seem to separate it de- cisively from the other species of the genus. But if A. spenulosus has anything like the variability established for A. thomsoni, the validity of A. giinthert must be regarded as resting on a very insecure foundation. The Scotia specimens have a denticle at the middle of each of the divergent rostral horns and a larger subdistal one visible from below. The eyes have a tubercle on the peduncle and another subdistal on the corneal portion. In the first antennee the third joint of the peduncle is oval, wider than the preceding joint ; the principal flagellum carries numerous filaments. The palp of the mandibles OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 259 appears to be membranous, the first joint scarcely distinct from the second, the third joint carrying two or three sete. In the third maxillipeds the inner margin of the third joint is finely but irregularly denticulate, the surface tubercles not closely set. The eggs of a small female are numerous, not very small. Locality.—Gough Island, lat. 40° 20’ S., long. 9° 56’ 30” W.; depths 75 and 100 fathoms ; April 21-23 and 24, 1904. The extraordinary distribution of this species has been noted by several authors, extending as it does from the Faroes to the West Indies, the Cape of Good Hope, Australia, and the Indian Ocean, with depths varying from 106 m. to 1326m. Fuller details are given by Miune-Epwarps and Bovuvisr, and by Dor etn. Gen. Coryrhynchus, Kingsley. 1860. Podonema (preoce.), Stimpson, Ann. Lyceum N.H. New York, vol. vii. p. 19. 1870. Stimpson, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. ii. p. 126. 1879. Podochela (part), A. Milne-Edwards, Miss, Sct. Meaxique, ‘‘ Crust.,” part v. p. 189. 1879. Podonema, Miers, J. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv. No. 79, p. 643. 1879. Coryrhynchus, Kingsley, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., p. 384. 1886. i (subgen.), Miers, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 11. 1900. * (subgen.), Young, West Indian Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 13. _ 1901. Podochela (part), Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 53. The peculiarity of an almost circular rostrum in species which otherwise clearly belong to the Oxyrrhyncha or sharply rostrate crabs may be taken to justify the separation of the genus from its near ally Podochela. Coryrhynchus algicola, n. sp. Plate XXIII. This new species is approximate to C. riisei (Stimpson), 1860, and C. spatulifrons (A. Milne-Edwards), 1879. It agrees with the latter in the short broad form of the rostrum, the former being distinguished from both by having the rostrum longer and narrower. On the other hand, the more pronounced angles of the distally widened fourth joint in the third maxillipeds here agree with ©. rise, and not with C. spatulifrons. In both of those species the fingers of the chelipeds are described by the French author as finely denticulate, and he figures those of his own species to correspond with that statement. The new species has the edges of these fingers not dentate but crenulate, the alternate projections of one finger neatly fitting the hollows of the other. Here also a pair of tubercles occur on the surface of the carapace between the eyes, which would seem to be absent from the other species under comparison. It may be judged from the copious supply of hooked and other setee with which the whole exposed surface is furnished in all three species, that all adopt similar methods of concealment. The Scotia specimen was a mere garden of seaweed, and the limbs were far more ready to leave the body than either body or limbs were to part with the investing weeds. The pellucid rostrum looked like a bit of weed, and one of the long second pereeopods was so thickly matted that it 260 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA had ceased to be in any way suggestive of a limb. The eyes have an apical tubercle carrying a setule. The first and second joints in the palp of the mandible seem to be in coalescence. The pleon of the female forms a deep almost circular bowl, the last three segments in coalescence constituting more than half of it. Length of carapace 19 mm., greatest breadth 13 mm., second perzeopod about 47 mm. long. For C. spatulifrons the corresponding measurements are 19, 14, and 44 mm. Locality.—Lat. 18° 24’ 8., long. 37° 58’ W.; depth 36 fathoms; Station 81. Genus Hurypodius, Guérin. 1828. EHurypodius, Guérin, Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, vol, xvi. pp. 349, 350. 1900. Pa Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 527. 1910. 5 Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviil, pp. 571, 612. Eurypodius latredlu, Guérin. 1828. Hurypodius latreidlit, Guérin, Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, vol. xvi. p. 354, pl. xiv. 1900. i s Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 527, 1905, Eurypodius latreillei, Lagerberg, Schwed. Siidpol. Exp., vol. v. part vi. p. 17 (with copious synonymy). 1910. Hurypodius latreilliz, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviul. pp. 571, 612. The study of this rather abundant species by numerous authors has led to its receiving a considerable variety of names. These are latredllia (probably an error of the press), tuberculatus, audouinii, andowini (error of the press), cuveri, septen- trionalis, brevipes, latreillei (probably meant for a correction), dane. All are now regarded as synonyms of the original ZL. latreidlu, Guérm. In LaGERserc’s useful list of the synonymy the crustacea of the Coquille are attributed to H. MILNE- Epwarps, by mistake for Gumiriy, who naturally uses the form /atredlw, not the erroneous latredllia, which only reappears in Gay’s Hist. Chile, 1849, where NIcoLer is pleased to refer it to GUERIN’S own writings. According to the last-named author, the colour in fresh [condition is greenish brown. The discussions instituted by various authors make it fairly certain that the supposed specific differences depend on sex and age or inconstant variation. LAGERBERG had at his disposal specimens varying in the length of the carapace between 8 and 87 mm., with a breadth of 4°5 mm. for the smallest and of 65 mm. for the largest. The Scotza specimens do not reach beyond a medium size. Localities.—Falkland Islands, Port Stanley, from 2 and 4 fathoms; Port William, from 6 fathoms ; Station 346, Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W., depth 56 fathoms. According to LaGERBERG, the greatest depth at which this species has hitherto been obtained is the 70 fathoms recorded by Miers in his Challenger report. Eurypodius longirostris, Miers, was dredged in 175 fathoms. Family Mamarip/. 1905. Mamaiide, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest. S.A. Crust., part iii. p. 22; and Pr. Brol. Soc. Washington, vol. xviii. p. 157. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 261 Genus Macroceloma, Miers. 1879. Macroceloma, Miers, J. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv. p. 665. 1886. - Miers, Rep. Voy. “‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 79. 1901. s Rathbun, Bull, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 73. Macroceloma concavus, Miers. 1886. Macroceloma concava, Miers, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 81, pl. x. figs. 2, 2a-b. 1898, Macroceloma concavum, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xxi. p. 576, 1901. 5 Ms Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 75. In this species the carapace is deeply concave upon the hepatic regions, “ the spines of the rostrum are short, in the adult less than one-fourth the length of the carapace, they are nearly straight, divergent, and separate by a triangulate inter- space.” The arrangement of the tubercles on the somewhat damaged carapace of the Scotia specimen appears also to answer the description given by Mrzrs, and the third maxillipeds and limbs agree with his account and illustrations, with this excep- tion, that in our specimen the finely denticulate inner margins of the fingers in the chelipeds leave a gap only quite close to the hinge. The length of the carapace measured from the base of the rostral spines is 29 mm., the spines themselves 5 mm., the breadth at the eyelobes 20 mm., and at the widest part to the rear 23 mm., not including the lateral spines which are here outstanding. Locality.Lat. 18° 24’ S., long. 37° 58’ W.; depth 36 fathoms; Station 81, December 20, 1902. For the gender of the specific name see Knowledge, vol. xxxi., No. 504, p. 259; and No. 509, p. 470, 1910. Family ParRTHENOPID&. 1834. “ Parthenopiens” (tribe), Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. i. p 347. 1847. Parthenopide, White, List Crust. Brit. Mus., p. 41. 1901. i Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 79. Genus Lambrus, Leach. 1815. Lambrus, Leach, 7'r. Linn. Soc. London, vol, xi. pp. 308, 310. 1895. * Alcock, J. Aszat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxiv. p. 259. 1901. Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 79. Lambrus verrucosus, Studer. 1882. Lambrus verrucosus, Studer, Abhandl. K. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, vol. ii. p. 9, pl. i. figs, 2a, 20. 1886, Fe 3 Miers, Rep. Voy. “‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 93. The species is notable for the very deep furrows which separate the tuberculate median ridge of the carapace from its tuberculate branchial regions. The spinulose rostrum is more produced than in StupEr’s figure, and the chelipeds are more verrucose and dentate in the Scotia specimen than in that which SrupER represents. The eyes show minute warts both on and below the cornea. ‘The species belongs to TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO, 9). 37 262 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA that section of the genus which Miers defines as having the fourth joimt of the ambulatory limbs more or less spinose or tubereulated. All the six segments of the pleon are also warty. Locality. Off Pyramid Point, Ascension, from depth of 40 fathoms; June 10, 1904; Station 507. Tribe CYCLOMETOPA. Family XaNTHIDA. 1898. Xanthidx, Alcock, Jour. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. Ixvii. part ii. p. 69. 1910. 5p Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 296. The family is here taken in the wider sense. Genus Xanthodius, Stimpson. 1859. Xanthodius, Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vol. vii. p. 52. 1901. Fi Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 27. A. Mitne-Epwarps, who gives the reference to STIMPSON as on p. 6, thinks that Stimpson distinguished Xanthodius from Leptodius on indifferent grounds, the crest on the endostome in the former being incomplete, and often occurring in a recognised species of the latter genus. Later authorities, however, appear to agree in upholding Strmpson’s determination, though Miss Rarusun does not insist on the character to which A. Mr~ne-Epwarps refers, and Dr Youne speaks of (subgenus) Leptodius as having “ endostome without trace of longitudinal carine. Xanthodius parvulus (Fabricius). 1793. Cancer parvulus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst., vol. ii. p. 451. 1858. Chlorodius americanus, Saussure, Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Genéve, vol. xiv. p. 430 (14), pl. i. fig. 5. 1860. Xanthodius americanus, Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vol. vii. p. 209 (81). 1879. Leptodius americanus, A. Milne-Edwards, Miss. Sci. Mexique, part v. p. 269. 1897. Xanthodius parvulus, Rathbun, Ann. Inst. Jamaica, vol. i, No. 1. p. 15. 1900. Leptodius (Xanthedius) americanus, Young, West Indian Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 147. 1901. Xanthodius parvulus, Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1900, vol. i. p. 27. 1908. - 5 Verrill, 77. Connect. Ac. Sci., vol. xiii. p. 340, text-fig. 12, pl. xiv. fig. 4. Miss Rarupun’s identification of pE SaussurE’s species with the Cancer parvulus of Fapricrus was based on “types examined.” The description given by Fapricius is therefore inexact, since he states the front to be entire, whereas it is notched in the centre; he speaks of the sides as tridentate, but they are quadriden- tate, and he says that the feet are short, smooth, with fingers black at the apex. As he is no doubt referring to the chelipeds, only the colour note is accurate, while the limbs are not specially short, and have the wrist and hand rough, “ eroded in reticulat- ing lines.” The thumb of the larger cheliped in the Scotia male specimen has a large blunt tooth on the inner margin near the hinge, and two smaller teeth near the apex ; the movable finger has a curved and hollowed apex and a median tooth on the inner margin. The fourth joint of the third maxillipeds is short and broad. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 263 The ambulatory limbs are short, with setose fingers. The pleon is five-segmented. The measurements of the specimen coincide with those given by pe Saussurg, length 14 mm., breadth 22 mm., width of front 6 mm. Locality.—St. Vincent, Porto Grande, shore N.E.; December 1, 1902; Station 24. Family Portrunipa, Genus Lupa, Leach. 1813. Lupa, Leach, Hdinb. Hncyel., vol. vii. p. 390. 1833. Neptunus, de Haan, Crust. Japonica, decas 1, p. 7. 1897 Portwnus, Rathbun, Pr, Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. xi. pp. 155, 160. 1908. Lupa, Stebbing, Annals S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part i. p. 11. Several other references for the genus may be obtained from those given for the following species. From the neighbouring and very similar genus Callinectes, Stimpson, the present is distinguished in the male sex by having the pleon triangular, without the narrow ending which in Callinectes gives it as it were the shape of the capital letter T. Lupa sayi, Gibbes. 1802. Portunus pelasgicus, Bosc, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. i. p. 219, pl. v. fig. 3 (Portune pélasgique). 1817.. Lupa pelagica, Say, J. Ac. Sct. Philad., vol. i. p. 97. 1830. Portunus pelasgicus, Bose and Desmarest, Hist. Nat. Crust,, vol. 1. p. 235, pl. v. fig. 3 (Portune pélagique). 1850. ae sayt, Gibbes, Pr. Amer. Assoc., p. 178. Heb2, ,, » Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. part i. p. 273, pl. xvi. fig. 8. 1861. Neptunus sayt, A. Milne-Edwards, Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., vol. x. p. 317, pl. xxix. fig. 2. 1878. 5 ,, A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Mexic., p. 210. 1886. Neptunus (Neptunus) sayz, Miers, Rep. Voy. Wehallencen” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 173. 1897. Portunus sayt, Rathbun, Ann. Inst. Jumaica, vol, i. p. 22. 1898. 0 » Rathbun, Pr. U.S Mus., vol. xxi. p: 592 1908. me » Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Sci,, vol. xiii. pp. 373, 374, 376, text-fig. 25, pl. xviii. fig. 2, pl. xxi. fig. 1. It is probable that this species was included by Hersst in his Cancer pelagicus, Krabben und Krebse, vol. i. p. 159, 1783, and represented by his fig. 55 on pl. viii. Miers remarks that “the convex, marbled carapace, short lateral epibranchial spines, and the absence of a spine on the posterior margin of the merus [fourth joint] of the chelipedes are characteristic of this species.” He observes that “a large series of specimens of this common pelagic species was taken from the Gulf weed” by the Challenger Expedition. The larger of two female specimens obtained by the Scotia measured 66 mm. from point to point of the epibranchial spines, with a length of 32 mm. for the carapace. A male specimen similarly measured 70x38 mm. The pleon in this agreed with Dana’s single figure, which represents this part of the organism. The male organs are very slender except at the base, and their apices, which curve strongly outwards, nearly reach the end of the telson. Locality —From Gulf weed, 29° 54’ N., 34° 10’ W. to 33° 53’ N., 32° 27’ W.; $ June 30, 1904, 2 June 29 and July 1, 1904; Stations 537, 538, and 539. 264 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Family Corystipz. 1899. Corystidx, Alcock, Jour. Asiat, Soc, Bengal, vol. lxviii. pp. 5, 103. Genus Nautilocorystes, Milne-Edwards. 1833. Dicera (preoccupied), de Haan, Crust. Japon., decas 1, pp. 4, 14. 1837. Nautilocorystes, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 149. 1900, * Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest. S. Afr., vol. i. p. 16 (with synonymy). Nautilocorystes ocellatus (Gray). 1831. Corystes ocellata, Gray, Zool. Miscellany, vol. i. p. 39. 1833. Corystes (Dicera) 8-dentata, de Haan, Crust. Japon., decas 1, p. 15. 1837. Nautilocorystes ocellatus, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 149; and later in the undated plates of the Régne animal, pl. xxiii. figs. 2, 2a-c. 1843. Dicera 8-dentata, Krauss, Siidafrik. Crust., p. 27. 1847. Nautilocorystes ocellatus, White, List Crust. in Brit. Mus., p. 53. 1857. if 5 Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., p. 39. 1900. Nawutilocorystes octodentatus, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest. S. Afr., vol. i. p. 17. 1907. Nautilocorystes ocellatus, Stimpson, Smithson. Misc. Coll., vol. xlix. p. 89 [IV. octodentatus (de Haan) in editor’s footnote]. 1910. Nautilocorystes octodentatus, Stebbing, Annals S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 311. My attention has been recently called by Dr Catman to the first of these references, which I had overlooked. The oversight was perhaps excusable, seeing that Mrtne-Epwarps prints the name Nawutilocorystes ocellatus as if the species were his own, and WuirTE, who gives reference to GRAY, gives it without date after his reference to MrtnE-EKpwarps ! Locality.—Entrance to Saldanha Bay, South Africa; depth 25 fathoms; Station 483. Tribe CATOMETOPA. Family GoNEPLACID &. 1900. Gonoplacidx, Alcock, J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxix. p. 282. 1910. Goneplacide, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 312. Genus Goneplax, Leach. 1814. Goneplax, Leach, Hdinb. Encycl., vol. vii. p. 430. 1817. 5 Latreille, Régne animal, vol. iii. p. 16. Goneplax angulatus (Pennant). 1777. Cancer angulatus, Pennant, British Zoology, vol. iv. p. 7, pl. v. fig. 10. 1910. Goneplax angulata, Stebbing, Ann, S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 312. The Scotca specimens were taken May 18, 1904. Locality.—Off Dassen Island, near Saldanha Bay ; depth 35 fathoms; Station 480. Genus Pilumnoplax, Stimpson. 1858. Pilumnoplax, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Philad., vol. x. p. 93. 1910. x Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 315. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 265 Pilumnoplax heterochir (Studer). 1882. Pilumnus heterochir, Studer, Abhandl. K. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, part ii. pp. 6, 14, pl. 1. fig. 3, a—d. 1886. Pilumnoplax heterochir, Miers, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p. 227, pl. xix. fig. 1, a-d. Miers and Stuper both call attention to the peculiarity in this species that the palm of the larger cheliped is smooth except at the base, while in the smaller cheliped the palm externally is covered with numerous granules. The fingers of both limbs retain their dark colour in spirit. SrupER says that in life the colour is intense orange-red, with only the fingers of the chele black. Locality.—Gough Island, depths 75 and 100 fathoms; the lower depth recorded on April 22, 1904, the other between April 21 and 23; Stations 460 and 461. Family GRaPsIDz. 1900. Grapsidz, Aleock, J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxix. part ii. pp. 283, 389. Genus Grapsus, Lamarck. 1801. Grapsus, Lamarck, Syst. Anim. sans Vertebres, p. 150. 1900. - de Man, Mém. Soc. Zool. France, vol. xiii. p. 48. 1910. ; Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 317. Grapsus maculatus (Catesby). 1758. Cancer grapsus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 630. 1771, 1743 (reissue 1771). Pagurus maculatus, Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolinas, vol. ii. p. 36, pl. xxxvi. fig. 1. 1908. Grapsus grapsus, Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Sci., vol. xiii. p. 317, pl. x. fig. 6; pl. xi. fig. 2 (with synonymy). 1910. Grapsus maculatus, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 317. According to ALcock, the carapace of a large specimen is 64 mm. long and 68 mm. broad. In the largest of the Scotia specimens the carapace is 32°5 mm. long and 38 mm. broad, with a front 14 mm. broad. Localities. St Helena, James Bay, June 1 and 2, 1904; Station 499. Ascension Island, June 7, 1904; Station 507. Two small specimens from the shore, Porto Grande, St Vincent, December 1, 1902, Station 24, appear to belong to this species. Genus Cyclograpsus, Milne-Edwards. 1837. Cyclograpsus, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. i. p. 77. Cyclograpsus punctatus, Milne-Edwards. 1837. Cyclograpsus punctatus, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. il. p. 78. 1838. Gnathochasmus barbatus, M‘Leay, Annulosa of S. Africa, p. 65, pl. ili. 1910. Cyclograpsus punctatus, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 318. Locality.—Specimens of this prettily marked species, in full agreement with M‘Leay’s coloured figure of it, were obtained by the Scotva Expedition from the shore of False Bay, May 8, 1904; Station 479. 266 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Genus Planes, Bowdich. 1825. Planes, Bowdich, Excursions in Madeira and Porto Santo, p. 15, figs. 2a, 20. 1910. » Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi, part iv. p. 320. This genus is placed by Atcock in his division Varunine. Planes minutus (Linn.). Plate XXIV. 1758. Cancer minutus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. 10, vol. i. p. 625. 1825. Planes clypeatus, Hx. in Madeira, etc., p. 15, figs. 2a, 2b. 1905. Planes minutus, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest. S.A. Crust., part ill. p. 43. 90S seers 5 Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Sct., vol. xiii. p. 325, text-fig. 7, pl. xiii. fig. a-f, pl. xxvii. fig. 6. A very large number of specimens were obtained by the Scotia from the Gulf weed on June 29 and 30 and July 1, 1904. In most cases the colouring is lost, but in some instances there is a well-marked pattern of dark brown on a light ground. In this species the third maxillipeds have the fourth joint much shorter than the third, but quite as broad, the outer margin strongly rounded, the fifth joint inserted in an excavation of the front margin of the fourth, and, when folded down, not reaching beyond that joint’s inner edge. The principal joint of the exopod does not reach the end of the endopod’s fourth joint. The specimen figured was rather per- plexingly distinguished by retaining as preserved a dark-brown colour and showing oblique striz on both sides of the carapace, while also the indent below the antero-- lateral angles was exceptionally well marked. Localities.—Saldanha Bay, South Africa, 25 fathoms ; Station 483. And also from 29° 5A’ N., 34° 10’ W..t0 88° 53° N., 82727 W. actations. 537, 538, anda ae: Genus Plagusia, Latreille. 1806. Plagusia, Latreille, Gen. Crust. et Insect., vol. i. p. 33. 1900. fs Alcock, J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxix. pp. 297, 436. 1905. i Stebbing, Marine Invest. S. Afr. Crust., part iii. p. 46. 1908. . Verrill, Z'r. Connect. Ac. Sci., vol. xiii. p. 332. 1910. rr Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 322. Immature Form. 1852. Marestia, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 487. 1910. Pe Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv., p. 348, From the essential agreement of the mouth-organs in the adult and Megalopa specimens it seems clear that the form which Dana assigned to his genus Marestia is really a juvenile stage of Plagusia. Both forms occur abundantly together. In his full account of the genus ALcock invites especial attention to a feature of the third maxillipeds, that “their exognath has no flagellum.” But this must be taken with some limitation, since DE Haan figures a small flagellum for his Plagusia dentipes, and I find one in P. capensis. It is slender, without sete except at the apex, the apex in the Megalopa stage indicating faintly a second joint. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 267 Plagusia capensis, de Haan. Plate XX VIc. 1835. Plagusia capensis, de Haan, Crust. Japon., decas 2, pp. 31, 58. 1837. Plagusia tomentosa, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii, p. 92. 1905. Plagusia capensis, Stebbing, Marine Invest. S. Afr. Crust., part ili. p. 47. 1910. Plagusia chabrus, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviil. pp. 591, 616. 1910. 53 3 Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 322. The reasons which I gave in 1905 for upholding the name given by pr Haan to this species still seem to me valid, while its identification with the obscurely described Cancer chabrus of LINN&US appears to be quite arbitrary. Locality.—Saldanha Bay, Station 483; and at the coaling jetty, Cape Town docks, Station 478. Genus Percnon, Gistel. 1835. Acanthopus (preoccupied), de Haan, Crust. Japon., decas 2, p. 29. 1848. Percnon, Gistel, Naturg. Thierreichs, p. viii. 1900. .; Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxii. p. 281. 1910. s Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi, pt. iv. p. 324. Percnon planissimus (Herbst). 1804. Cancer planissimus, Herbst, Krabben u, Krebse, vol. iii. part iv. p. 3, pl. lix. fig. 3. 1825. Plagusia clavimana, Desmarest, Consid. gén. Crust., p. 127, pl. xiv. fig. 2. a8 (1) ,, = Milne-Edwards, Régne anim., ‘‘ Undated Crust.,” pl. xxiii. fig, 3. 1900. Liolophus planissimus, Alcock, J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxix. p. 489 (copious synonymy). 1902. ss ¥3 de Man, Abhandl. Senckenbery. nat. Gesellsch., vol. xxv. part iii. p. 543, pl. xx. fig. 12. 1900. Percnon planissimum, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxii. p. 281. 1908. a Dy Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Scz., vol. xiii. p. 334, pl. x. fig. 3, pl. xii. fig. 4. 1910. re ss Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 324. This strikingly marked little species has an extensive distribution, being recorded from the Kast Indies, Australia, New Zealand, the Cape of Good Hope, Chile, Japan, and the Bermudas. According to Krauss the South African specimens have the carapace dusky greenish brown, with a bright blue stripe down the middle, and the feet striped (gebindert) with reddish brown and yellow. Atcock for the Indian species says that “the colour in life is dark green, the nude streaks being bright green.” Hurzst’s figure shows the rostrum projecting strongly beyond the flanking lobes, which in the Scotia specimen as in the figures by DEsMargst, Mitne-Epwarps, and VERRILL nearly or quite equal the rostrum in length. Here also, as in VERRILL’S figure, several of the legs are cross-banded instead of being longitudinally striped. Locality.—St Vincent, Porto Grande, shore; December 1, 1902; Station 24. Family GECARCINIDA. 1837. “ Gecarciniens,” Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 19 1852. Gecarcinide, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii, p. 374. 1894. se Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. vii. p. 732. 268 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Genus Gecarcinus, Leach. 1814. Gecarcinus, Leach, Edinb, Encycl., vol. xvii. p. 430 (see also pp. 391, 435). 1825. 33 Desmarest, Consid. gén. Crust., p. 1138. 1835. Ocypoda, Freminville, Ann. Sci. Nat., sér. 2, vol. iii. p. 224. 1836 (2) Gecarcinus, Guérin, Icon. Régne Anim., “Crust.” pl. v. 1837. ie Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. u. p. 25. 1858. in Saussure, Crust. Meaxique-Antilles, p. 23. 1886. Geocarcinus, Miers, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xvil. part xlix. p. 217. 1893. Gecarcinus, Stebbing, History of Crustacea, Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. lxxiv. p. 79. 1894. 5s Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. vii. pp. 732, 740. 1895. - Bouvier, Bull. Nat. Hist. Mus. Parts, vol. i. p. 8. 1897. x, Rathbun, Ann. Inst. Jamaica, vol. i. No. 1, p. 24. 1901. _ Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. 11. p. 14. 1910. 3 Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviil. p. 812. In this genus of land crabs the small terminal joints of the endopod of the third maxillipeds, sometimes called the palp, are completely concealed in a ventral view by the large fourth joint, and the angle which this joint forms with the third leaves open a lozenge-shaped gap between the two members of this pair of maxillipeds. In 1837 Mitne-Epwarps distinguished three species based respectively on the Cancer ruricola of Linna&us and many other authors, the Ocypoda lateralis of FREMINVILLE, and an Australian form which he named G. lagostoma. His new species agreed with G. ruricola in having the fingers of the ambulatory limbs armed with six rows of spine-teeth instead of the four which characterise G. lateralis. Its carapace was said to be smaller than that of G. rwricola, which, however, is not the case. The colour is not mentioned, so that the only point of distinction was left dependent on the third maxillipeds, in which the merus or fourth joint is described as having a deep fissure on its internal edge above the following joimt, while in G. ruricola there is no notable fissure. Gecarcinus lagostoma, Milne-Edwards. 1837. Gecarcinus lagostoma, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 27. 1886. Geocarcinus lagostoma, Miers, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xvii. part xlix. p, 218, pl. xviii. figs. 2, 2a-c. 1893. 5 Benedict, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol xvi. p. 537. 1893, Gecaretnas lagostoma, Ortmann, Decap. und Soniieore Plankton-Exp., p. 58. 1894. 3 55 Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. vii. p. 740. 1900. 5 5 Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxii. p. 277. Two large female specimens of this species from Ascension Island were given to the Scotia collection by Mr Cuatmers. They fully equal in size the specimen from the Challenger Expedition figured by Mrurs, and surpass it in the massiveness of the chelipeds. My CHatmers also presented a much smaller female, matching in size and colouring a male specimen taken by the naturalists of the Scotia on June 1, 1904. These small specimens, after nearly nine years in preservative liquid, still have the larger part of the carapace dark purple with six light spots, one outside each eyelobe, the other two pairs at spaces converging towards the median groove. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 269 The colouring might easily suggest such names as the violet or purple crab, which have been applied to G. rwricola, and shows correspondence with the figure which GuERIN gives of G. lateralis. Miers says of the small specimen from Bermuda which he identifies with G. lagostoma, that in colour it nearly resembles specimens of G. lateralis, a species to which HEILPRIN and OrTMANN definitely assign it, only with the difference that OnrmMaNN regards G. lateralis as merely a young form of G. ruricola. The latter opinion is not accepted by Miss Rarupun, and does not appear to be tenable, if reliance can be placed on the number of spine-rows in the ambulatory fingers as having specific value. These rows are six in number in the small as well as in the large specimens of G. lagostoma. But in a specimen from Antigua, sent me by G. R. Forrest, Esq., which measures 58 mm. in breadth by a length of 45 mm., these rows are limited to four. The specimen has a very large left cheliped, with gaping fingers, and by the pleon and appendages is clearly an adult male. A third pair of carinz on the ambulatory fingers is at least indicated, though it is not spini- ferous. Also the fourth joint of the third maxillipeds has a fissure, though less in extent than that in G. lagostoma. On the whole, it is perhaps not surprising that authorities have varied in applying the names rwricola, lateralis, and lagostoma with others which are noted by Mirrs, ORTMANN, and RaTHBUN. The male specimen obtained by the Scotza has the pleon appendages wide apart, about reaching the end of the sixth segment, with a short subapical fringe directed outward. Breadth of carapace 43 mm., length 34 mm. Locality.—Ascension Island, 5 to 18 fathoms; Station 507. Family HyMENOSoMATID&. 1858. Hymenosonide, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. x. p. 108. 1905. Hymenosomatidx, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part iii. p. 49. 1906. Hymenosomide, W. H. Baker, Tr. R.S. South Australia, vol. xxx. p. 112. 1910. Hymenosomatide, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 331. As genera belonging to this family there have been named Hymenosoma, Desmarest, 1825; EHlamena, Milne-Edwards, 1837; Halicarcinus, White, 1846; Hymenicus, Dana, 1852. The specific names which have been distributed among these genera need to be revised by someone who can compare specimens from the several localities concerned. Genus Hymenosoma, Desmarest. 1825. Hymenosoma, Desmarest, Consid. gén. Crust., pp. xvii, 163. 1900. i Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 520, 523. 1905. 56 Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part iti. p. 49. 1907. 5 Stumpson, Smithson. Misc, Coll., vol. xlix. p. 144. 1910. ‘ Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 331. In 1900 I was inclined to agree with Professor HaSwEL.’s opinion that the separation of Halicarcinus from Hymenosoma rested “on extremely slight points of TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9). 38 270 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA distinction.” But at least in the typical species of each genus the third maxillipeds are very unlike, the third and fourth joints being about twice as long as broad in Hymenosoma orbicularis, whereas the length and breadth are. subequal in Hali- carcinus planatus ; besides that the details of shape are not the same. A further dissimilarity concerns the fingers of the walking-legs, which in H. orbicularis have the inner margin of the fingers smooth, but clothed almost to the tip with two dense rows of long plumose setz inserted on either side. In H. planatus these fingers have the inner margin fringed with spine-teeth alternating with sete of very moderate length. In the figures and description which Mr W. H. Baker supplies in 1906 for Hymenosoma rostratus, Haswell, he represents a maxilliped agreeing with that of H. planatus, and says that the dactyli of the ambulatory legs “are slightly curved and carry a series of small teeth of about equal size with hairs between.” Thus the species seems unsuitable for union with Hymenosoma. Professor CHILTON in 1907 decides that Hymenosoma depressus, Jacquinot, belongs to the genus in which Jacquinot placed it, and though Jaceurnor’s figure of the external maxilliped is obviously untrustworthy, the limbs in Curiron’s specimen had the other mark of the genus in “the fact that the terminal joints of the last four pairs of legs were fringed with hairs and looked as if they were used as swimming organs.” Hymenosoma orbicularis, Desmarest. Plate XXVa. 1825. Hymenosoma orbiculare, Desmarest, Consid. gén. Crust., p. 163, pl. xxvi. figs. 1, la-e. 1837. 3 Pe Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. 11. p. 36. 1838. (?) 53 : Milne-Edwards, Réegne anim., illustr., pl. xxxv. figs. 1, la. 1858. Hymenosoma geometricum, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Philad., p. 108 (54). 1904. Hymenosoma orbiculare, Doflein, Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. vi. p. 88. 1905. Hymenosoma geometricum, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., ‘S.A. Crust.,” part ili. p. 50. 1907. Hymenosoma geometriewm and Hymenosoma orbiculare, Stimpson, Smithson. Misc. Coll., vol. xlix. p. 144. 1910. Hymenosoma orbiculare and Hymenosoma geometricum, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. pp. 331, 332. 1913. Hymenosoma orbiculare, var. geometricum, Balss, Schultze, Forschungsreise in Stid Afrika, vol. v. part ii. p. 113 (64). It may seem presumptuous to cancel Strmpson’s species, but it was founded on a single small specimen, and his remark that the “‘ feet are sparsely provided with fine, inconspicuous hairs,” may have been due to a quite accidental condition. DESMAREST gives no indication of the fringe of short setee with which the broad end of the female pleon is beset. His figure of the external maxillipeds shows the third joint much smaller than the fourth, but this misleading error is corrected by MILNE- Epwarbs in the illustrated edition of the Régne animal. In the chelipeds of this species the hand is much more swollen in the male than in the female, and the movable finger of the male has a tooth on the inner margin which appears to vary OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 271 considerably in its expansion and denticulation. Among the specimens obtained by the Scotia the largest, a male taken on the shore, Houtjes Bay, May 19, 1904, has a carapace 20 mm. long by 15 mm. broad; the next largest, a female, has the cara- pace 19 mm. in length, including the rostrum as in the other imstance, with a breadth of 15 mm. at the widest part of the granulated rim; but, in both examples, if the bulging lateral parts are included, the apparent breadth becomes at least equal to the length, in good accord with the specific name orbicularis. The short narrow pleon of the male is in striking contrast to the greatly expanded pleon of the female. Localities.—Entrance to Saldanha Bay, depth 25 fathoms, May 21, 1914; Station 483. Within Saldanha Bay on May 19, on the shore, and in depths of 5 and 8 to 10 fathoms, and the largest female specimen on May 20; Station 482. Genus Halicarcinus, White. 1846. Halicarcinus, White, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 1, vol. xviii. p. 178. 1900. - Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 521. 1907. 69 Stimpson, Smithson. Misc, Coll., vol. xlix. p. 140. Further references to the genus will be deducible from the synonymy of the following: species :— Halicarcinus planatus (Fabricius). 1775. Cancer planatus, Fabricius, Syst. Hnt., p. 403. 4 1846. Halicarcinus planatus, White, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 1, vol. xviii. p. 178, pl. ii. fig. 1. 1891, 5 7 Mocquard, A. Milne-Edwards, Miss. Cap Horn, ‘“‘Crust.,” p. 27. 1893. 3 a Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. vii. p. 31. 1900. ‘ is Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 524, pl. xxxvi.B. 1902. < ¥ Hodgson, “‘ Southern Cross” Eap., p. 231. 1903. 5 Ortmann, Princeton Exp, Patagonia, vol. iii. p. 660. 1904, = Pe Doflein, Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. vi. p. 87. 1905. 5 3 Lagerberg, Schwed. Stidpol. Hxp., vol. v. part vii. p. 25. 1909. ’ , Chilton, Subantarctic Is. N. Zealand, p. 609. 1910. <5 ms Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviii. p. 570. Numerous specimens were obtained by the Scotia at the Falkland Islands, in January 1903, in Port Stanley Harbour and in shore pools at Cape Pembroke, and again on January 31, 1904, on the shore at Port William. In this last gathering, as in the earlier one from shore pools, the male specimens were distinguished by the con- siderable size of the chelipeds. A single specimen is labelled November 1903, Macdougal Bay, South Orkneys. Tribe OXYSTOMATA. 1841, Oxystomata, de Haan, Crust. Japonica, decas 5, p. 111. Family CaLaPPID&. 1851. Calappide, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol, xiii. pp. 390, 393. 272 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Genus Mursia, Desmarest. 1825. Mursia, Desmarest, Consid, gén. Crust., p. 108. 1900. ,», Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part i. p. 21 (with synonymy). 1904. » Doflein, Deutsch. Tiefsee-Hxp., vol. vi. p. 36. 1906. » Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903, part iii. pp. 887-8. 190E: » Rathbun, Zr. Linn, Soc. London, vol. xiv. part ii. p. 198. DoFLEIN discusses the various species that had been assigned to the genus down to 1904. Mursia cristimanus, de Haan. 1837. Mursia cristimanus, de Haan, Crust. Japonica, decas 3, p. 70. 1839. Mursia cristimana, de Haan, Crust. Japonica, decas 4, p. 73, pl. E (mouth-organs), 1900. Mursia cristimanus, Stebbing, S.A. Crust., part i. p. 22 (with synonymy). 1904. Mursia cristimana, Doflein, Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. vi. p. 38, pl. xvi. fig, 5-12, pl. xviii. fig. 1. To distinguish this species from M. armatus, de Haan, and its varieties or near allies, DoFLEIN relies especially on three characters: the front of the carapace produced to a sharp central tooth; the hind margin smooth, without teeth, only slightly undulating and carrying a fine row of granules; and thirdly, the under margin of the chelee beset with coarse teeth, not exceeding eight or nine in number. With these characters the Scotea specimen agrees. For determining the correct specific name the synonymy given by Dr Dortern introduces some perplexity. He cites M. cristimana, Latreille, from CUvVIER, Regne animal, ed. 2, p. 39, 1829, but the name cristimana does not occur in that work, so far as I can find, either on p. 39 of vol. iv. or elsewhere. On the other hand, DorLEIN supplies a reference which I omitted in 1900, namely, Mursia cristata, Milne-Edwards, in Atlas zu Cuvier, Regne animal, ed. 3, Taf. xi. fig. 1 and 1a, to which he attaches the date 1836. If that date can be depended on, the name of the species should be cristatus instead of cristimanus, since the latter is not earlier than 1837, so far as known. It is true that in 1837 Mitnz-Epwarps gives a reference to pl. xii. of the 3rd edition of the Regne animal, but it does not follow that the undated plate had been published a year earlier, so that pp Haan’s cristimanus may still hold its ground, till proof is forthcoming of the true date of publication for pl. xii. in the 3rd edition of the Régne animal (see additional note, p. 307). Locality.—Off Dassen Island, South Africa, from depth of 35 fathoms, May 18, 1904; Station 480. Brachyura anomala. 1893. Brachyura anomala (part), Stebbing, Hist, Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. Ixxiv. p. 133. 1899. Ni er Alcock, Deep-Sea Brachyura Investigator, p. 6. 1910. 7 ss Stebbing, Ann. S.A. Mus., vol. vi. p. 341. Family Dromirp ®. 1899. Dromiide, Alcock, Journ, A.S. Bengal, vol. Ixviii. pp, 128, 135. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 273 Genus Dromia, J. C. Fabricius. 1798. Dromia, J. C. Fabricius, Suppl. Ent, Syst., p. 359. Dromia dormaa (Linn.). 1763. Cancer dormia, Linu., Amoen. Acad., vol. vi. p. 413. 1910. Dromia dormia, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. p. 342. A large specimen of what I suppose to be this species was obtained by the Scotea in lat. 48° 06’ S., long. 10° 05’ W., the depth reached by the trawl being 1742 fathoms, at Station 451, May 13, 1904. Some small specimens, taken on the shore, Houtjes Bay, Saldanha Bay, belong to this family, but their position in it remains for the present indeterminate. Genus Pseudodromia, Stimpson. 1858, Pseudodromia, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. x. p. 226 (64). Pseudodroma latens, Stimpson. 1858. Pseudodromia latens, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. x. pp. 226, 240. 1910. % » Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 340 (with references). Locality.—Saldanha Bay, South Africa, from 5 fathoms, May 20, 1904; Station 482. Family LaTREILLIDz. 1899, Latreillide, Alcock, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxviii. part ii. pp. 130, 165. 1902. Latreillizde, Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part i. p. 23. Genus Latreillia, Roux. 1828. Latredlia, Roux, Crust. Méditerranée, part v. pl. xxii. 1894. Latreillea, A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, fasc. vii. p. 59. Latreillia elegans, Roux. 1828. Latreillia elegans, Roux, Crust. Méditerranée, pl. xxii. 1902. - » Stebbing, S.A. Crust., part ii. p. 24 (with synonyms). The small specimens obtained by the Scotia indicate that the relations of length between the fingers and palm of the chelipeds are variable. The feathering of the penultimate joint of the fifth pereeopod is well shown. It is highly desirable that specimens of this remarkable organism should be preserved separately, if possible, when first captured, as otherwise they shed their limbs with vexatious freedom, the sharp prickles on the long, stiffly geniculating joints tending to hopeless entangle- ment with extraneous objects. Locality.—Off Pyramid Point, Ascension, from a depth of 45 fathoms, June 10, 1904; Station 507. 274 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA MACRURA. Macrura anomala. 1893. Macrura anomala, Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. xxiv. p. 147. 1901. A; 5 Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Crustacea, p. 204. 1908. Heteromacrura, Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Sci., vol. xiii. p. 433. 1910. Macrura anomala, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part. iv. p. 349. (From this reference other references may be traced.) Tribe PAGURIDEA. 1901. Paguridea, Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Crust., p. 205. 1905. - Aleock, Catal. Indian Decap. Crust., part ii. p. 1. Family Lirnopipé. 1853. Lithodidx, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 14380. 1900. iS Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 530. 130m - Aleock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Crust., p. 231. Genus Inthodes, Latreille. 1806. Lithodes, Latreille, Gen. Crust. et Insect., vol. i. p. 39. 1905. 53 Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., ‘S.A. Crust.,” part iil. p. 69. 1913. . Balss, Abhandl. K. Bayer. Ak. Wiss., suppl., vol. ii, part ix. p. 73. Inthodes antarcticus, Jacquinot. 1843-1847. Lithodes antarctica, Jacquinot, Voy. Péle Sud, Atlas, pl. vii., pl. vill. figs. 9-14. 1847. Lithodes antarcticus, White, Crust. Brit. Mus., p. 56. 1849. Lithodes antarctica, Nicolet, Gay’s Hist. Chile, ‘‘ Zool.,” vol. ii. p. 182. 1852. . fh Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 427, pl. xxvi. fig. 15. 1853. a - Lucas, Voy. Péle Sud, ‘‘Zool.,” vol. iii. p. 90. 1891. + A. Milne-Edwards, Mission Gap Horn, “ Crust.,” p. 24. 1905. Taine antarcticus, Lagerberg, Schwed. Siidpol. Exp., vol. v. part vil. p. 12 (giving many other important references). 1910, Lithodes antarctica, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxvili. p. 595. NIcoLer says that the vernacular name of this fine crustacean is Centolla, that it is much appreciated as food, not only by human beings, but also by seals, which carry the creatures ashore and dash them against the rocks to get at the meat without being inconvenienced by the strong spines of the carapace. The dried carapace, he says, is hung up by the peasants in their cottages to act as a barometer, by its reddening for fine weather and becoming pale for approaching rain. He gives the length as 7# inches, with a stretch of the limbs reaching 29¢ inches. Dana says: “Specimens are often 5 inches long, with a breadth of 44 inches, the longest legs being 94 inches long. The exuvia of one, procured by us, was 8 inches in length, with the longest legs 15 inches in length.” According to MiktovHo-Mactay (quoted by LacEerBera), at the Isle of Chiloe this crustacean is known as Barometro Araucano, because “the ordinary colour of the shell OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 275 during dry weather is light grey, which as soon as the air gets damp becomes gradually covered with spots of a dark (reddish) tint. The increase of humidity in the atmosphere makes the spots larger, so that the shell is at last quite of a dark (reddish) colour.” If this and Nicotet’s contrary account are both true, one can only infer that weather forecasts in those regions are as little to be trusted as in our own climate. The specimen obtained by the Scotea had the characteristic rostrum distally upturned, with two pairs of lateral teeth; between these there is a small central tooth ; the peduncles of the eyes are denticulate, and a large tooth on the outer side of each orbit projects a little beyond the eye; the pleon is practically symmetrical, without appendages, but with a medio-ventral process as shown in Jacquinor’s fig. 12. Length of carapace, including the rostrum, 49 mm., greatest breadth 44 mm. ; length of fourth pereeopods 110 mm. ; of the third not shorter. Locality.—Station 346. Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’ 8., long. 57° 32’ W.; depth 56 fathoms; December 1, 1903. Together with the above was taken a small pellucid specimen, unfortunately with rostrum broken off, measuring 18 mm. in breadth of carapace, by a length of 22 mm., allowing for the lost rostrum. As with the larger specimen, the pleon of this juvenile indicated that it was of the male sex. ’ Genus Paralomis, White. 1856. Paralomis, White, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xxiv. p. 134. 1900. Re Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 531. 1908. as Hansen, Ingolf-Exp., ‘‘ Crust. Malac.,” vol. ili. part 11. pp. 22, 24. 1913. sp Balss, Abhandl. K. Bayer. Ak. Wiss., suppl., vol. ii. part ix. p. 76. The validity of this generic name has been questioned by BENnepict, who in 1894 regarded it as a synonym of Hchinocerus, White, 1848. In 1847, in the List of Crustacea in the British Museum, WuitE named without defining a genus Kehidnocerus, with a species E. cobarius. In the following year, in the Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 47, pls. ii., iii., he described and figured the form in question as a new species and subgenus, giving the first name as Hchinocerus in the text, but as Echidnocerus on the plates. It may perhaps be assumed that Echinocerus was a misprint. However that may be, Benepicr adopted it for Jacqurnor’s Magellanic species, and instituted a new genus Leptolithodes for HENDERSon’s Para- lonis aculeatus, 1888, and several others. Subsequent opinion, however, has made Leptolithodes, and not Echidnocerus, a synonym of Paraloms. But that some of these generic divisions are not very easy to follow may be inferred from the remarks which Hansen makes in 1908 when describing a new species, Paralomis bower. After stating that “the marginal plates on the third abdominal segment are quite free in the male, but quite fused with the lateral plates in the female,” he adds, ‘ ‘as this feature in the marginal plates of the third segment is generally considered 276 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA an important generic character, the male should be referred to Acantholithus, Stimps., the female to Paraloms. Ihave preferred to place the species with the latter, as it shows some resemblance to P. aculeatus, Hend.” Paralomis granulosus (Jacquinot). 1843-1847. Lithodes granulosa, Jacquinot, Voy. Péle Sud, Atlas, pl. viii. figs. 15-21. 1856. Paralomis granulosa, White, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xxiv. p. 134. 1900. a a Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 532. 1903. 5 3 Ortmann, Princeton Exp. Patagonia, vol. iil. p, 658. 1905. 5 ge Lagerberg, Schwed. Siidpol. Exp., vol. v. part vii. p. 14. The Scotia specimens of this tolerably abundant species are small, the carapace of the larger, a female, being 36 mm., of the smaller only 23 mm., in length and breadth. The variations which develop in specimens of different sizes are discussed by LaGERBERG, who had at his disposal six specimens, the smallest measuring 17 mm. by 17°5 mm., while the largest, a male, had a carapace 90 mm. long and 95 mm. broad. He figures the last four joints of the right male chela as measuring 133 mm. in length and displaying very conspicuous teeth on the wrist. In the Scotia female specimen these teeth are very prominent but less irregular. LaGEr- BERG records 100 m. as the greatest hitherto known depth for the occurrence of this species, which is practically in agreement with the Scotia record. Locality.—Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W.; depth 56 fathoms or 102 m.; December 1, 1903; Station 346. Family Pacurip. 1852. Paguridx, Dana, U.S. Expl. Hap., vol. xiii. p. 435. Pagurus arrosor (Herbst). 1908. Pagurus arrosor, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part i. p. 22. Under the above reference I have discussed the synonymy and interesting ornamentation of this species. Locality.—A characteristic specimen, in a shell of the genus Triton, was obtained by the Scotia from coaling jetty, No. 1, Cape Town docks, May 14,1904; Station 477. Pagurus calidus, Risso. 1826. Pagurus calidus, Risso, His. Nat. Eur, Mérid., vol. v. p. 29. 1888. * 5 Henderson, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxvii. part xix, p. 57. 1905. " B Alcock, Indian Decap. Crust., part ii. fasc. i. p. 170 (ample synonymy). This handsomely coloured species is strikingly like in form to P. arrosor, as observed both by Mitns-Epwarps and Heuer, but in place of the scale-like mark- ings on the first three pairs of pereeopods, here there are quantities of pointed tubercles interspersed with fascicles of hairs. Locality.—F rom Station 507, Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, the Scotia obtained two specimens, each in a shell of the genus Strombus. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 277 Genus Hupagurus, Brandt. 1851. Hupagurus, Brandt, Middendorff’s Sibirische Reise, ‘‘ Zool.,” part i. p. 105. 1900. *5 Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 534. 1905. M Alcock, Indian Decap. Crust., part ii. fase. 1. p. 122. Eupagurus forceps, Milne-Edwards. Plate XXVIb. 1836. Pagurus forceps, Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 2, ‘‘Zool.,” vol. vi. p. 272, pl. xiii. fig. 5. 1837. ‘5 = Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 221. 1847. Pagurus comptus, White, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 122. 1849. Pagurus forceps, Nicolet, in Gay’s Hist. Chile, *‘ Zool.,” vol. iii. p. 189. 1849. Pagurus gayi, Nicolet, in Gay’s Hist. Chile, ‘‘ Zool.,” vol. ili. p. 190, pl. 1. fig. 6. 1858. Hupagurus comptus, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Philad., p. 237 (75). 1891. - a Mocquard, in A. Milne-Edwards’ Mission du Cap Horn, ‘‘ Crust.,” p. 29. 1900. i 5 Stebbing, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 535. 1905. Hupagurus forceps, Lagerberg, Schwed. Stidpol.-Exp., vol. v. part vii. p. 2, pl. i. figs. 1-3. 1910. Pagurus forceps, P. comptus, P. gayi, Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviii. p. 598. LAGERBERG gives reasons for identifying EL. comptus and its varieties with the earlier H. forceps (Milne-Edwards). Nuicoter says that his EH. gayr is taken along with H. forceps on the coasts of Chile, and has the greatest affinity with it, but differs by the want of spines on the inner feet and the form of the left cheliped, the fingers of which are much more robust. Miss Ratusun, in a List of Species occurring From Panama to the Island of Chiloé, gives all the above-mentioned three specific names separately, but without discussion of their validity. One of the Scotia speci- mens agrees so closely with Nicouet’s figure of #. gayi in colouring, size, and features that there can be no doubt of its belonging to the species so named by NIcoLer, but the characters on which he relies do not seem to warrant its separation from E. forceps. Locality.—Port Stanley, Falkland Islands, January 20, 1903; depth 2 fathoms ; Station 118. Eupagurus modicellus, n. sp. Plate XXVIp. Among the numerous species of this genus I have not been able to find one with the combination of characters presented by this little form. The front of the carapace has a very blunt median projection and the lateral angles not produced. The eye peduncles are long, longer than the front. The second antenne have a slender acicle, not denticulate, and a long flagellum, strikingly setose, with some of the setze standing out very conspicuously. The endopod of the first maxilla is without a flagellum, and all the three pairs of maxillipeds have the exopod flagellate. In the third joint of the third maxillipeds the inner margin is finely denticulate, with two of the teeth larger than the rest. The right cheliped is much the larger. On the inner surface of the hand an elevation extends from the base of the finger transversely to the base of the wrist, and another from the tip of the thumb curves gently to meet TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9). 39 278 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA the first at about one-third of its course from the base of the finger, which also on its inner side is traversed from tip to base by a curved elevation. On the outer side the hand shows a broad, slightly convex surface, bounded by sharp edges, the wrist and hand being denticulate on the border which is continuous with the finely serrate, strongly curved outer margin of the stout finger. The left chela has slender fingers seemingly longer than the palm. The second and third perzeopods have setze on one margin and fine spines on the other of the seventh joint, which ends in a pellucid nail. The fourth pereeopods are feebly subchelate, the fifth minutely chelate. The pleopods are pellucid, very unequally biramose. The telson is unsymmetrical, each lobe edged with small spinules. The carapace measured 2°5 mm. The specific name alludes to the extremely modest dimensions of the new species. Locality.—Pyramid Point, Ascension Island; depth 40 fathoms; Station 507 ; June 10, 1904. Genus Calcinus, Dana. 1852. Calcinus, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. pp. 435, 456. 1905. - Aleock, Indian Decap. Crust., part ii. fase. 1. p. 51. 1918. . Arata Terao, Annot. Zool. Japonenses, vol. viii. part li. p. 357. In this genus the eye-stalks are long and slender, the left cheliped much larger than the right, the fourth pereopod subchelate, the fifth chelate, the pleopods biramose, attached to the pleon on the left side of the second to the fifth segments in both sexes, the uropods much larger on the left than on the right side. Judging by the species represented in the Scotza collection, the first maxillipeds are slight in structure, but the second and third pairs of remarkable strength, especi- ally in regard to the exopod, the trunk of which in both pairs far exceeds the endopod in breadth, and in the second pair reaches far beyond the endopod’s fourth joint. In the third pair it does not much exceed that joint, but its basal half is much broader than the corresponding part in the second pair ; in both the first joint of the flagellum is much broader than the following joints, which are armed with the usual setee. In the second maxillipeds the third joint of the endopod is much shorter than the fourth, but only a little shorter in the third pair. In both pairs the terminal three joints are abundantly furnished with setiform spines, very long and crowded in the third pair, where this group of joints exceeds in length that of the third and fourth joints combined. Calcinus talismani, A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier. Plate XXVIa. 1892. Calcinus talismani, A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., ser. 7, vol. xiii. p. 225. 1900. 7 As A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier, Crust. Decap. “‘ Travailleur” and “ Talisman,” p. 173, pl. xxiii. figs, 15-18. 1905. ae re Alcock, Indian Decap. Crust., part ii. fase. i. p. 164. The Scotia specimens agree well with the description and figures given by the eminent French authors, except that in one place, by an obvious slip of the pen, they OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 279 speak of the right cheliped as being the larger, and in the illustrations the two chelipeds can scarcely be drawn to a uniform scale, since otherwise they would be far from representing the relative proportions. At least in the Scotva examples the chelipeds answer to ALcocK’s generic definition, “the left being vastly the larger.” The beautiful colouring is unfortunately no longer available in our specimens to assist identification. That the ungues are black in the ambulatory legs may be common to many species. The slight curvature and basal widening of the long eye- stalks may be worthy of mention, and the bareness of the flagellum of the second antenne. ‘The length of about an inch corresponds with that assigned to the speci- mens obtained at St Vincent. by the French expedition. Locality.—Porto Grande, shore, St Vincent ; Station 24. Tribe GALATHEIDEA. 1888. Galatheidea, Henderson, Rep. Voy. ‘“‘ Challenger,” vol. xxvii. p. 103. 1913. i Doflein and Balss, Hrgebn. Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. xx. part ii. p. 131. Family GALATHEID#. 1853. Galatheidx, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 1431. 1910. x Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p, 362. 1913. a Doflein and Balss, Ergebn. Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. xx. part ill. p. 131. Genus Munida, Leach. 1820. Munida, Leach, Dict. Sci. Nat., vol. xxviii. p. 52. 1891. rs Mocquard, in A. Milne-Edwards’ Miss. Cap Horn, ‘“Crust.,” p. 32. 1899. 5 G. M. Thomson, Tr. N. Zealand Inst., vol. xxxi. p. 194. 1905. Lagerberg, Schwed. Siidpol.-Exp., vol. v. part vii. p. 6. 1908. "p Verrill, Tr. Connect. Ac. Sci., vol. xiii. p. 435. f 1909. - Chilton, Subantarct. Islands of N. Zealand, part xxvi. p. 612. 1910. i Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxviii. pp. 559, 601. OTL: 38 Ortmann, Princeton Univ. Patagonian Exp., part vi. p. 659. 1913. 7" Doflein and Balss, Hrgebn. Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., vol. xx, part ili. p. 141. Mumda subrugosus (White). 1847. Galathea subrugosa, White, List of Crust. in Brit. Mus., p. 66 (without description). 1852. yp 5 White, Voy. of “ Erebus” and “Terror,” pl. iii. fig. 2 (quoted by Dana in 1852). 1852. Munida subrugosat, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 479, pl. xxx. fig. 7, a, 0, ¢. 1885. i; _ Filhol, Mission de Vile Campbell, “ Zool.,” p. 425. 1902. i, e Hodgson, “ Southern Cross,” Nat. Hist., p. 232. The above selection of references will enable the student to trace the unending or at any rate unended controversy which seeks to determine whether Grimothea gre- garius (Fabricius) and Munida subrugosus (White) are one and the same or two distinct species. FitHot, Mocquarp, LacGEerRBERG, with abundant material, affirm that alike in old and young specimens the notably expanded last three joints of the external maxillipeds distinguish M. gregarius from M. subrugosus, and ORTMANN in 1911, Batss in 1913, agree with them. Additional distinctions are based on the 280 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA shape of the carapace and on its rostral and antero-lateral spines, which in the subrugosus form are more elongate than in gregarius. Dr Curiton, however, in 1909, is still unconvinced, and propounds the theory that “the foliaceous maxillipeds of Grimothea gregaria are associated with its pelagic habit,’ and that when it finds a deeper dwelling-place successive moults enable it to assume shorter, less foliaceous, and more infolded terminal joints to its external maxillipeds. He considers Girimothea novezelandix, Filhol, also a synonym of M. subrugosus. Making up for this loss to the genus, Miss RatHBun in 1910 determines that Grimotea gregaria, Guérin, 1830-1831, is not the G. gregaria (Fabricius), but a distinct species, Munida cokern, noticed by DoFLEIN and Batss as M. cocker. The Scotia obtained the cast skin of a large specimen, with well-pronounced rostral and antero-lateral spines, which I am satisfied to call M. subrugosus. Locality.—Port William, Falkland Islands, January 1903; depth 6 fathoms; Station 118. Munida gregarius (Fabricius). 1793. Galathea gregaria, Fabricius, Ent. Syst., vol. ii. p. 473. 1820. Grimothea gregaria, Leach, Dict. Sct, Nat., vol. xviii. p. 50 (A. Milne-Fdwards). 1891. Munida gregaria, Mocquard, in A. Milne-Edwards’ Miss. Cap Horn, ‘Crust.,” p. 32, pl. ii. figs. 1, la-c. Without venturing a decisive opinion on the controversy above considered, I can affirm that several little specimens obtained by the Scotia belong to the juvenile form described and figured by Mocqguarp as Munida gregaria (Fabricius). The fourth joint of the third maxillipeds is not apically produced, and the two following joints are distally dilated. Locality.—Stanley Harbour, Falkland Islands, surface ; Station 118. Tribe HIPPIDEA. 1849. Hippidea, de Haan, Crust. Japon., decas 7, pp. 200 and xxii. 1904. % Borradaile, Fauna Maldive, vol. ii. part iii. p. 750. 1910. . Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 365. Family ALBUNEID A. 1858. Albunidx, Stimpson, Pr, Ac. Philad., p. 230 (68). 1878. Albuneidz, Miers, J. Linn. Soc, London, vol. xiv., No. 76, p. 326. 1893. A Stebbing, Hist. Crust., p. 152. 1907. * Nobili, Ann. Set. Nat., “Zool.,” ser. 9, vol. iv. p. 142 Genus Albunea, Fabricius. 1798. Albunea, Fabricius, Suppl. Ent. Syst., pp. 372, 397. 1837. is Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 202. 1858. Albunzxa, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Philad., p. 230 (68). 1878. Albunea, Miers, J. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv., No. 76, p. 326. 1893. + Henderson, 7’r. Linn, Soc. London, vol. v. part. x. p. 409. 1907. 5 Nobili, Ann. Sci, Nat., “ Zool.,” ser. 9, vol. iv. p. 142. | OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 281 Albunea guerinir, Lucas. 1758. (2) Cancer carabus, Linn., Syst. Nat, ed. 10, vol. i. p. 632 (reprint). 1849. Albunea symnistu, Lucas, Expl. Algérie, “ Crust.,” p. 27, pl. ili. figs. 2, 2a. 1853. Albunea guerinii, Lucas, Rev. et Mag. Zool., sér. 2, vol. v. pp. 45-47, pl. 1. figs. 9, 9a, 4, 6, c. 1858. Albunza guerini, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Philad., p. 230 (68). 1878. Albunea guerinii, Miers, J. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xiv., No. 76, p. 327. In regard to this handsome species, Miers says: “It is possible that this is the species described by Linnaus (Syst. Nat., p. 1052) from the Mediterranean, under the name of Cancer carabus.” Considering the locality and the unusually full description which Lrnnaus had given in the earlier edition of his Systema, it seems even highly probable that his C. carabus is the species with which we are here concerned. That the flattened eye-stalks, tapering to little black dots, should have been mistaken for movable parts of a divided rostrum, is not so very surprising for times when observers trusted much to unaided eyesight. From the typical species of the genus A. symmysta (Linn.), 1758, the present is distinguished by the terminal joint of the third perzeopods, which is without the narrow linear lobe conspicuous in the type. This deficiency, however, it shares with A. microps, Miers, and A. thur- stont, Henderson, from the Hast Indies. The Scotia specimen has a very small rostral tooth in the central concavity of the frontal margin; there are eight very distinct teeth on either side of this margin, the outermost four being the largest, and the one next the eyes being larger than the intermediate three. A strong spine projects over the front border of the pterygostomian region, and a smaller one arms the basal joint of the outer antenne. The three terminal joints of the third maxilli- peds are ventrally and laterally carinate. The oval telson is dorsally grooved down the centre nearly to the end, the apex being drawn out subacutely. Length of cara- pace at centre 17 mm., at longest part 23 mm.; breadth 23 mm.; first antenne 48 mm. long ; telson 7 mm. long by slightly over 4 mm. broad. Locality. James Bay, St Helena, June 2, 1904; Station 499. Lucas in his fig. 9, 1853, shows a frontal margin with three little teeth near the eye, and outside of these six larger ones, stating in his text that the teeth are “ ordi- nairement au nombre de neuf,” in contrast to A. symmysta, in which they vary between eleven and fourteen. The figure of a finger is marked 90, and likewise the figure of two pleon-segments with the uropods. Macrura genuina. Tribe SCYLLARIDEA. 1893. Scyllaridea, Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol, xxiv. p. 191. Family ScyLLARIDA. Genus Scyllarides, Gill. 1898. Scyllarides, Gill, Science, new ser., vol, vil. p. 98. 282 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Scyllarides elisabethe (Ortmann). 1897. Scyllarus elisabethe, Ortmann, Zool. Juhrb., vol. x. p. 270. 1908. Scyllarides elisabethe, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part i. p. 30, pl. xxx. Locality. —Off St Helena harbour, between 45 and 55 fathoms; June 2, 1904. Family PAaLInurIp&. 1888. Palinuride, Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 74. Genus Jasus, Parker. 1883. Jasus, Parker, Nature, vol. xxix. p. 190. Jasus lalandia (Milne-Edwards). 1837. Palinurus lalandii, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. i. p. 293. 1884. Jasus lalandii, Parker, Tr, New Zeal. Inst. for 1888, p. 304. LOLOL 5 a Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 374. 1913. Palinurus (Jasus) lalandit, Gilchrist, J. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xxxii. No. 216, p. 225, plate. The Scotca obtained this abundant species at the entrance to Saldanha Bay, depth 25 fathoms. Dr GitcHrist has recently given an interesting description and figure of a larval stage, for which he coins the new term “ naupliosoma.” Tribe PEN AIDEA. 1888, Penxidea, Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 219. Family Penz1p&. 1881. Penxidx, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 171, 173. 1888. * Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol, xxiv. p. 220. During the present century many important contributions have been made to our knowledge of this family, especially by Atcocx, Bouvier, Kemp, and pe May. Genus Gennadas, Bate. 1881. Gennadas, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 171, 191. 1888. Fe Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 229, 339. 1895. ap Faxou, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol, xviii. pp. 204, 207. 1901. i Aleock, Indian Deep-Sea Macrura, p. 45. 1904, 7 Rathbun, Harriman-Euap., ‘‘ Decap. Crust.,” p. 147. 1906. Fs Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903, part iii. p. 907. 1906. = Bouvier, Bull. Mus. Océan. Monaco, No. 80, p. 1. 1908. * Bouvier, Camp. Sci. Monaco, vol. xxxiii. p. 24. 1909. A Kemp, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 718. 1910. A (as distinct fron. Amalopenexus), Kemp, Fisheries, Ireland, 1908, p. 13. HOME = de Man, “ Stboga” Hap., vol. xxxixa. pp. 5, 15. 1913. <, de Man, “ Siboga” Exp., vol. xxxixA., pls. 1., U. In 1911 DE Man enumerates fifteen named and two unnamed species assigned to this genus, with their distribution. He also thinks it probable that the species from the Bay of Bengal, referred by Atcock to G. parvus, Bate, is distinct from that OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 283 species. The list comprises two species originally described by 8. I. Smiru as Amalo- penzus elegans (1882) and A. valens (1884), and a third which Smirx described, also in 1884, as Benthesicymus ? carinatus. In this genus the male petasma or “andricum,” where, as in many cases, it has been carefully figured, appears to be very serviceable for specific distinction. Gennadas kemp, n. sp. Plate XXVII. In spite of its mutilated condition, the specimen here described seems properly separable from other known species. It makes a near approach to G. elegans in the outlines of the carapace, in the proportions of the third pereeopod, and in having only one pair of spines at apex of the strongly sulcate telson. But there are several differences. The second joint of the first antennz is not shorter than the third. The scale of the second antenne is produced well beyond the little lateral tooth. The curved spines behind the narrow apical process of the endopod in the second maxilla are four in number, two much more curved than the others. In the first maxilliped the exopod is shorter instead of longer than the endopod. The petasma is nearer to that of G. calmam, Kemp, than any other that has been figured, but is more truncate; the inner opposed margins are straight, lined with a multitude of little coupling hooks. The first pleon segment is ventrally produced to a sharp point, and in G. calmanz it is said to carry “a very strong, sharply pointed spine,” which may mean the same thing. The apex of the telson is truncate, not rounded, with five plumose setz between the single pair of spines, as in G. bowverr, Kemp. G. calmani has (whether invariably or not is uncertain) eleven sete between two pairs of spines, subject to the variation of a single pair. It agrees with our species in the four curved spines of the second maxilla, but differs in the longer exopod of the first maxilliped. Both species belong to the group which have the fourth joint of the third perzeopod longer than the fifth, and in both the fingers of the chela in that limb are subequal to the palm, but in G. calmani the chela is half as long as the fifth joint, whereas in the new species it is more than half as long. Other differ- ences between these closely connected species will be found in the two pairs of antenne. In the first pair G. calmani has the second joint not equal to the third, but “fully three-quarters the length” of it; in the second pair the scale is scarcely at all produced beyond the lateral tooth. Through the condition of the respective specimens many features are not available for comparison. As described and figured by Bate for his G. parvus, the second pleopods have at the apex of the peduncle on the inner side two membranous leaf-like appendages. In Barr's figure these show setules on the outer margin distally. In our species one of these is somewhat bean-shaped, without any armature; the other, lying between it and the endopod, is oval, having much of its inner and distal margin fringed with little, somewhat curved, spinules. One of the stations at which G. parvus was obtained by the 284 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Challenger was in lat. 37° 49’ N., long. 166° 37’ W., mid ocean, North Pacific, trawled from the reputed depth of 3050 fathoms, which, as will be seen, exceeds that assigned to the Scotia species, here named out of respect to Mr StanitEy Kemp. Locality —Lat. 39° 48’ S., long. 2° 33’ E., trawl 2772 fathoms; Station 468. A fragment of another Gennadas was taken at Station 450, lat. 48° S., 9° 50’ W., in company with Petalidium foliaceus. It belongs not improbably to Gennadas parvus, Bate. Family LEvciFrERIDz. 1837. “ Leucifériens,” Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. pp. 451, 467. 1852. Sergestidex, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 601; “ Luciferidex,” pp. 636, 668. 1905. a Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Marine Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part iii. p. 80. Under the last reference an extended notice is supplied of the bibliography of this family, in which the primary genus bore the preoccupied name Lucifer, changed to Leucifer by Mitne-Epwarps. Genus Petalidium, Bate. 1881. Petalidium, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 172, 194. 1888. 5 Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 348. 1896. 5 H. J. Hansen, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 936. 1903. “5 H. J. Hansen, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 52. HANSEN accepts two species for this genus, P. foliaceus, Bate, and P. obesus (Kréyer), the former having no branchia above the fourth perzeopod, but the latter having at least a rudimentary one in that position. He considers that Petalidiwm is distinguished from Sergestes chiefly by the structure of the pleurobranchial plumes, feebly developed on the second maxilliped, most developed over the first and second perzeopods, but less so over the third maxilliped and third perzeopod. The pleuro- branchial plumes in Petalidiwm, he points out, have a much lower number of rows, a much lower number of plates in the rows, with the plates much larger, curved upwards, and looking much more independent than those in Sergestes. Petalidium foliaceus, Bate. Plate XXVIII. 1881. Petalidium foliaceum, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. viii. p, 194. 1888. BS rt Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 349, pl. lx. 1896. Fe i Hansen, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 936. 1903. 7 - Hansen, Pr. Zool. Soc. London, p. 52, pl. xi. fig. 1, a-g. Almost all the figures of this rare species had been drawn before I realised its identity with that partially described by Bare and Hansen. Attention may be called to the agreement in this plate with Hansen’s fig. la of the rostrum. Bats had already noticed the small tubercle adjoining the dark pigment of the eye. HANSEN notes as at least sometimes present another tubercle, exceedingly small, lower down, both being represented in his fig. 1d, and well seen in the Scotia speci- OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 285 men. Bare speaks of the first joint of the first antennee as furnished with a short, obtusely pointed stylocerite. Hansmn’s fig. 1b shows it, as I do, with a very small acute tooth near the middle of the outer margin. The mandibles are not in agree- ment with Bartr’s figure, except in regard to the penultimate joint of the palp, which is of substantial proportions, not slender, as the mandibular palp is generally said to be in species of Sergestes. The first and second maxille are not notably different from those in the last-named genus. In describing the first maxillipeds, Barr speaks of the third or outer branch as free from hairs, which is at any rate not always the case, though they might easily be missing by accident. The substantial character and strongly spinose armature of the second maxillipeds may be judged from the figure. The third, fourth, and fifth joints are subequal in length, while the sixth is rather longer than any one of them. The seventh joint is short, blunt, narrow at the base, widening towards the middle. In the first perzeopods the third and fifth joints are nearly equal in length, and similarly the much more elongate fourth and sixth, both which are strongly spined, the sixth faintly showing division into about fifteen jointlets. The fifth joint has on its inner margin four spines of very conspicuous length, and distally a group of short curved spines to antagonise with a similar group at the base of the sixth joint, as in the genus Sergestes. The fourth pereeopod is long and slender, the fifth slender and short. The Challenger specimens were all females or not fully adult. It is therefore of interest now to have one with the petasma of the male uninjured. Its complicated structure will be best understood from the figure, although that omits one of the median plates which are in contact at the base, and only hints at an additional pair lying beneath the slender terminal pair and for the most part concealed by it. The numerous hooks with which the various projecting lobes are studded probably resemble those which Professor S. I. SmrrH has figured for his Sergestes robustus, enlarging them one hundred diameters (U.S. Rep. Comm. Fish, 1884, pl. viii. fig. 6a, 6b). The second pleopod of a specimen which I take to be a female has, in attachment to the short inner branch, a narrowly laminar appendage of considerable length, distally furnished with setee on the surface and apically with several unequal spines. The inner branch of the uropods is considerably longer than the telson, but shorter than the outer branch. In every case, as with the scale of the second antenne, this outer branch is apically damaged, the existing portion having the outer margin smooth and unarmed. The telson in the basal half is more or less parallel-sided, the distal half strongly tapering and ending abruptly in a sharp point, the distal part setose at the sides. Length of specimen figured 42°5 mm., of which the carapace occupied 11°5 mm. In lateral view the hind margin of the carapace forms a double curve. Among the pleon segments the shortness of the fifth and length of the sixth are conspicuous. Locality.—lLat. 48° 00’ 8., long. 9° 50’ W.; depth 1332 fathoms; Station 450. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9). 40 286 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA Tribe CARIDEA. 1852. Caridea (part), Dana, U.S. Expl. Hxp., vol. xiii. p. 528. Family PaLamonipZ. 1819. Pulemonide (part), Leach, in Samouelle’s Entomologis!’s Compendium, p. 96. 1852. Palemonine (subfam.), Dana, U.S. Hapl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 569. 1888. Palxmonidx, Bate, Rep. Voy. “‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 711, 778. 1890. A Ortmann, Zoo/. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 512. 1894. 7 Alcock and Anderson, J. Asiut. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxiii. part 2, No. 3, p. 17. 1897. 3 Ortmann, Revista do Museo Paulista, N. 2, p. 186. 1901. - Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 123. 1902. 3 de Man, Abhandl. Senckenb. Gesellsch., vol. xxv. part ii, p. 763. 1906. 7 Kemp, Fisheries, Ireland, 1905, p. 127. 1907. es Borradaile, Ann. Nat, Hist., ser. 7, vol. xix. p. 472. 1912. 5 de Man, Ann. Soc. Zool. Belgique, vol. xlvi. p. 197. Those who study the authorities above cited will find that different views have been and to some extent still are held as to the proper contents of this family. The material, however, on this occasion at my disposal does not require, and would not facilitate, any thorough discussion of the subject. Genus Leander, Desmarest. 1849. Leander, Desmarest, Ann. Soc. Entom. France, sér. 2, vol. vii. pp. 87, 91. 1860. f Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. xii. p. 40 (109). 1888. 53 de Man, Arch. Naturg., vol. lili. p. 559. 1888. Palemon, Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 781. 1890. Leander, Ortmann, Zool. Jabrb., vol. v. p. 513. 1893. 5 Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. lxxiv. p. 246, 1901. Palemon, Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. pp. 123, 125. 1906. Leander, Kemp, Fisheries, Ireland, 1905, p. 127. Leander squilla (Linn.). 1758. Cancer squilla, Linn., Systema Nature, ed. 10, p. 632. 1798. Palemon squilla, Fabricius, Suppl. Ent. Syst., p. 403. 1884. Leander squilla, Czerniavsky, Mat. zoogr. Pont. comp., fase. ii. p. 48 (with synonymy). 1890. 53 » Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 522, pl. xxxvii. fig. 15. 1906. 5; » Kemp, Fisheries, Ireland, 1905, pp. 129, 132, pl. xx. fig. 3, a—e. CZERNIAVSKY supplies a vast bibliography and names two varieties. Kump gives a synoptic view of the characters which separate this species from L. serratus (Pennant) and L. adspersus (Rathke). In the latter two the palp of the mandible is three-jointed, while in ZL. squilla, as discovered by Caiman, it is two-jointed, a feature which it shares with L. tenuirostris (Say). The rostrum is armed above with from seven to ten teeth, below with three, or rarely two or four, and has a bifid apex. The telson agrees with that described later on for L. affinis. In the first antenns the shortest flagellum has the number of free joints subequal to that of the coalesced, in the specimen examined the number being in each case eleven, and the two sets equal in length. Kemp speaks of the shorter ramus as fused to the longer for about OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 287 two-fifths of its length. In the second maxillipeds the last joint reaches beyond the penultimate without making a neatly continuous curve. The second pereeopods reach beyond the scale of the second antennee by the whole length of the sixth joint, which is a little longer than the fifth, as the fifth is than the fourth; the seventh joint is rather more than half as long as the palm of the sixth. Locality.—St. Vincent, Porto Grande ; Station 24. Leander affinis (Milne-Edwards). 1837. Palemon affinis, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vo!. ii. p. 391. 1852. Palxmon afinis, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 584; (1855) pl. xxxviili. fig. 0, a-g. 1888. = » Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 782, pl. exxviii. fig. 5, a, d, 7. 1888. A » Witmer Stone, in Heilprin, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., pp. 318, 322. 1890. Leander affinis, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 521. 1893. 5 » Ortmann, Hrgebn. Plankton-Exp., vol. ii., G. b., p. 47. 1901. Palxmon affinis, Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 125. 1910. Leander squilla, Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 386. This species was named for its affinity to Leander squilla, rather inappropriately as it has proved, since the latter species belongs to the group which has the mandibular palp biarticulate, while here it is three-jointed. Moreover, in the first antennee the shortest flagellum has the number of free joints greater than that of the coalesced joints, which is not the case in LZ. squilla. Barve observes in regard to his Australian specimens, as a remarkable circumstance, “that neither of the flagella of this pair of antennz has attached to it any of the membranous cilia so common in the order.” In our specimens the short flagellum is well provided with the usual filaments, but they are short, and might easily escape notice. Dana supplies some good figures of the mouth-organs. But the outermost division of the first maxilla is represented much shorter than it is in our specimens. It is possible that Dana saw it foreshortened. The continuity of curve between the last two joints of the second maxillipeds is well shown in Dana’s figure. The terminal joint of the third maxilliped is represented both by Bare and Dana as relatively shorter than it is in our specimens, especially in the larger ones. As to the second perzopods, Dana gives the “ fingers much less than half the length of the hand” ; Miss Rarusun gives “ palm 1°5 times as long as the fingers”; Bare allows the chela to be “about half the length of the palm”; his figure, however, is in near agreement with Miss RatuBun’s estimate. Ina species ranging from Porto Rico to New Zealand some amount of variation may well be expected. Dana describes the apex of the telson by saying “extremity of abdomen very narrow, having three minute spinules, and between them two longish sete.” Bars, speaking of the telson, says: “On each side within the margin are three small spinules, and the distal extremity is fringed with a few hairs.” In our specimens the telson ends in a spine-like median process, the base of which joins the lateral margins by slightly oblique lines, with a spine at each angle, and between these spines and the median process are two other spines nearly three 288 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA times as long, separated by two densely plumose sete, nearly as long as the spines and emerging from below the median process. The length of the species is given by BaTE as 24 mm. for the male and 33 mm. for the female; by Miss Rarupun as 35°5 mm. for an ovigerous female; by Dana as two inches for his New Zealand specimen ; and though some of the South African specimens do not attain to this size, others exceed it, reaching 2? inches. Locality.—Saldanha Bay, May 19, 1904, 8-10 fathoms; Reitz Bay, May 20, 1904, 5 fathoms; Station 482. Leander tenwicornis (Say). 1818. Palemon tenwcornis, Say, J. Ac. Sct. Philad., vol. i. part i. p. 249. 1837. Palemon natator, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 393 (P. tenuwirostre, p. 395). 1849. Leander erraticus, Desmarest, Ann. Soc. Entom. France, ser. 2, val. vii. p. 92, text-fig. on p. 93. 1860. Leander natator, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sct. Philad., vol. xii. p. 40 (109). 1879. Leander tenuicornis, S. I. Smith, Tr. Connect. Act., vol. v. p. 122. 1884. Palemon tenuirostris, Carus, Prodr, Faunx Mediterranez, part ii. p. 474. 1888. Leander natator, de Man, Arch. Naturg., vol. liii. p. 563. 1888. Palemon natator, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘“ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 784, pl. exxvill. figs. 6, 7. 1890. Leander natator, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 525. 1893. Leander tenuicornis, Ortmann, Ergebn. Plankton-Exp., vol. ii., G. b., p. 48. 1908. = 7 Verrill, Tr. Connect. Act. Sci., vol. xiii. pp. 326, 377. VERRILL mentions this species along with Latreutes fucorwm and the crabs Lupa say, Gibbes, and Planes minutus (Linn.), as constant tenants of the Gulf weed. ORTMANN agrees with DE Man in regarding pE Haan’s Palemon latirostris as a synonym of this species, although pr Haan, like Desmargst, describes the lower margin of the rostrum as without teeth, while Say gives the rostrum eleven or twelve teeth above and six or seven below. A dissected specimen shows twelve above and six below; the teeth in this species are much beset with sete, especially on the lower margin. Of the lateral spines of the carapace the lower one stands back from the margin, instead of adjoining it as in L. squilla and L. affinis. The eyes in several specimens retain traces of two parallel colour bands across the ophthalmic area. The first antennee have the shortest flagellum united with its partner for a very short space. The mandibles have a very slender two-jointed palp, the second joint much the longer. The first maxille ditfer very slightly from those of the other two species, except that the apical series of spines on the inner plate is not continued on to the lateral margin. In the second maxillipeds the terminal joint is produced well beyond the penultimate, with no continuity of curve between them. In the dissected specimen the first pereeopods have the fourth joint longer than the fifth, which is slightly shorter than the sixth; the fingers of the chela are considerably longer than the palm. In the second pereeopods also the fourth joint is a little longer than the fifth, which is decidedly shorter than the sixth, but here the fingers are only a little longer than the somewhat inflated palm. The telson ends apic- ally much as in the other species, except that the long spines are at least five times as long as those at the angles, and, though separated by the median process, beyond it OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 289 they come close together, covering the median sete. Among our specimens one had the second perzeopods of unequal size, in one both first and second pereeopods were represented only by blunt-ended, few-jointed stalks, in some cases only one of the second pair was present. It is likely that these powerful grasping limbs are much subject to injury. The length of an ovigerous female was 40 mm. between apices of rostrum and telson. Localities.—Gulf weed, June 29, 1904, lat. 29° 54’ N., long. 34° 10’ W.; June 30, fo04 Jat, 32° 11 N., long. 34° 10’ W.; and July 1, 1904, lat. 38° 53’ N., long. 32° oe W.: Stations 537, 538, 539. Family Hrprotytip&. 1888. Hippolytide, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 503, 576. 1893. * Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. xxiv. p. 233. 1901. rf Rathbun, U.S, Fish Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 113. 1906. i Calman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xvii. p. 30. 1907. 5 Borradaile, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xix. p. 472. 1907. . Calman, Nat. Antarct. Exp., vol. ii., ‘Crust.,” p. 1. 1910. % Kemp, Pisheries, Ireland, 1908, p. 99. 1912. By G. O. Sars, Arch. Naturv., vol. xxxii., Nos. 5, 7, 9. Genus Hippolyte, Leach. 1814. Hippolyte, Leach, Edinb. Encycl., vol. vii. p. 431. 1860. Virbius, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sct. Philad., p. 35 (prodromus, p. 104). 1878. Caradina, Bate, J. Roy. Institution Cornwall, vol. v. p. 486. 1888. Hippolyte, Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 576, 587. In his Challenger Report Barr recognises that as Hippolyte was originally founded for the single species H. varians, Stimpson, by including that species in Virbius, condemned his own genus as a synonym to that named by Leacu, and for the same reason among others BaTE saw that his isolation of a species as Caradina varians (Leach) must be withdrawn. At the same time he notices that MILnr- Hpwarbs’ genus is Caridina, not Caradina, but prints Verbius in place of Virbius. In this genus the mandible has a cutting edge and molar but no palp. The first perzeopods have a short stout .chela, the second have a more slender chela and a triarticulate wrist. Hippolyte acununatus Dana. 1852. Hippolyte acuminatus, Dana, U.S. Hapl. Eap., vol. xiii. p. 562; (1855) pl. xxxvi. fig. 1, a-e. 1860. Virbius acuminatus, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sci. Philad., vol. xii. p. 36 (105). 1888. Hippolyte bidentatus, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 591, pl. cv. figs. 1, 2. 1893. Virbius acuminatus, Ortmann, Ergebn. Plankton-Eup., ii. G. b., p. 46. This species has been efficiently described and figured by Spence Bars, who named it bidentatus, evidently in allusion to the pair of teeth extending subdorsally from the hind margin of the fifth pleon segment. Dana takes no notice of this character. But these little pellucid processes are not very easy to observe, and the probability is that Dana overlooked them. ‘Though a single tooth on the under side of the rostrum appears to be usual, one of the Scotia specimens has three teeth 290 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA in that position. Bare says that the stouter flagellum of the first antenne is “divided into about ten or twelve articuli,” which agrees with the Scotia specimen, that having eleven joints in one member of the pair and twelve in the other; but in both, contrary to Batr’s figure, the two terminal joints are narrow, these and the preceding joint being without filaments. Dana describes this flagellum as five- or six-jomted, and figures it accordingly. He assigns twelve to fourteen joints to the longer flagellum, Bare gives it twelve or fifteen, and our specimen shows seventeen. Dana gives the length as varying from three-quarters of an inch to an inch, and this agrees with the Scotva specimens. Localities.—Gulf weed, lat. 18° 43’ N., long. 27° 46’ W.; 27° 23’ N., 33° 06’ W.; 32 11 N. 384° 10 Wee Stations 9382, 5386)038: Genus Latreutes, Stimpson. 1860. Latrewtes, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Set. Philad., vol. xii. p. 27 (96). 1888. a Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 576, 581. 1890. 5 Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 505. 1893. = Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. Ixxiv. p. 234. 1893. en Ortmann, Hrgebn. Plankton-Exp., vol. ii. G. b., p. 47. 1901. F Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 114. 1906. - Calman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xvi. pp. 31, 33. 1907. 5 de Man, Vr. Linn. Soc. London, vol. ix. part x1. p. 421. 1914, % Balss, Abhandl. K. Bayer. Ak. Wiss., vol. 11, part x. p. 46. ORTMANN and CaLMAN include part of Barr’s genus Platybema under Latreutes, and Batr’s Platybema rugosus is transferred by CaLMAN to a new genus Trachycaris on the ground that Platybema was nullified through Batr’s erroneous supposition that pp Haan’s planirostris was in generic agreement with rugosus. Had he left DE Haan alone, his genus would have been unimpeachable. According to ORTMANN, 1893, confirmed by CaLMAN, 1906, Stimpson was in error in attributing an epipod to each of the first four pereeopods instead of only the first three. It may be noticed also that Mrtne-Epwarps, in describing the type species, assigns only two subdivisions , to the wrist of the second perzeopods, whereas there are three. Latreutes fucorum (Fabricius). 1798. Palemon fucorum, Fabricius, Suppl. Ent. Syst., p. 404. 1837. Hippolyte ensiferus, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 374. 1852. Ms Dana, U.S. Expl. Hap., vol. xiii, p. 562. 1860. Latreutes ensiferus, Stimpson, Pr. Ac. Sct, Philad., vol. xii. p. 27 (96). 1888. 5 Ae Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 583, pl. civ. fig. 1, d-7, k-m, q. 1890. 3 5 Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 507. 1893. ‘5 Ortmann, Ergebn. Plankton-Exp., vol. ii. G. b., pp. 47, 60. 1901. B _ Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1900, vol. ii. p. 114. 1906. “ Calman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xvii, p. 33. 1910. Hippolyte ae Stebbing, Ann, S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 390. Bate says: “ Palemon fucorum, Fabricius (Suppl. Entom. Syst., p. 404), un- doubtedly belongs to this genus,” He was deterred from identifying it with the OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 291 present species because Fasrictus describes the carapace as smooth, without mention of the little tooth on the gastric region. But, at the date when Fasricius wrote, such a tooth might easily have escaped notice or not have been thought worth mentioning as interfering with the general smoothness of the carapace. On the other hand, among the Malacostraca frequenting the Gulf weed there is, I believe, no other species with a smooth, apically quinquedentate rostrum such as Fasricrus assigns to his P. fucorum, so that I cannot agree with Onrmann’s verdict in 1893 that it is a quite apocryphal species. So far as I have observed, the serration of the apex has five points more frequently than any other number, but the variation extends from one to nine, the only number within these limits that I have not found being eight. The antero-lateral corners of the carapace are serrate, according to BaTE with five or six points, according to Ratapun with five to eight. In one of our specimens there were seven points on one corner and eight on the other. Another specimen has eleven points on one side; those on the other side were not counted. FABRICIUS gives the size as only a third of P. squilla, which well suits the present identification, as the length of L. ensiferus varies in different estimates from half an inch to an inch. Of those taken at Station 539, it was recorded that one was quite blue, two others brown and blue. Localities.—Gulf weed, Stations 532, 533, 537, 538, 539, between 18° 43’ N., 27° 46’ W., and 33° 53’ N., 32° 27’ W. Some specimens were seen to be infested by the minute Bopyrid Bopyrina latreuticola (see p. 301). Genus Nauticaris, Bate. 1888. Nauticaris, Bate, Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. xii, 577, 602. 1893. is Stebbing, Hist, Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. lxxiv. p. 234. 1902. Merhippolyte, Hodgson, “ Southern Cross” Exp., ‘‘ Crustacea,” p. 233. 1906. Nauticaris, Calman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xvii. p. 30. In Catman’s synopsis of the Hippolytide this genus is distinguished as having arthrobranchie at the bases of the first four pairs of pereeopods, mandibles with palp but without cutting edge, wrist or fifth joint of second perzeopod with more than seven subdivisions, and a movable spine at the base of the uropods. The last of these characters seems to be obscurely expressed, since the spine-like process on the peduncle of the uropods is not movable, and the movable spine is at the infero-lateral hind corner of the sixth pleon segment. This spine is said by Bate to be absent from his species NV. wnirecedens, though he includes it in his account of the genus. But pe Man (1907) and CaLMAN agree in identifying N. wnirecedens with the earlier Hippolysmata vittatus, Stimpson. Dr Catman points out that Hippolyte magellamcus, A. Milne-Edwards, 1891, belongs to Nauticaris, but differs from other species in possessing exopods on the third maxillipeds. He finds that Merhippolyte australis, Hodgson, 1902, is synonymous with N. marions, Bate, Hopason having been misled partly by my acceptance of Batr’s error as to the second perzeopods and partly by 292 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA a wrong view of the mandibles. Hopason had already noticed the similarity between his species and that of A. Mitne-Epwarps’. Here, as in various other instances, the armature of the upper and lower margins of the rostrum seems to be so variable within each species that it is an unsafe guide for specific distinction. Nauticaris brucet, n. sp. Plate X XIX. Along with a general resemblance to Batr’s N. marionis, the present species exhibits some rather notable differences in detail. In the first two specimens examined the lower margin of the rostrum showed four teeth, but a third specimen had only three. A fourth specimen had the hindmost tooth on the carapace more remote from the succeeding tooth than in other specimens, a character for which Bate named the species N. wnirecedens, mentioned above. The frontal margin of the carapace in the new species has only the antennal tooth, without that of the infero-lateral angle seen in N. marionis and more conspicuously in N. magellanicus. The eyes are much broader at the base than those figured by BatE for N. marionis. In the first antennze the stylocerite does not nearly reach the extremity of the first joint. The three-jointed palp of the mandible is relatively much smaller than that figured for the species compared. ‘The first maxillipeds have the termination of the endopod long and distinctly three-joimted, not a short simple process as figured by Bate for N. marions. For his N. australis Hopeson says, “The endopodite is a two-jointed appendage with a terminal claw,” and, judging by Mrs Sexron’s figure, this would seem very distinct both from the present species and from Batr’s. In the second maxillipeds the fourth jomt, much shorter than the third, is quite distinct, as the muscles sufficiently attest, but probably the differences in Bare’s account of his species are due to imperfect observation. The third maxillipeds have a slight, easily detachable exopod. The slender second perzopods have fifteen subdivisions of the wrist, those at the base feebly indicated. The apex of the telson has a pair of plumose setee between two long spines which are flanked by a pair of short ones. Length of specimen figured in bent position 15 mm., straightened out over 20 mm. Locality.—Gough Island, depth 100 fathoms ; Station 461. Specific name given out of respect to Dr W. 8. Bruos, leader of the Scotea Expedition. Nauticaris magellanicus (A. Milne-Edwards). 1891. Hippolyte magellanicus, A, Milne-Edwards, Mission de Cap Horn., “Crust,” p. 46, pl. v. figs. 2, 2a-1. 1902. Meniipoaiiite magellanicus, Hodgson, ‘‘ Southern Cross” Exp., ‘‘ Crustacea,” p. 235. 1906. Nauticaris magellanicus, Calman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xvii. p. 31. According to CaLMaN this species “ differs from the other species of the genus in possessing exopods on the third maxillipeds.” As already observed, a rudimentary exopod is found in the small new species NV. brucer. Here the exopod, though short, OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 293 is many-jointed and furnished with plumose setee. Apart from this it would be difficult to separate this form from Hopeson’s Merhippolyte australis, which CALMAN has identified with Barr’s Nauticaris marions. The teeth continued from the carapace along the upper margin of the rostrum are given by Mitne-Epwarbs as six or seven, with one or two below. Our specimen has eight above and one below. The stylocerite of the first antennee reaches beyond the main body of the first joint. The scale of the second antenne extends beyond the rostrum. The three-jointed palp of the mandibles is furnished on all the joints with numerous setiform spines, the first joint much wider and longer than the second, the second much wider but little longer than the third. In the first maxillipeds the last three joints of the endopod are very different from those of N. bruce, the first of them broad, fringed on the inner margin with eleven long setee; the second longer, narrower, curved, somewhat similarly fringed; the third very short and narrow, tapering, straight, tipped with a short seta. In the third maxillipeds the exopod is about 2°5 mm. long, while the last joint of the endopod measures about 8 mm. On one of the second perzeopods fourteen components of the wrist are found. In the spine armature of the seventh joint in the simple legs there are slight differences between this species and NV. brucei, but the specimens being so different in size, no importance can be attached to these. Similarly, it may be doubted whether slight variations in the armature of the telson have any specific value, but the larger apical pair of spines are relatively much longer in the smaller of the two forms. The cara- pace of the present species measures 14 mm. from apex of rostrum to the middle of the concave hind margin; the scale of the second antenne is fully 6 mm. long. Locality.—Port Stanley, Falkland Islands ; Station 118. Family PasrpH &ID &. 1852. Pasiphxide, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. pp. 532, 536. 1884. Pasiphaide, 8. I. Smith, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1882, p. 381. 1888. Pasiphxidx, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. 481, 857. 1890. % Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., vol. v. p. 463. 1893. Pastphaidx, Wood-Mason and Alcock, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. xi. p. 161. 1893. Pastpheide, Stebbing, Hist, Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. Ixxiv. p. 251. 1895. Pasiphxiide, Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zodl., vol. xviii. p. 173. 1901. Pasiphxidx, Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Macrura, pp. 55, 57. 1902. + Rathbun, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxiv. p. 904. 1904. - Rathbun, Harriman-Exp., ‘ Decapods,” p. 19. 1906. A Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1908, part iii. p. 927. 1907. ‘; Coutiere, Bull. Inst. Océanogr. Monaco, No. 104, pp. 1, 12 (larval forms). 1910. Fe Kemp, Fisheries, Ireland, 1908, pp. 35, 36, The genera of this family may be briefly distinguished as follows :— cee without palp, 2. Mandibles with palp, 3. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9), 4] 294 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA 3 (Telson acute or truncate. . Ll. Pasiphea, Savigny, 1816. "|Telson with bifid apex . . 2. Phye, Wood-Mason, 1893. {Mandibular palp foliaceous . 8. Psathyrocaris, Wood-Mason, 1891. >.) Mandibular palp slender, 4. Fifth pereopods longer than fourth ; second maxillipeds . having an epipod . 4. Parapasiphaé, 8. 1. Smith, 1884. | Fifth pereeopods not longer than fourth; second maxillipeds without epipod ; . 5. Sympasiphea, Alcock, 1901. Of these genera the first two are closely allied, yet Phye, by its incised telson, is different from all the rest, this feature being unfamiliar except in the Schizopoda and some larval forms. The third genus is so different from the others that, as ALcock has suggested, it “might perhaps be separated to form a distinct family.” Lepto- chela, Stimpson, 1860, agrees with it in having a foliaceous palp to the mandibles, but the palp is one-jointed instead of two-jointed, and other features make its inclu- sion in the Pasiphaidx open to question. Barr’s imperfectly defined Orphama, 1888, is perhaps not distinct from Pasiphea. Genus Phye, Wood-Mason. 1893. Phye, Wood-Mason, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. xi. p. 164. 1901. Pasiphxa (Phye), Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Macrura, p. 61. The original definition is: “ Differs from Pasiphaé in the carapace and abdomen being more or less extensively and distinctly carinated dorsally, in the former being armed in front with a pair of branchiostegal spines, and in the telson being forked at the extremity.” It is said to include P. princeps, Smith ; P. acutifrons, Bate ; and P. forceps, A. Milne-Edwards, 1891; and characters are given distinguishing these species from Phye alcocki (Wood-Mason), 1891. In 1901 Atcock treats it as a sub- genus, saying: “ Differs from Pasiphea in having the tip of the telson forked. In all other respects, including the number and arrangement of the gills, it agrees with Pasiphxa.” It should be noticed that Pasiphea truncatus, Rathbun, 1906, and P. flagellatus, Rathbun, 1906, both have the apex of the telson truncate, while in P. kawwiensis, Rathbun, of the same date, the telson has “its tip cut in a very shallow V.” Nothing could be more satisfactory if we are looking for missing links or more confusing to the interests of sharp definition between genus and genus. Phye scotrx, n. sp. Plate XXX. By the elongation of the carina of the carapace to a smooth-pointed process reaching beyond the eyes, this species is distinguished from the other members of the genus. ‘The point of the process is upturned, while in the somewhat similar process OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 295 of Pasiphea amplidens, Bate, the point curves downward and does not reach beyond the eyes. From Barr’s specimen part of the pereeon and all the pleon were unfortunately missing. In having the fourth joint of the first perzeopod smooth and that of the second serrate it agrees with our species, but apart from this there are several differences. The mandibular cutting edge here shows nine to ten teeth, compared with thirteen in P. amplidens. The first maxilla of the latter is said to agree closely with that of P. cristatus, Bate, which according to the figure has the middle lobe fringed with seven spines and two spinules, against the eighteen spines of the Scotia species. Moreover, here the fingers of the second pereeopods are fully as long as the palm, and the fourth joint has only seven teeth along the margin, while Batr’s figure shows fifteen teeth along that margin and fingers much shorter than the palm. The telson is about five times as long as its greatest breadth, narrowing towards the apex and widening a little at the fork, which is occupied by eight pairs of graduated spines. In the first antennz the acicle does not reach the end of the first joint, which is as long as the second and third combined, the second being consider- ably shorter than the third; of the two flagella, one for a space is much broader than the other. The scale of the second antenne is much narrowed at the flattened apex, beyond which the terminal tooth is well produced. The first and second maxillipeds, as noticed by Barn, are as firmly attached as if they together formed a single appendage. Localities. —Lat. 71° 22’ S., long. 16° 34’ W., depth 1410 fathoms; Station 417, March 18, 1904. A second smaller specimen, with anterior process broken off, was obtained at lat. 68° 32’ S., long. 12° 49’ W., by the vertical net from surface to 600 fathoms ; Station 422, March 23, 1904. Phye rathbune, n. sp. Plate XXXI. In this species the central carina of the carapace is not produced over the eyes, and the telson is only about three and a half times as long as the greatest breadth, its apical fork frmged with nine pairs of graduated spines, of which the innermost pair is minute. In many respects its proportions differ little from those of the preceding species, but in the first antenne the flagella are less unequal at the base, and in the second the distal tooth of the scale is less prominent, the middle lobe of the first maxilla is fringed with thirteen spines, the first pereeopods have the fourth joint serrate with nine teeth and the fingers more instead of less than half the length of the palm; in the second perzeopods the second and third joints as well as the fourth are serrate, the fourth jomt having as many as seventeen teeth or small spines, and the fingers are rather shorter than the palm. The earlier-known species, with which the present is most closely related, is that 296 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA which Kr6oyrr in 1845 described as Pasiphae tarda, redescribed and figured under the same name by Mr Kemp in 1910. Here, however, instead of the first five pleon segments and much of the sixth being sharply carinate dorsally, the earlier segments show no carina at all and on none is the carina sharply developed. In the fourth pereopods the sixth joint is three-quarters the length of the fourth, instead of less than half, as in P. tardus, and in the fifth pair the sixth joint is decidedly shorter than the fourth, not about equal to it. In some other respects there may be traced divergence between the two species, but with only one specimen of the new form available, it is inexpedient to lay too much stress on minutie. The distribution of KROYER’S species extends northwards to Davis Straits and the coasts of Greenland, but according to Kump lat. 51° 54’ N. is the most southern locality from which the species has been recorded in East Atlantic waters, a very different part of the globe from that in which the Scotva specimen was obtained. Locality.—Lat. 48° 00’ S., long. 9° 50’ W.; depth 1332 fathoms; Station 450. The specific name is given out of respect to Miss M. J. Rarupun, the distinguished American carcinologist. A species possibly belonging to this family was taken in lat. 39° 48’S%., long. 2° 33’ K.; depth 2645 fathoms; Station 468. Unluckily it is represented only by the pleon, and that wanting the first pleopods. It is worth mentioning, as the remaining pleopods by their great length and slenderness make some approach to those in the genus Psathyrocaris, although here the exopod is scarcely more than twice the length of the endopod. ‘The sixth segment of the pleon is long and clearly carinate ; the telson has two dorsal carinze, which are rather wide apart at the base. The exopod of the uropods is elongate. Family NEMATOCARCINID&. 1884. Nematocarcinine, S. 1. Smith, U.S. Fish Comm. for 1882, p. 368. 1888. Nematocarcinide, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. xiii, 481, 927. 1893. “ Stebbing, Hist. Crust., Internat. Sci. Ser., vol. Ixxiv. p. 249, 1901. a Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Macrura, pp 56, &5. 1910. . Kemp, Wisheries, Ireland, 1908, pp. 35, 75. Atcock remarks that “the NMematocarcinide in a logical system should not be separated as a distinct family, for they are merely Pandalide in which the first four pairs of thoracic legs have delicate exopodites, and they might be united with the latter family.” But as in the Pandalidex “the thoracic legs never have exopodites,” and the fifth joint of the second pair is subdivided, while the Nematocarcinide have that joint simple, and in the three following pairs an interlocking arrangement between the third and fourth joints described by Bate as of “peculiar and unique character,” the separation of the two families may very well be upheld, OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 297 Genus Nematocarcinus, A. Milne-Edwards. 1881. Nematocarcinus, A. Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sei. Nat. ‘‘Zool.,” ser. 6, vol. xi. art. 4, p. 14. 1882. Humiersia, S. I. Smith, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. x. p. 77. 1884. Nematocarcinus, 8. I. Smith, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1882, p. 368. 1888. 3 Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. pp. lxxxvi, 800. 1901. Be Alcock, Catal. Indian Deep-Sea Macrura, p. 86. 1906. . Rathbun, U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903, part iil. p. 926. In this widely distributed genus the names of species are numerous, embracing N. cursor, A. Milne-Edwards, 1881; Humiersia ensifera, 8. I. Smith, 1882; fifteen names given by Bate in 1888; and N. agassizi, Faxon, 1893. In 1901 Atcock suggests that Bars’s productus, tenuipes, and intermedius may be all the same species, and all not improbably synonymous with the N. ensifer of 8. I. Surru, to which Kemp further refers Barr’s Stochasmus exilis as at most a variety, CALMAN and Hansen having already shown that the problematic Stochasmus was founded on the young of Nematocarcinus. ALcock questions also the validity of Barr's N. undulatipes, supposing that it may be a synonym of N. cursor, to which he definitely assigns Batr’s NV. paucidentatus as a variety. The relative size and armature of the rostrum, to which BatE has attached so much importance in dis- tinguishing his species, are of doubtful value for that purpose, as they vary with the age of the specimen and are otherwise inconstant. There is the further inconvent- ence that the long pointed rostrum, like the enormously long pereeopods and the tapering telson, is peculiarly liable to be damaged. The close resemblance among all the accepted species makes it probable that the mouth-organs are practically alike in all. But in regard to these it is important to follow the excellent account and figures given by 8. I. SmirH in 1882, rather than those of Barz. In 1893 I accepted Batr’s statement that the palp of the mandibles was two-jointed, neglecting Smirn’s earlier and correct evidence that it is three-jomted. SmirxH also shows that the second maxillipeds are seven- (not six-) jointed, since the dactylus, which Barr overlooks, “is articulated obliquely along the distal end of the propodus.” This feature, in which the dactylus has quite ceased to be dactyliform, helps to link the present genus with several others in the tribe Caridea. SmirH has noted that in the first maxillipeds the last of the three terminal joimts of the endopod is very minute. It is indeed difficult to distinguish, but the two preceding are rather long. Bate’s figure consolidates all three into a tolerably short single joint. According to Smiru’s description of the first maxille of N. ensifer, “ the endognath is much shorter than the distal lobe of the protognath, and truncated at the extremity, which is armed with a stout seta either side and a third one just below the tip.” In our specimens these maxillz correspond with Smrrn’s description and figure, except that the “ palp” or terminal joint which he calls the endognath has at the inner corner of its truncate apex a long and strong, distally feathered spine, and at the outer corner a much slenderer and shorter spine, and on the surface below the apex a raised 298 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA process carrying three or four spines. The second maxille in our specimens fully agree with Smirn’s account, except that the fringing sete of the proximal lobe are much longer relatively than those which he figures. The sharply pointed hind portion of the scaphognath has, as he observes, on its inner margin sete of remarkable length. Nematocarcinus lanceopes, Bate. 1888. Nematocarcinus lanceopes, Bate, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xxiv. p. 804, pl. exxxi. Plate XXXIIs. The species thus named was taken by the Challenger in lat. 60° 52’ S. The Scotia obtained a number of specimens in lat. 71° 22’ 8., which agree fairly well with Bate’s account of the rostrum, except that the lower margin for almost the whole length is unmistakably fringed with setules. A single specimen from lat. 39° 43’ 8. has the rostrum devoid of setules. But the more or less damaged condition of all the specimens makes it difficult to be sure that any two belong to the same species or same variety, while, as above observed, the rostrum itself is subject to variation. In none of the specimens examined could I find the fifth perzeopod complete. According to Bats, the scale or scaphocerite of the second antennz is nearly as long as the rostrum. His figure represents it as much longer. In our specimens it is decidedly shorter. The third maxillipeds do not reach the end of the scale, and are outstripped by the fifth joint of the first pereeopods, which almost reaches that end. The second pereeopods extend much beyond the rostrum. The telson reaches the end of the uropods. It carries numerous pairs of little dorso- lateral spines, and the narrow apex, besides some setules, has two contiguous spines flanked by a much larger subapical pair. The specimens agree in size with Batr’s specimens, as some of them were about 130 mm. long, allowance being made for broken off apex of rostrum or telson. | Localitves.—Lat. 71° 22’ §., long. 16° 34’ W.; depth 1410 fathoms; Station 417 One specimen, probably of the same species, from lat. 39° 48’ S., long. 2° 33’ E., 2772 fathoms; Station 468. SCHIZOPODA. Order MYSIDACEA. Suborder LOPHOGASTRIDA. Family EKucopmpé. 1852. Hucopide, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. pp. 601, 609. 1875. Chalaraspidx, v. Willemoes Suhm, 7’. Linn. Soc. London, “ Zool.,” ser. 2, vol. i. part i. p. 39. 1883. Hucopiide, G. O. Sars, Forhandl. Vidensk., Christiania, No, 7, p. 9. 1910. fs H. J. Hansen, “ Scboga” Exp., vol. xxxvii. p. 19. The classification here accepted is fully explained in HANSEN’S valuable treatise, OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 299 Genus Hucopia, Dana. 1852. Eucopia, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. pp. 602, 609. 1875. Chalaraspis, v. Willemoes Suhm, Tr. Linn. Soc. London, “ Zool.,” ser. 2, vol. i, part i. p. 39. 1885. Hucopia, Sars, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xiii. part xxxvil. p. 54. 1895. Fe Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. xviii. p. 218. 1906. 5 Ortmann, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xxxi. p. 53. 1910. o Hansen, ‘‘ Siboga” Exp., vol. xxxvii. p. 19. 1912. +p Hansen, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zoil. Harvard, vol. xxxv., No. 4, p. 187. 1913. # Tattersall, Zr. R. Soc. Edinb., vol. xlix. part iv. p. 868. HanseEN accepts only the following four specific names as thus far valid in this genus: LH. australis, Dana, 1852; E. wunguiculatus, Suhm, 1875 ; E. sculpticauda, Faxon, 1895; and EH. major, Hansen, 1910. The extraordinary length of the second, third, and fourth perzeopods, the delicate structure of the whole organism, and the great depth from which it is commonly obtained, have combined to make descriptions very imperfect through the provoking mutilation of specimens. Hucopwa sp. Plate XXXIIa. As the head, first perzeopods, and telson are missing, nothing very definite can be said about this species. The remaining limbs come very near to those which Sars has figured from a young female which he assigns to H. australis, Dana (Rep. Voy. “ Challenger,” “ Schizopoda,” pl. x. figs. 2, 5, 6, 7). Asin our specimen the fifth joint of the fourth pereeopod is longer than the sixth, it cannot belong either to Sunm’s species or to Faxon’s. For Hansen’s £. major these limbs are not described, nor are they distinctly figured by Dana. The spiny armature of the sixth and seventh joints does not agree precisely with that shown by Sars. On the sixth joint there are five large spines, the first much the longest, separated from the next by one spinule, each of the others having two intermediate spinules, the last being followed to the apex by eight slender spines. The finger is margined with seven spines, the first very small, succeeded by three successively longer, the fourth followed by three that are smaller and little projecting. The length might be roughly estimated at 30 mm., fourth pereeopod 39 mm. Locality.—Lat. 39° 48’ S., long. 2° 33’ E.; depth 2772 fathoms; Station 468. Dr TarrERSALL’s report on the Schizopoda of the Scotra has just appeared, and I must apologise for having unwittingly interfered with them, but my plate had been finished and the above notice written a long time ago. From the Station 468 above mentioned Dr Tarrersatt found the genus Hucopia represented by “one fragmentary specimen, head end only,” which he groups with damaged specimens from various other deep-sea southern localities as probably belonging to E, australis, Dana, as redefined by HaNnsEN in 1905. 300 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA STOMATOPODA.* 1817. “ Stomapodes,” Latreille, Le Reyne Animal, vol. iii. p. 40. 1825. Stomapoda, Latreille, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 282. 1843. Stomatopoda, Krauss, Siidafrik. Crust., p. 60. 1910. 5s Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vol. vi. part iv. p. 404. Family SQuiLiip. 1803. “ Squillares,” Latreille, Hist. Nat. Crust. et Ins., vol. vi. p. 270. 1880. Squillidx, Miers, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. v. pp. 1, 108. Squilla armatus, Milne-Edwards. 1837. Squilla armata, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 521. 1849. 3 AS Nicolet, Gay’s Hist. de Chile, ‘‘ Zool,” vol. iii. p. 223. How os » A. Milne-Edwards, Miss. Cap Horn, “Crust.,” p. 538, pl. vii. 1894, Pe Bigelow, Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xvii. p. 515, text-figs. 9, 10. 190255 9,5 53 Stebbing, Gilchrist’s Mar. Invest., “S.A. Crust.,” part ii. p. 45. The Scotia obtained a specimen from the stomach of the fish Genypterus capensis. The nutritive part of the crustacean was being digested, but the chitinous sheath still clearly showed the specific characters briefly noted by the elder M1tnz- Epwarps, more fully detailed by Nicoter, and again with good figures set forth by AtpHonse Mitne-Epwarps. Locality.—Off Dassen Island, between False Bay and Saldanha Bay, South Africa ; depth from which the fish was taken, between 30 and 40 fathoms. - Larval genus Lysvoerichthus. 1886. Lystoerichthus, Brooks, Rep. Voy. ‘‘ Challenger,” vol. xvi. part xlv. pp. 16, 116. 1895. Lysierichthus, Hansen, Ergebn. Plunkton-Exp., G. c., p. 75. This genus contains the larval forms of Lysiosquilla, Latreille, 1825. Lysioerichthus edwardsii (Eydoux and Souleyet). Plate XX VB. 1837. ? Hrichthus aculeatus, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. ii. p. 501, pl. xxviii. fig. 10. 1841-1852. Hrichthus edwardsii, Eydoux and Souleyet, Voy. ‘“‘ La Bonite,” ‘“ Zool.,” vol. i. part ii. p. 260, pl. v. figs. 39-54. 1852. Erichthus palliatus, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., vol. xiii. p. 626, pl. xli. figs. 6, a-e. 1872. Hrichthoidina armata, Claus, Abhandl. k. Gesellsch. Wiss. Gottingen, vol. xvi. p. 121, figs. 7, 8. 1895. Lysiertchthus edwardsii, Hansen, Ergeln. Plankton-Exp., G. c., p. 75, pl. vii. fig. 4-4e, 5-5e. HaNnsEN, to whom the above synonymy is due, identifies these variously named larval forms as all belonging to the adult Lystosquilla glabriusculus (Lamarck), the most advanced stage being H. palliatus, Dana, and the least advanced E. armatus, Claus. The Scotza specimen shows all the spine-like projections proper to the * For other Stomatopoda collected by the Scotia see TATTERSALL, Tr. R. Soc. Hdin., vol. xlix. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 301 carapace and telson of these juvenile forms. It still carries the obliquely upward- pointing medio-dorsal spine not far from the hind margin of the carapace, this being a spine which has disappeared from the LH. palliatus stage. Nearly equal to it are the medio-lateral spines, the position of which is noted as distinguishing these larvee from those of Lysiosquilla scabricauda (Lamarck). In a strictly balanced dorsal view they are not visible. The narrow part of the rostrum is subequal in length to the postero-lateral spines, about 4 mm. in each case. The under margin of the rostrum has three microscopic spinules, the middle one the largest; its apical portion is finely serrate on both sides. Adjacent to the eyes is a very small tooth on each side, behind which the carapace widens considerably. A minute denticle points inward from the base of each postero-lateral process, and between these the pleon is clear of the carapace from the third segment. The postero-lateral angles of the fifth pleon segment are acute, as are those of the telsonic segment, of which the hind margin is finely pectinate and fringed with about forty tiny spinules, its centre indented ; the sides have each two teeth, which in this specimen are micro- scopic. The slender, strongly geniculate first maxilliped is minutely chelate, the small thumb having the inner margin distally finely denticulate ; some of the spines on the hand are pectinate. Locality.—Lat. 19° 59’ N., long. 23° 34’ W.; Station 18. ISOPODA EPICARIDEA. Family BopyRip#. Genus Bopyrina, Kossmann. 1881. Bopyrina, Kossmann, Zeitsehr. Wiss. Zool., vol. xxxv. p. 666. 1900. mS Bonnier, Z'rav. zool. Wimereua, vol. vill. p. 364. Bopyrina latreuticola (Gissler). 1845. Bopyrus squillarum, Goodsir (not Latreille), Ann. Nat. Hist., vol. xv. p. 75. 1882. Bopyroides latreuticola, Gissler, American Naturalist, vol. xvi. p. 591, text-figs. 6-8 on p. 593. 1895. 5 % H. J. Hansen, Ergeln. Plankton-Exp., ‘‘Isop.,” p. 44. 1900. Bopyrina latreuticola, Bonnier, Trav, zool. Wimereux, vol. viii. p. 370, text-fig. 61, a-c (from Gissler), 1913. Probopyrus latreuticola, Tattersall, Tr. R.S. Hdinb., vol. xlix. part iv. p. 391. BonniER says: “This genus is characterised, in the female, by the absence of pleural plates on the pleon, the rudimentary state of the pleopods, of which the last pairs have disappeared, as also the uropods, which, however, are still visible in the male.” Of the species here named no males were discovered. The female is less than 2 mm. in length, with the protuberance on one side near the end of the pereon, as delineated by GisstEr. For the locality see under Latreutes fucorum, p. 291. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 9). 42 302 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate XXIII. Coryrhynchus algicola, n. sp. 1.8. Natural size of specimen figured above in ventral aspect without limbs and in dorsal aspect with first and fifth peraeopods on the left and all five perzeopods on the right, and garniture of seaweed masking the second pereeopod and partly overlapping its neighbour; sete for the most part omitted, rv. Ventral aspect of rostrum with the right eye, the longitudinally folded first antenna, second antenna of the right side, and anterior margin of the buccal frame. r.d. Dorsal aspect of the rostrum with its hooked sete. Y. Distal margin of the pleon of the female. a.s. First antenna. m., ., mz. 1, mu, 2, mup, 1, 2, 3. The two mandibles; first and second maxille; first, second, and third maxillipeds. prp. 1. Fingers and part of palm of first pereeopod (cheliped). prp. 4. Sixth and seventh joints of fourth pereopod. plp. One of the pleopods of the female, with three of the multitudinous eggs adherent. All the figures of separate parts are magnified to a uniform scale. Puatr XXIV. Planes minutus (Linn.). . n.s. Dorsal view of a specimen natural size, with much magnified view of anterior portion below, and below this a similarly magnified view of the ventral aspect, excluding the limbs except the right cheliped, a.s., @2. The first and second antenne. mx. 1, ma. 2, map. 1, 2, 3. First and second maxille ; first, second, and third maxillipeds. prp. 5. Last four joints of the fifth pereeopod. plp. 1, plp. 4. Rami of the first and fourth pleopods, The separate parts are drawn to a uniform scale. Puate XXVa. Hymenosoma orbicularis, Desmarest. n.s. Dorsal view of female specimen, natural size. The other figures are much magnified, to a uniform scale. 0c., a.8., 4.1. Hye, first and second antenne. mxp. 1, 2,3. First, second, and third maxillipeds, prp. 5. Last two joints of the fifth pereeopod. The first antenna and the fifth perzeopod are from a female specimen, the other appendages from a male of the same size. Pirate XXYVs. Lysioerichthus edwardsti (Eydoux and Souleyet). n.s. Line indicating length of the specimen figured in lateral view. car. Dorsal view of carapace, with portions of the eyes, first and second antenne, and one of the medio- lateral spines projecting. pl. Pleon from the third segment, as seen projecting between the postero-lateral spines of the carapace ; part of hind margin much more highly magnified. a.s. First antenna, map. 1, 2, 3. First, second, and third maxillipeds, with distal part of first and third much more highly magnified. prp. 1. First perseopod. urp. One of the uropods. OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 303 Prats XXVIa. Calcinus talismani, A. Milne-Edwards and Bouvier. T. The telson. mx. 2, mxp. 1, 2, 3. Second maxilla; first, second, and third maxillipeds. plp. AGS verrucosus (Lambrus) . : : = 26h sayi (Lupa) . ; 2 263) | Schizopoda . Q . 298 | Xanthide . ; : 3 F a 262 scotiz (Phye), Plate XXX. . . 294 | Xanthodius . ; : oP e262 Appition to Noricrk or Mursta CRISTIMANUS (p. 272). The third, finely illustrated, edition of Cuvrer’s Regne Animal has two undated volumes on Crustacea. Each is entitled “Les Crustacés. Avec un Atlas, par M. Milne-Edwards,” with the additional word “Texte” in one volume, and “ Atlas” in the other. Internal evidence makes it completely certain that the text is by LATREILLE, who died in 1833. But it is also clear that the text is independent of the plates, since it mentions the genus Mursia (p. 54) without attaching to it any specific name, and on p. 262 names Caligus risculus, Leach, for pl. 77, figs. 1, 2, 3, figures which Mitne-Epwarps in his explanation of the plate distributes among three separate species of the genus. There may be evidence that pl. 13 of the atlas which records “ Mursica cristata, Latr.,’ was published earlier than 1837, the year in which MILNE- EDWARDS gives a reference to it under the name “ Mwrsia cristata,’ but the atlas itself is silent on the point.—T. R. R. 8., March 27, 1914. baa Sy: { & aa . « ’ ’ ; A ~ Dis pul ke Ser. b= Dube, Saleen he > ; a ae : ; ; ; ee oe La 7b eae Fi \ -- rn . bia, | didre : —% 2 hat ni *aa! al au ( (iy é ' 73 : ‘ 4 + iy ness wit we eet fy a f f P ioe my ; “ \za me ad el “i OE ob eee in) spies, | » Sys i. Sos 4 . : Re Ae). oe ee us ° 7 ‘ala & . 5 « - < { is . * Voli. Plate, XXII. Nine . STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. oy. Soc. Edin® A.RITCHLE & SON, EDIN® CORYRHYNCHUS ALGICOLA, nf. sp. R. R. STEBBING. oy. Soc. Edin*, Vol. L. Plate XXIV. STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. ?. R. STEBBING. | PLANES MINUTUS (Linn). pi aaa? alg Roy. Soc. Edin’, Vol. L. Plate XXV. STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. | A. RITCHIE & SOW, EDIN® ee). R. R. STEBBING. A.—HYMENOSOMA ORBICULARIS, Desmarest. B.—-LYSIOERICHTHUS EDWARDSII (Eyd. & Soul.). fi atig Roy. Soc. Edin®, | Vol. L. Plate XXVI. STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. Sa 7 SSS. Ss =a Sa . \ Xe SH ee ae = — SS a eas . R. R. STEBBING. A.—CALCINUS TALISMANI, A. M.-Edw. & Bouvier. | B.—EUPAGURUS FORCEPS (H. M. Edwards). A RITCHIE & SON. EDIN™ C.—PLAGUSIA CAPENSIS, de Haan. D.—EUPAGURUS MODICELLUS, n. sp. Vol. L. Plate XXVII sy. Soc. Edin’, A-REICHIE & SON, EDIN' n. sp. STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. GENNADAS KEMPI, v z ri o a 1) iid C 4 iF o se + 7 > [7 -f ae ie a ¢ ~*~ Vol.L. Plate XXVIII. 5. Roy. Soc. Edin’, STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. eR FN SN : SUSU s S OGRE SS een oe — — fee ee Ls : Wee = SS YK A- RITCHIE & SON, EDIN® PETALIDIUM FOLIACEUS, Bate. | T. R. R. STEBBING. A RITCHIE & SON, BDINY Vol. L. Plate XXIX. n. sp. STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. ~NAUTICARIS BRUCEI, toy. Soc. Eidin?, Re SEEBBING: h) . was en eve Tin, 9 7 a D 7 j — > ‘e : “el ' on te : ¥ . - ‘ OE Ww afi = ee w: ae 7 ‘ a ee ’ . & hs - i> > yer , Se - 1 a ; — por } - = . on ' * 7 ‘ i 7 ae ee: . . ms na : A - niles x i * “3 j * : ‘ ~=_ ? “ L - ‘ . i i * : é ¥ . . ° i . \ iy se ' y ' - i a + @ e i ‘ , F oy f ( - * ; ; . 1 : es 1 U ’ i ™, ~ ’ : fi , 4 % ‘ : i < Foch" c Vol. L. Plate XXX, S. Roy. Soc. Edint, it EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. - - STEBBING: STALK A. RITCHIE & SON, EDIN® . R. R. STEBBING. n. sp. PHYE SCOTIAE, Vol. L. Plate XXXL y. Soc. Edin*, a STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. Dr om a, x E A.RITCHLE & SON, EDIN PHYE RATHBUNA, nN. sp. R. STEBBING. Vol. L. Plate XXXIL SSVEh Se . SQN Se SOS BS N BEANS Ss ah a : SOR AREER B.—NEMATOCARCINUS LANCEOPES, Bate. A.—EUCOPIA, sp. Vv. Soc. Edin’, 5 C STEBBING: STALK-EYED CRUSTACEA MALACOSTRACA. . STEBBING. - ( 309 ) X.—The Aborigines of Tasmania. Part IJ]. The Hair of the Head compared with that of other Ulotrichi and with Australians and Polynesians. By Principal Sir William Turner, K.C.B., D.C.L., F.R.S., Knight of the Royal Prussian Order Pour le Mérite, Emeritus Professor of Anatomy. (With Figures in Text.) (Read March 2, 1914. MS. received March 4, 1914. Issued separately June 30, 1914.) CONTENTS. PAGE PAGE Introduction , : : : : : . 3809 | Australhans . : ; j : : 325, 332, 338 _ Tasmanians : : : ; : : 310, 334, 340 | Polynesians . : : : ; é , 5 Bei New Hebrides. : ‘ : é . 313, 335 | Maoris . 2 : ; : : . 327, 338 Solomon Islands . ; : : : . 317, 336 Easter Islanders. : : ; . 329, 340 New Guinea . ‘ ; . 5 317, 336 | Hair of Sealp, its Implantation, Form and Geelvink Bay. : c : ; s bo oly Structure . : é ae 6 6 eH) Papuan Gulf . : ; 6 ; : . 319 | Implantation . : : : : é . 330 Negros of West Africa. . . 319, 330,332, 336 | Formand Stracture . . . . . 3888 South Africa . : ‘ : : ‘ : . 3821 | Summary . ; i F : F : . 340 Bushmen é : : F : 321, 337, 341 | Melanesians . ‘ , : : : j . 3843 Hottentots . ; : 5 p . 322, 337 | Bibliography . : é : : F F . 346 Kaffirs . ; ; : 3 : . 323, 337. | Explanation of Figures . : ; : : sai Negritos F i ‘ : : ; : . 323 Andaman Islanders : : . 323, 337, 345 Semang . : ; : : : . 324, 338 | A number of years ago | began to form and arrange in the Anatomical Museum of the University of Edinburgh a collection of the hair of the head to illustrate the varieties in colour and character which exist in the Races of Men. In a classifica- tion of the races based on the colour and characters of the hair, anthropologists have usually adopted the suggestion made by Bory pe Sr VINCENT, and have divided them into two groups: Leiotrichi, with straight, smooth hair; and Ulotrichi, with woolly or frizzly hair. Hach of these again is capable of subdivision. In this memoir | intend especially to examine the Ulotrichi, which comprise two well-marked subdivisions. In one the hair is very short, and is arranged in small spiral tufts, the dividual hairs in which are twisted on each other, a mat-like arrangement of compact spiral locks closely set together being the result. In the other the hair is moderately long, the locks are slender, curled or spirally twisted in a part of their length and terminate at the free end in a frizzly bush-like arrangement. Ulotrichous hair is found in various African races, in the aborigines of Tasmania, New Guinea, the Melanesian Islands in the Pacific, in the Negritos of the Malay Peninsula and of some of the islands of the Asiatic Archipelago. The Leiotrichi are Australians, Polynesians, Mongols, Malays, Indians, Arabs, Esquimaux and Europeans. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 10). 43 310 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON TASMANIANS. The early voyagers Crozet and Captain Coox, and the French and British navigators and naturalists who followed them in the 18th and early years of the 19th century, as well as the European residents in Tasmania in later years who saw the last of the surviving aborigines, described the hair as black, frizzled or woolly, usually in short locks, though sometimes forming separate slender ringlets; with abundant beard and whiskers. The statements of these observers have been summarised by H. Line Rorx in his comprehensive work on the Aborigines of Tasmania,* and in my memoir on these people.j This memoir attracted the attention of Mr Liye Rotu, who with great courtesy and liberality forwarded to me in 1908 specimens of the hair of the head of Tasmanians in his possession ; also hair of aboriginal Australians from Queensland for purposes of comparison. As the hair had been cut from the scalp, its full length and the mode of implanta- tion could not be determined. The specimens were accompanied by letters or certificates of identity, and permission was granted to describe their characters and to add them to the collection in the Anatomical Museum of the University. Mr Line Roru’s specimens were as follows :— No. 1.—Hair from the head of a Tasmanian aboriginal chief. This specimen was presented in 1898 to Mr H. Line Rota by Mr James B. Watxer of Hobart, with the following history :—It was cut from the head of one of the chiefs who accompanied G. A. Ropinson on his “ pacific mission.” They visited Mr Pike’s house at Park Farm, Jericho, sometime about 1832 or later, and Mr Pike’s daughter cut a lock from the chief's head. The specimen consisted of a few loose hairs, the longest of which measured 4 cm.; each of which was curled and black in colour. They are stated to have been pulled out of a lock of hair 17 cm. long and 3 mm. thick, which formed a spiral curl so compact that long hairs could not be extracted from it. The lock was coated with ochre, or a clayey substance. No. 2.—Mr WatkeEr also sent later in 1898 a scrap of Truganini’s hair, accom- panied by a copy of the following certificate :—‘I certify that the accompanying is a lock of Lallah Rook’s hair (the last of the aborigines), presented by her to Mr F. Howett. (Signed) J. 8. Danprinex, Oyster Cove, 1st April 1872” (fig. 1). The original certificate is in the possession of JoHN MAcFARLANE, who was present at Oyster Cove on Ist April 1872, and at whose request the lock of Truganini’s hair was obtained and the certificate given. The lock consisted of a few short hairs from 3 to 4 cm. long; it formed a close spiral at its middle, but was looser at the periphery. The colour was so dark that it might be called black (fig. 2, A). No. 3.—A lock of hair labelled “‘ Hair of Mrs Thos. Cochrane Smith, the so-called last of the Tasmanians.” Mr Line Rota in Appendix G to his work gave three * Halifax, England, 1899. + “The Oraniology, Racial Affinities and Descent of the Aborigines of Tasmania,” Zrans. Roy. Soc. Edin., part i. vol. xlvi. p. 365, 1908 ; part ii. The Skeleton, vol. xlviii. p. 413, 1910. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 311 figures from photographs of Mrs T. Cochrane Smith, and recognised that, although her facial characters partook largely of those of the Tasmanians, she was not a pure aboriginal, but was of mixed blood. The lock was a distinct curl but was not spirally twisted; its length was 8 to 9 cm., but when stretched it measured 11°5 em. ; its breadth was about 8 mm. The hairs varied in colour from a darkish brown to pale brown, and some were greyish. Fig. 1.—Tasmanian, Truganini. No. 4.—I have subsequently obtained from another source, of undoubted authen- ticity, some hairs of a male Tasmanian attached to a fragment of the scalp. The hairs emerged close together and formed a lock 4 to 5 em. long. They were distinct and wavy for a short distance, but soon aggregated together and became arranged as a compact spiral coil 2 cm. long, beyond which they again separated, and were curly and frizzly at the free ends (fig. 2,B). A few delicate hairs, about 6 mm. long, ended close to the scalp in pointed ends; they were so short as not to reach the spiral portion of the lock. The dried hair was deep brownish black in colour. The illustrations in Line Roru’s volume reproduced drawings and photographs of aborigines in some of which the hair was short and the curly tufts were not unlike 312 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON the specimen above described.* In others, again, the hair was much longer and formed slender compact ringlets which hung pendulous in front of the forehead AD B Fic, 2.—A, lock from Truganini; B, from No. 4. and down the side of the ears and cheeks.t Several museums possess a cast of the bust of a Tasmanian man with this character, and the Anatomical Museum of the University is indebted to Professor ANDERSON Stuart for a copy of one.t In it Fic. 3.—Tasmanian, from cast of a bust. the ringlets were arranged so as to fall from the crown of the head, either forwards, backwards or to the sides (fig. 3). They varied in length from 6 to 20 cm. Those in front concealed the forehead, and the longer ringlets, about * See pp. 9, 33, 41, and Appendix G—Truganini. + See pp. 17, 25 of his work. t The cast is apparently a copy of a bust modelled by Dumoutier, Atlas to Voyage of Dumont d Urville, 1830. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANTA, 313 12 cm., reached the eyebrows and the root of the nose; those on the back and sides of the head were the longest and concealed the ears, cheeks, back of the neck and reached the shoulders. : New HEprRIDEs. Melanesian aborigines with dark-brown or black skins, dolichocephalic heads, and with stature in the men of about 5 feet 6 inches inhabit this group of islands. Captain Cook visited them in 1774.* He described the men of Mallicolo as having long heads, tlat faces, hair mostly black or brown, short and curly. The people of haar : a Sp Fic. 4.—New Hebrides, Tanna. Krromango had the hair crisp and curly and somewhat woolly. He figured the head of a man of Tanna, and said the hair was black and brown, tolerably long, very crisp and curly, separated into slender locks around which a thin vegetable fibre was wound to about an inch from the free ends. The locks were somewhat thicker than whip-cord, and looked like a parcel of small strings hanging down from the crown of the head to the back and shoulders. PricHarp has also figured + from a drawing by Captain ERSKINE a similar arrangement of the hair on a native of Aneityum. The Museum is fortunate in possessing several specimens from the natives of the * Second Voyage, vol. ii. p. 78, with plate. + Natural History of Man, vol. ii. pl. xxxvii. An account of Captain Ersxkinn’s voyage is given in his Journal of a Cruise among the Western Islands of the Pacific, London, 1853. 314 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON New Hebrides, which were presented in 1892 by the Reverend James H. Lawrig, for many years a missionary at Aneityum.* On the island Efate the hair was worn short by both sexes. On Tanna, Aniwa and Aneityum, and to a limited extent on Futuna, the men dressed the hair in the manner described by Coox. Years of attentive dressing were required to obtain a coiffure such as Cook described. The practice is said to have ceased under the influence of the missionaries. The collection con- sisted of seven specimens obtained from different persons :— No. 1.—Kight distinct locks from a man, the longest of which was 30 em. (12 inches). They had evidently been cut close to the scalp, 2 inches from which a thin narrow vegetable fibre had been wound tightly around the lock for from 16 to 17 cm., beyond which the hair was free, either loosely or compactly spiral or frizzly, op AwWutaowi lr yt a Fic. 5.—New Hebrides. Three locks from No. 1. and the free end was 5 to 8 mm. broad (fig. 5). The hair was brownish black, and varied somewhat in the depth of its tint. No. 2.—Adult male. The hair in proximity to the scalp was matted and beyond the tangle seven slender locks about 10 cm. long (4 inches), 4 to 5 mm. broad, had been isolated and carefully plaited for about two-thirds of their length, the terminal third being spirally curled and frizzled. The tangled hair was dark brown, but it was brownish yellow in the lock itself as if artificially discoloured. No. 3.—A bundle of hairs from a native of Futuna Island, around which a white band had been fastened. A division into locks was indicated though not complete. The hair was frizzly and showed loose spirals. In colour it was dark brownish black (fig. 7). No. 4.—From an adult male; No. 5 from a young man, et. 18. Both were matted and spirally curled but not in definite locks. The colour was brownish or black. * “The New Hebrideans” in Scottish Geographical Magazine, June 1892, vol. viii. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 315 No. 6.—Adult female, a number of locks, to some extent matted at their scalp ends, but capable of being drawn asunder, when their arrangement in loose spiral Fic. 6.—New Hebrides, Tanna. Three locks from No. 2. curls about 7 cm. long was seen. When stretched the length of the locks was about 13 cm. (5 inches). At the sides and free ends the locks were dishevelled and frizzly. The colour was dark brown and black. Fic. 7.—New Hebrides, Futuna. No. 3. Seven locks, matted at the deep ends, but with well- No. 7.—Girl, ‘set. about 14. The locks, without being marked loose spiral curls frizzly at the sides and ends. stretched, were from 5 to 7 cm. long, but could be elongated to 9 cm. Colour black with brown tint. No. 8.—Some years ago Dr GreorGE PorteER presented to me the coitture of 316 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON a Kanaka labourer who had worked on a sugar plantation in Queensland. It was 17 inches in height and had projected upwards as a top-knot from the crown of the head.* It consisted of 834 slender locks tied together about the middle with a tape to form a bundle. The hairs in each lock, where it had been cut from the scalp, were free, but each lock was then tightly wound by a narrow band of vegetable fibre for several inches, beyond which the hairs again separated, were loosely spiral and frizzly at their free ends. The hair next the scalp and that enveloped by the fibre was brownish black in colour, but the frizzly ends were auburn-tinted, apparently bleached (fig. 8). The locks closely resembled No. 1 Fic. 8.—Probably from native of New Hebrides. No. 8. in the Revd. James Lawrte’s collection from the New Hebrides. In their arrange- ment as a top-knot, the coiffure to some extent resembled the one figured by Dr Pricuarp,t said to be from a native of Ombai,f in which, however, the hair did not seem to be dressed in separate locks, though frizzly at the free ends. I did not learn the name of the island of which the Kanaka labourer was a native, but Mr Lawrie stated in his paper that the New Hebrides is a source of supply for the (Jueensland plantations. In his account of the people of New Caledonia, an island to the west of the New Hebrides, Captain Cook recognised their resemblance to the aborigines of Tanna, * Report, British Association, Edinburgh meeting, p. 906, 1892. + Natural History of Man, vol. ii. p. 441, 1855. + Ombai is an island, east of Java and west of Timor. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. S17 in the colour of the skin as well as in the black colour of the hair and beard. The hair, coarse and strong, was sometimes tied up on the crown of the head, whilst at others a large lock was worn on each side. It was much frizzled and mop-like, and at first looked as if it resembled that of a negro, but it was, he said, really very different. In some of the men, however, and in all the women the hair was cut into short locks. SoLomon ISLANDS. These islands are occupied by Melanesians. Many years ago Dr J. C. Cox of Sydney presented to me two skulls from Rubiana, the cephalic index of which, 72 and 70 respectively, was dolichocephalic.* The scalp with hair had been partially retained on one skull. The hair was black and curly, as a rule from 3 to 6 em. long and seldom arranged in locks. On the vertex, however, some short locks had been preserved, which projected from 2 to 3 em.; they formed loose spirals, the hairs of which could be stretched to 5 or 6 cm. A few hairs attached to each other at the scalp ends were loosely curled, and the longest when stretched attained the length of 23 cm. Although it is customary to speak of the hair of the Melanesians as black, it has not the depth of tint one sees in Negros, Hottentots, Mongols, Indians, Esquimaux and Australians, but has a dull brownish admixture, which is more noticeable when the hair is held to the light. Sometimes the hair is of a lighter brown colour, a change which is possibly to some extent due to a partial bleaching caused by lime and clay with which the natives dress the hair. New GUwvINEA. The attention of the early voyagers to New Guinea was at once attracted by the magnificent mop-like arrangement of the hair in some tribes of Papuans. The appearance has been frequently described and figured, more especially in the aborigines in the south-east of the Island and on the Papuan Gulf, which together form British New Guinea, in whom the coiffure may be 3 feet or more in circum- ference. In the Fly River district and in Dutch or Western New Guinea the hair is kept much shorter, from 4 to 5 inches, and is plaited into pencil-like cords or ridges. .The free ends of the hair whether in mops or pencils are frizzled, from which character it is said the name Papuan is derived from a Moluccan word signifying frizzled (fig. 9). Geeluink Bay, Dutch New Guinea.—The late Dr A. B. Mnver presented to * Challenger Report on Human Crania, pp. 98, 96, part xxx., 1884. + For recent descriptions of the arrangement of the hair in the people of New Guinea, consult Sir Wa. Mac- GREGOR, british New Guinea, Country and People, London, 1897 ; CHaLMERS and GILL, Work and Adventure in Neu Guinea, London, 1885; Brown, Pioneer Missionary and Haplorer, London, 1908; SrLigmann, The Melanesians of New Guinea, Cambridge, 1910; Wotuasron, Pygmies and Papuans, London, 1912 ; Captain Rawutne, Land of the New Guinea Pygmies, London, 1913 ; Henry Newron, In Far New Guinea, London, 1914. TRANS. ROY. SOC, EDIN., VOL, L. PART II. (NO. 10). 44 318 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON me in 1902 a specimen which he had obtained in 1873, from a Papua boy, six to seven years old, at Rubi, Geelvink Bay. It consisted of two locks, each of which was again Fic. 10.—Locks, New Guinea, Geelvink Bay. divided into two (fig. 10). A lock was 18 em. long (7 inches) and 3 mm. broad. At the scalp end the hairs were curly, but in the lock itself they were twisted into a THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 319 compact pencil-like bundle, at the free end of which the hairs were again wavy.* At the scalp the hairs were brownish black, but they changed to reddish brown in the lock itself.t Another specimen consisting of separate hairs was also given by Dr Meyer: in it the longest hairs, when straightened, were about 17 em., and their curly and wavy character was distinct. The colour was brown-black. Papuan Gulf—I am indebted to Professor A. C. Happon for two cuttings of Fic. 11.—Lock, Papuan Gulf. hair, one of which he took off a dance mask, whilst the other was removed from an artificial wig, which had probably formed part of a dance mask. In the latter the hairs had been cut very short; they were loosely matted together and were spirally coiled. In the former the hairs were partly matted and curly, but one lock was distinct, between 6 and 7 cm. long and curled (fig. 11). Both specimens were brownish black in colour. NEGROs. The hairs on the head of the African negro and his descendants in America and elsewhere are arranged in short, compact, black tufts or locks, about 5 mm. in diameter, the hairs in which are spirally coiled. The arrangement is best observed from the norma verticalis of the head (fig. 12). Over a large part of the surface the locks were closely compacted together like a mat, and the hairs in given areas, as they emerged from the scalp, at once proceeded to form the constituent parts of their respective tufts. On the sides of the head the tufts were further apart, and the surface of the scalp between the locks was hairy, equally with that in superposi- tion to which the locks were situated, so that no spots of noticeable size bare of hair were seen. Locks of hair, conformable to this character, constitute the appearance to which the term woolly was originally applied and is the typical arrangement. The Museum contains a characteristic negro’s head from which the above descrip- tion has been written; also several locks of hair from other individuals which have * Meyer, A. B., Mitth. Anthro. Ges., Wien, vol. iv. Nos. 3, 4, 1874. + Rich. Neuhauss has written in Zettsch. fur Ethnologie, 45th Jahrgang, Heft iii., 1913, a paper on the Red Blond Hair of the Papuans. He recognises bleaching of the hair by lime, but states that in addition to black pigment granules a diffused reddish and yellow substance is present in the hair of Papuans. Blond hairs may sometimes co- exist along with black hairs. 320 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON been cut close to the scalp. The locks in their natural disposition projected about 13 cm. (4% inch) above the surface of the scalp; the individual hairs when put on the Fic. 12.—Norma verticalis, scalp of Negro. stretch were elongated to about 5 cm. (2 inches). The shortness of the lock was due to the rapidity of the spiral and its consequent compression. To some extent the Fic. 13.—Locks of hair from two Negros. free ends of the hairs in adjacent locks may become entangled with each other (fig. 13). It should be noted that the arrangement is natural to the race and is not produced artificially. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 321 SoutH AFRICA. This part of the continent is occupied by races of dark-skinned, woolly-haired aborigines (fig. 14). I am indebted to Dr lan Ravsenuemmer, from South Africa, a graduate of the University, for a number of specimens of the hair of Bushmen, Hottentots and Kaffirs, which had been cut from the heads of living persons. Fic. 14.—Bush. Bushman.—No. 1. A black, single compact lock 3°6 cm. long, which stretched to 5 em. (2 inches) ; its greatest breadth was only 2 mm. and it had a wavy outline. It was composed of hairs closely coiled on each other and spirally arranged (figs. 15, 32). No. 2. Bushwoman.—A number of short locks loosely aggregated, which when Fic. 15.—Bush, partly matted, partly separate locks. drawn asunder measured from 1°5 to 2 cm. in length and 3 to 4 mm. broad. The individual hairs were spirally wound in the lock, and the collective arrangement formed a mat of hair in which the spiral locks could be recognised (fig. 15). No. 3. From an old Bushwoman. A similar mat-like arrangement of short locks, the constituent parts of which were formed of spirally coiled hairs, whose free ends were to some extent intertwined. The colour was greyish brown, obviously from senile changes. 322 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON The hair in each specimen was distinctly woolly, though longer in the man than in the woman, and the individuality of the lock was more distinct. The locks were recognisably smaller than in the negro. Hottentots.—Hair from four Hottentot women. Each specimen had been dressed Fic. 16.— Hottentot with plaited locks. in artificially three-plaited locks. They varied in length from 6 cm. (2°83 inches) to 30 em. (11#inches). The broadest lock was dishevelled at the end cut from the scalp, where it was 3 cm. broad ; this was succeeded by the plaited part 5°8 em. long, which Fic. 17.—Zulu Kaffir, at first was 1°5 em. broad, but at the free end, where the plaiting ceased, was only 8 mm. broad (fig. 16). The individual hairs were curly but not definitely spiral. The colour was rich black in all these specimens, except in one which was dark brown in colour, slender in its whole length and about 4 mm. broad. The longest lock was of almost equal breadth, 7 mm., throughout its entire length. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 323 In addition to these specimens were some tufts of hair from children, which con- sisted of short, spirally curled locks about 25 mm. long, but capable of being stretched to about 35 mm. Their free ends were to some extent intermingled with each other. The colour was deep brown, almost black. A cutting of hair marked “ Bastard Hottentot,” from a boy, et. 3, was included in the collection. It was not formed of curly spiral locks, but consisted of almost straight hairs 3 to 4 cm. long and dark brown in colour. The Bastards are the children of mixed black and white parents. Kaffirs—A specimen from a woman, et. 35. It consisted of fine, short, com- pact, spirally curled locks, the hairs of which were to some extent intermingled so as to form a loosely aggregated mat. The locks were black and more slender than in the adult negro (fig. 18). Three specimens of the hair of children from ten months Fie. 18, — Kaffir locks of hair. to three years of age were also received; their character and arrangement closely corresponded to that of the woman. The Kafr hair from its short, spirally curled locks and their close arrangement should without doubt be classed as woolly (fig. 17). The Hottentots, on the other hand, had relatively long hair, capable of being artificially plaited into ornamental locks, an example of which as above recorded was about 12 inches long (fig. 16). They are not regarded as a pure race. NEGRITOS. Pyemy or dwarf races, shy in their habits, living in small communities and dis- tinguished by short stature, black or brown-black skins, woolly hair, brachycephalic or mesaticephalic skulls, are met with im some tropical countries. Andaman Islanders.—Surgeon BRaNDER, medical officer at Port Blair, stated * that they shaved the head, the operation being performed by women, who used their milk as a shaving soap. Locks of hair are therefore somewhat difficult to obtain, and the Museum possesses only two specimens of brownish-black hair, the longer * Proc. Roy. Soc. Kdin., vol. x. p. 415, 1880. 324 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON of which is 5°3 cm., though it can be stretched to 9 cm. (3% inches); its average breadth is about 3 mm. (fig. 19). Each lock consisted of a compact spiral bundle of hairs, which disengaged themselves at the sides and free ends, and assumed the form of short narrow ringlets. I owe to the late Dr JosepH Doucati, who had gained the confidence of the natives, a photograph of a group of thirty islanders of both sexes, in some of whom the hair was present, though in others the scalp was bare Fie, 19.—Andaman Islands locks of hair. as if shorn. The dwarf stature is well seen in contrast with that of Dr Dovucatt, who was a tall man, standing in the group (fig. 34). Semang.—A tribe living in the interior of the Malay Peninsula described by NeEtson ANNANDALE and H. C. Roprnson.* The Museum is indebted to the former for a lock of hair of a member of the Hami tribe, Jalor. It was black in colour, woolly, only 2°2 em. long, but could when stretched be somewhat elongated. The individual hairs were spirally twisted (fig. 20). Fic, 20.—Semang locks of hair. The Museum does not contain specimens of the hair of the Aetas of the Philippine Islands or of the pygmies in Central Africa. The question of the presence of Negrito pygmies in New Guinea, which long formed a subject of discussion, has now been definitely settled. In 1910 Captain Rawiine and Mr A. F. R. Wottaston dis- covered and described in their respective volumes of travel a tribe of pygmies in the Mimika River district at Tapiro, near the Nassau Mountains in Dutch New Guinea,t with short, black woolly hair, black whiskers and beard, chocolate-coloured * Fasciculi Malayensis, “ Anthropology,” part i., 1903. + See their books on the New Guinea Pygmies and Papuans, op. cit., p. 317, footnote, and Bibliography. THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANTA. 325 skin, wide nostrils, thick lips, brachycephalic heads, and average stature in the men 4 feet 9 inches. At the same time a Dutch expedition, engaged in exploring the North-West River district, situated east of the Mimika River, met with a similar tribe of pygmies in a village on a slope of the Goliath mountain. A careful description of the people was written by A. C. pE Kock, surgeon to the expedition, which has added to our know- ledge of the New Guinea pyemies.* A. J. P. v. p. BRoEK in a recent article { has compared DE Kocxk’s written descriptions with those of the English explorers, and has reproduced photographs of the people, whose physical characters strictly conform to those of other pygmy races. What is especially interesting in connection with this memoir is a description and drawing of the hair of the head and the pubic region, in both of which the locks were slender and had a typical spiral twist. The scalp lock closely resembled that of the Andaman islander drawn in fig. 19. The individual hairs were oval in transverse section, the longer diameter 105s, the shorter 75, whilst the colour was generally dark brown. I now propose to compare the Ulotrichous hair of the Tasmanians, Melanesians and Papuans with the Leiotrichous Australians, Maoris and other Polynesians, their neighbours in the Pacific region. AUSTRALIANS. It is generally acknowledged that in the aborigines of Australia the hair is black, relatively long, frequently straight, or with coarse natural curls, neither woolly nor artificially dressed in pencil-like ringlets, nor expanded into a mop-like mass, nor frizzled at the free ends (figs. 21,22). The University collection is indebted to Dr Wm. Ramsay Smita for heads from South Australia on which the hairy scalp had been retained. In all, the hair was black and straight, each hair had its independent course, and was not artificially dressed. In a man the hair did not exceed 4 cm. in length ; in two women the length in one was 6 cm., in the other 10 cm. (4 inches). A cutting of hair of a woman from Benalla, Victoria, was in wavy locks, 15 cm. long, which could be stretched to 18 cm. (7 inches). Another specimen presented by Dr FREDERICK PaGE was cut from the scalp of a native of Victoria plains, West Australia ; it was a loose curl, 10 cm. long, which could be stretched to 18 cm. I am indebted to Mr Line Roru for cuttings of hair from the aborigines of North Queensland, collected by his brother Dr Watrer HE. Roru. The specimens were 38 in number, 29 of which were from adult males, 8 from adult females, and 1 from an infant three weeks old. They had been obtained from natives of the Morehead, Nor- mandy, Jack, M“Torr, Johnstone, Batavian, Musgrave and Lynd River districts, from * Tydschrift van het Koninklyk Nederlandsch aardrykskundig Genootschap. + “Ueber Pygmaen in Niederlaindisch Siid-Neu-Guinea,” Zectschrift fiir Hthnologie, 45th Jahrgang, p. 23, Berlin, 1913. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 10). 45 326 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON Capes Melville and Grafton, Barrow Point, Princess Charlotte Bay, Palm Isles and from the Coen, Herberton, and Chillagoe districts. In all the hair was black, though in some deeper in tint than in others. In the men the locks, usually from 4 to 8 cm. long, frequently consisted of a single loose curl, though in others the hairs were straight. In the women, again, the hair was wavy and loosely curled ; two specimens measured about 25 cm. (10 inches) when the curl was extended. The breadth of the curl in the specimens varied from 7 to 16 mm. In one specimen the lock, 10 cm. long, was formed of straight hair. The hair of the infant, said to be three weeks old, was 4 cm. long and showed a tendency to curl. Fic. 21.—Australian. 8. > The specimens of hair from North Queensland shared, therefore, with those which I have described from South Australia, Victoria and West Australia in the common character of colour, in being either straight, or wavy, or in loose curls. In Dr WaLTER Roru’s collection from such stations in Cape York Peninsula as the Normandy, Batavian, Musgrave and Lynd districts, the Coen, Capes Melville and Grafton and Princess Charlotte Bay, special attention was paid to the characters of the hair, as, from the proximity of Cape York to New Guinea, a migration of Papuans to the north of Australia might have been possible and a consequent intermixture with the Australian aborigines occasioning modifications in the hair. The natives of these stations showed, however, no sign of hair frizzly or woolly in its character. None of the specimens above referred to gave evidence of artificial dressing of the hair. A specimen from a native of Pink River, near Charlotte Waters, presented by THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. aon Dr Ramsay SmirH, consisted, however, of two locks, 30 cm. and 20 cm. long respec- tively. Each was formed of three strands plaited together, and in each strand the 5! Fic, 22.—Australian. 9. hairs were twisted on each other, the lock was very slender, only 3 mm. broad. From the length of the locks the specimen was probably from the head of a woman. POLYNESIANS. By this term one understands the Maoris of New Zealand and the aborigines of eroups of islands across the Pacific from Tonga in the west to Easter Island, and as far north as the Sandwich Islands. Their chief physical characters are yellowish- brown skin, brachycephalic heads, average stature of men 5 feet 9 or 10 inches, hair black, long, straight, wavy or curly. Maoris.—The University Museum contains six dried heads, the faces of which have been tattooed and the hair of the scalp preserved. In one, xxxi. A, No. 51, that of a chief elaborately tattooed, the hair was parted along the middle and fell in large locks down the sides and back of the head and neck; at first it was wavy and it then formed loose curls which had reached the shoulders (fig. 23). The strands 328 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON of hair were from 30 to 37 cm. long and constituted a remarkable covering for the head. The lips and chin had a well-grown moustache and short beard. Nos. 47, 49 Fic. 23.—Maori, New Zealand. No. 51. and 50 had hair which at first was almost straight but it ended in loose curls. In No. 48 the hair was scanty and consisted of a median sagittal strip with a lateral Fic. 24,—Maori, New Zealand. No, 52 strip on each side following the line of the coronal suture. In No. 52, a female, the hair at the parting was thin; otherwise it was arranged in large loose curls, which, when uncoiled, were from 5 to 6 cm. long, but could be elongated to from 10 to THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANIA. 329 12 cm. In another specimen, No. 55, in the Museum, the hair had been removed from the scalp. Captain Cook described * the Maoris as he saw them in 1770. They were rather above the ordinary size, of a very dark-brown colour, the face tattooed, black hair, thin black beards and white teeth. In the men the hair was long, sometimes combed on to the crown of the head; in the women it was at times long, at others cut short. Numerous figures of the tattooed heads of Maoris are given by Major-General Rostey in his profusely illustrated work,{ a few from life, though mostly from dried heads, in some of which the hair was short and straight ; in others a little longer and in large loose curls; in others long, wavy and ending in loose curls. In no sense could the hair be described as short and woolly in the sense in which the term is used for the hair in the Negro, or long and frizzled as in Melanesians. Easter Island.—This island was visited by Captain Cook in 1774,§ whe gave a portrait of a man and a woman. He described the hair as black, worn long by the women, and sometimes tied on the crown of the head; the men had the hair of the head and beard cut short. They tattooed the skin of both face and body, and in colour, features and language bore affinity to the islanders further west. Later visitors have also called the hair black or dark brown, straight, smooth or wavy. In 1902 Dr A. B. Meyer presented me with a coil of hair from a native of this island.|| Its colour was dark brown approaching to black ; it was neither curly nor frizzled but smooth and silky. Its characters, therefore, were Polynesian and not Melanesian. The skin, it is said, was not black, but light brown when not exposed to the sun. Hair or Scarp, its ImpLantaTION, ForM aND STRUCTURE. The hair in man, in its mode of implantation in the scalp and in its form and structure, has been well described in text-books on histology. The descriptions have been chiefly based on the study of the hair in Kuropeans. Several copiously illus- trated works in which an account is given of the form and structure of the hair in a few non-European races, and in certain mammals, have also been published, viz. :— W. Waupeyer, Atlas der menschlichen und tterischen Haare, so wie der aéhnlichen Fasergebilde, Lahr, 1884. Hans FrigpentHal, “Entwicklung, Bau und Entstehung der Haare,” Lieferung IV., Bedtrdge zur Naturgeschichte des Menschen, Jena, 1908. Hans FrisventuatL, Tierhaaratlas, Jena, 1911. Gustav Fritscn, Das Haupthaar und seine Bildungsstdtte bet den Rassen des Menschen, Berlin, 1912. * Journal of the First Voyage, edited by Captain WHARTON, p. 218, London, 1893. + In vol. iii. of HawkeSwortw’s Edition of Cook’s First Voyage (1773), plate xiii. p. 49, a tattooed head is depicted with the hair dressed in this way. { Moko or Maori Tattooing, London, 1896. Fig. 172 is very like my fig. 23 on p. 328. § Second Voyage, vol. i. Plates Nos. xxv., xlvi., p. 290, 1777. || Abhand. wu. Bericht, Konig. Zool. u. Anthr. Museums zu Dresden, Bd. ix., 1901. 330 PRINCIPAL SIR WILLIAM TURNER ON Implantation.—An important character in the growth of the hair in the scalp was recognised by the late Mr Cuartes STtEewart,* who compared the implanta- tion of the hair in the European with that in the Negro, and who stated that “remarkably curved so that they commonly described a half circle,” whilst in the European the follicular hair was in the latter the hair and its follicle were straight. This observation on the follicular hair in the Negro was verified by Dr ANDERSON StuaRrT,t though the amount of the curve was, he said, not more than about a quarter circle; further, he associated the curve with the curl of the hair, which gave to the hair in the Negro its woolly character after being extruded through the skin. Frivscu in his recently published treatise has added materially to our knowledge of the implantation of hair and the direction of its follicle in various races of men. He has described numerous sections through the scalp, perpendicular as well as transverse to the surface. Thus in Europeans, Chinese, Indians, Javanese and Fellahs the follicle with its included hair was directed vertically, or almost vertically, to the surface of the skin: but in other Huropeans, in Fellahs, Arabs, Abyssinians and Japs the direction was oblique but not curved. In Admiralty Islanders again and other Melanesians, in Papuans, in the Herero Bantu people, and more strongly in the Hottentots he saw the follicle with its included hair markedly curved. The vertical and in some degree slightly obliquely directed hair follicles were thus assoei- ated with straight-haired races, whilst the curved follicles were characteristic of the woolly and frizzly haired people. The inference drawn by ANDERSON StuaRrT from his observation on a Negro has therefore been confirmed by more extended enquiries. I have examined the implantation of the scalp hair of the Negro in both vertical and transverse sections. When the section was perpendicular to the surface the hairs and follicles could seldom be seen in their entire length ; they were cut across obliquely sometimes more than once. It was obvious, therefore, that the hairs did not pass straight from the papilla of origin to the place of exit on the surface, but had a curved direction, which varied in its degree in different hairs. It seemed as if the curve of the hair increased in rapidity as it approached the surface, so that it emerged at a more or less acute angle to the surface of the scalp (fig. 25). The deep end of the follicle had a characteristic appearance. Instead of being vertical like the papilla it was usually abruptly bent to one side, as if, from the beginning, an oblique or curved direction was thus given to the growth of hair and follicle, which, together with the more rapid curve near its emergence, contributed to the production of the spiral turn of the woolly locks on the scalp of the Negro. Frirscu figured the hair in the scalp in several tribes of African Bantus and Papuans in which the direction of the hair follicle was like that above described, and the bend in the follicle in the Hottentots was so marked that its direction * “Note on the Scalp of a Negro,” Royul Microscopical Society, January 1, p. 54, 1873, + Journal of Anat, and Phys., vol. xvi. p. 362, 1882, THE ABORIGINES OF TASMANTA. 331 near the deep end was almost horizontal, and the scimitar-like curve of the hair approached half a circle. Vertical sections through the scalp, which he figured in the straight hair of Chinese and Europeans, contrasted, in the vertical or slightly oblique direction of the hair follicles, with the curved follicles of the woolly-haired races. I noted that a sebaceous gland was situated close to each hair follicle about opposite the juncture of its middle and upper third, and it reached almost to the pigmented Malpighian layer of the epidermis. With a curved follicle the gland was next its concave aspect. A band of non-striped muscle, the arrector pili, seen in many sections passed obliquely from the superficial part of the cutis to end in the hair follicle in proximity to the sebaceous gland. _ The sections through the cutis of the Negro, parallel to the plane of the surface, varied in appearance in accordance with the distance from the epidermis. At its deepest part the closed ends of the hair follicles were interspersed with coils of sweat glands and small collections of fat cells in the connective tissue. The follicles were cut across either transversely or obliquely. In some cases the section passed through the cells of the root sheath and bulb before cornification, in others the section was through the deep end of the hair itself. In each case the root sheath of the hair was seen to consist of an outer division lining the follicle, and an inner division investing the bulb, or the hair. The bulb, approximately circular in section, was composed of small nucleated cells somewhat pigmented. The inner and outer root sheaths in the plane of the bulb were of almost equal thickness, but in relation to the hair the outer sheath was distinctly thicker than the inner. The cells of the inner sheath were nucleated and elongated into short columns. In the outer sheath the nucleated cells were more numerous, and those most external formed a distinct layer next the wall of the follicle. In this plane of section the follicles with the contained hairs were mostly single, though some were in pairs placed side by side (fig. 27). Coiled tubes of the sweat glands, with their cellular contents, and fat lobules were situated close to the hair follicles. In transverse sections, not quite so deep, fewer single hairs were seen and the arrangement in pairs was more general. One of the twin hairs with its follicle was always distinctly larger than the other. The amount of difference in size may be expressed in the following figures: larger twin hair 0'0575, smaller 0°0425 ; larger twin 0°06, smaller 0°03. Each hair, or a pair of twins, was enclosed in a ring-like circle of connective tissue. Occasionally the section of the hair in its follicle was circular, but in most cases the sides were more or less flattened, with one side indeed somewhat indented, so that the section was ovoid, or slightly kidney shaped. \) VN Sees an itor eeeeeren eee ; oi 3 LY , (0) ditt RR OO OY) WRN ate 4 Y EX RR > KY Cees: a Y Text-Fie. 7,—Diagrams illustrating the departure of the leaf-trace in Thamnopteris Schlechtendalii, Kichw., sp. (After GwyNnz-VAUGHAN and Kinston.) though the pinna-trace comes from the middle of the arm (cf, text-fig. 8, b), just from the position from which the pinna-trace goes off in Dineuron. Unfortunately THE PINNA-TRACE IN THE FERNS. 367 for the sake of minute comparisons with the living Ferns, these Zygopterideze seem to have possessed four orthostichies of primary pinne. The pinna-traces which we have mentioned presently divide into two parts each, so that these Ferns must not be examined too critically for prototypes of leaf-trace. But there is at least a constancy in the position of origin of the pinna-trace-bars, as GorpoN terms them. They come from the margins of the solid leaf-traces just from the points nearest to the appendages which it is their work to supply. Kipston and GWwyNNE-VAUGHAN have classified the Zygopterideze according to the presence of a single row of appendages (“pinnee”) on each side of the main rachis or of two such rows. Those genera already mentioned fall into their second class. The first class, with a single row of appendages on each side of the main rachis, includes Ankyropteris bibractensis, Renault, and Clepsydropsis antiqua, Unger. From the edge of the leaf-trace in Clepsydropsis antiqua the pinna-trace goes off as a closed ring. This a Trxt-Fre, &,—Diagrams illustrating the pinna-trace departure in a, Dinewron pteroides, Renault; b, Htapleris Scotti, P. Bertrand ; ce, Metaclepsydropsis duplex, Williamson. (After P. Burrranp, and GwyNNE- VAUGHAN and Kripsrovn.) type of pinna-trace occurs also in Ankyropteris. Ankyropteris corrugata, Williamson, has biseriate primary pinnee and one plane of symmetry. The leaf-trace has the outline of a double anchor—a modification of the Etapteris-Diplolabis type. The pinna-traces in this Fern leave the edges of the arms of the leaf-trace in very much the same way as those of Diplolabis leave its leaf-trace, but here there is only the one set of pinnee to be supplied from each arm of the leaf-trace, and thus only one half of the leaf-trace arm is concerned in the process. It is just a Diplolabis type with half of the pinna-trace-bar suppressed. This Ankyropteris-type is another illustration of the effect of the position of the pinne relatively to the leaf-trace in affecting the point of departure of the pinna-trace. But the details of the departure of the pinna- trace in Ankyropteris recall the process in such an extramarginal type as Didy- mochlena truncatula. The full growth of the pinna-trace has not been followed, but the sections of Ankyropteris bibractensis, var. westphalensis, P. Bertrand, which have been studied by Paut Burrranpn (text-fig. 9) (Etudes sur la fronde des Zygo- ptéridées, Lille, 1909), show the widening out of the tracheides at the part of the leaf- trace which is to supply the pinna, the appearance of a reparatory set -(“anneau réparatrice interne”) to ensure the continuity of the tissues of the arms of the leaf- trace past the point of pinna-trace departure, and the departure of the pinna-trace 368 MR R. C. DAVIE ON as a closed ring. In Clepsydropsis the actual margin of the leaf-trace goes off to supply a pinna; in Ankyroptervs the pinna-trace leaves the leaf-trace in the extra- marginal way. Where there are two orthostichies of primary pinnee to be supplied from each arm of the leaf-trace, as there are in Dinewron, Metaclepsydropsis, Diplolabis, and Etapterss, the pinna-trace-bar leaves the leaf-trace on the side directed towards these pine as a single curved mass of xylem, and then breaks into two parts, each of which moves - ANNEAU REPARATRICE : a INTERNE Text-Fie. 9.—Departure of pinna-trace in Ankyropterts bibractensis, var. westphalensis, P. Bertrand. (After P. BurrRAND. ) out toa pinna. Where the pinne are uniseriate, as in Ankyropteris, the pinna-traces depart from the edges of the leaf-trace at the ends nearest to the pinne and move directly out to them. In Tubicaulis solenites, Cotta (text-fig. 10, a) (the C faces with its curve away from the axis—reverse of the living Fern), and in Anachoropteris Decaisnei, B. Renault (text-fig. 10, 6), the pinna-traces leave the leaf-traces back from the edges, and the marginal set of tracheides is undisturbed throughout the rachis. But the pinna-trace in these two is a solid patch of xylem and not a closed ring. BERTRAND makes a suggestive explanation of the Anachoropteris type, deriv- Text-Fic. 10,—Diagrams illustrating the departure of the pinna-trace in a, Tubicaulis solenites, Cotta ; b, Anachoropteris Decaisne’, Renault. (After P. BERTRAND.) ing it from the type of Dineuron pteroides by development of the anterior hooks. He indicates how the position from which the pinna-trace departs in Anachoropteris corresponds with that from which the Dinewron pinna-trace goes off from the leaf- trace. This is an emphasis of the retention by the pinna-trace of the position of departure relatively to the leaf-trace. The pinna-traces of Dineuron and Anacho- ropteris correspond to the marginal and extramarginal types in the living Ferns, though we must remember that the Dinewron pinna-trace breaks into two parts after going off from the leaf-trace, and that it has to supply two orthostichies of pinne. This caution also applies to the pinna-trace of Vubicaulis, though the trace of Anachoropteris supplies but one pinna. Any discussion of the type of leaf in the Zygopteridee and Botryopterideze as illustrated by these leaf-traces is out of place THE PINNA-TRACE IN THE FERNS. 369 here. The useful information which these Ferns give us is that their pinna-traces departed from their leaf-traces at the points nearest to the pinne. If we carry this into the living Ferns, any fundamental distinction between marginal and extramareginal types of pinna-trace breaks down—the pinna-traces go off just from the points which best serve the pinne. The distinction between the marginal and extramarginal types of pinna-trace must then be one due to the differences in leaf-traces, not in the pinne themselves. This is so far true. But a marked divergence from the type general within a family, such as that of Balantiwm culcita (pp.350, 356) from the type of the Cyatheaceze, must make us pause in the generalisation. We have in B. culcita a marginal type of pinna-supply, yet the general type in the Cyatheacez is a very elaborate extramarginal one. The changes in the leaf-trace of Gleichema flabellata throw some light on the interpretation of this divergence. There the incurved margins of the leaf-trace round themselves off as circular groups of tracheides which run up along the face of the gaps caused by the departure of the pinna-traces (Pl. XXXIV. fig. 14), and then beyond the pinna-trace gaps unite to the remaining tracheides of the median part of the leaf-trace (text-fie. 3). The incurved edges of the leaf-trace in Glerchenia carry on the water-supply up the adaxial face of the leaf. The pinnee are relatively large, and the pinna-traces make a considerable drain on the tracheides of the leaf-trace. Apparently such a drain would cause a serious deflection of water from the adaxial face of the petiole, and would probably cause a water-starvation of the successive sets of pinnee above the basal pair. The incurved hooks of the Gleichema leaf-trace have thus the task of carrying forward the water-supply from one pinna-gap to the next, and of providing sufficient water to counteract the drain of several sets of pinne. We would thus expect to find a considerable development of incurved hooks in leaves possessing many pinnee, and perhaps most distinctly in those leaves with many pinne arranged in close succession (cf. Tansiuy, Hv. of Fil. Vasc. System, p. 117, ef. p. 126). In the Cyatheaceze the leaf generally possesses a long “tail” of lamina beyond the last pair of actual pinne. And in the Cyatheacez the leaf-trace beyond the last pair of pinnee is an ellipse of tracheides, thin on the adaxial face (cf. p. 360). Just the same arrangement in the leaf-trace is found in Adiantum polyphyllum, where the leaf ends in a long “ tail” similar to that of Cyatheaceous leaf. Balantiwm culcita has a much shorter leaf than the majority of the Cyatheacee ; the pinne are relatively not heavy and are arranged at relatively considerable distances from one another. Almost the same remarks apply to the leaf of Dicksonia fibrosa, which has a marginal pinna-supply just like that of Balantiwm culcita. These are simple Cyatheaceze (perhaps owing their simplicity to reduction) which have modified their type of vascular supply to the pinne in relation to their relatively short leaves. In the leaf of the majority of the Cyatheacez the complicated leaf-trace with its very much incurved margins is related to the large size of the leaf, the weight of the pinnee, and their large number. The incurved edges of the leaf-trace persist beyond 370 MR R. C.. DAVIE ON even the last pair of pinnee, in order to provide sufficient water-supply for the “ tail” of the leaf.* The two exceptions, Balantiwm culcita and Dicksonia fibrosa, have relatively short leaves with pinnee situated at greater distances from one another than are those of Cyathea, Alsophila, and Henutelia. And these two have only slight hooks on the adaxial faces of their leaf-traces, a much simpler type of leaf-trace and marginal supply to the pinnee. An interesting confirmation of this view of the function of the incurved margins of the leaf-trace comes from Botrychium virginianum (CHRYSLER, 10). There the poe 7% oe ra + ; ' < TO PINNAE Texr-Fic. 11.—Botrychium daucifolium, Wall. Diagrams illustrating the departure of the vascular supply to the first pair of sterile pinne. margins of the leaf-trace strands nip off, pass along the adaxial face for a short distance, and then take up the position of margins for the leaf-trace when the pinna- trace goes off. This ensures a continuity of water-supply past the bases of the pinne. Botrychium daucifolium, Wall., affords us an example of a similar process (text-fig. 11). In the preparation for the departure of the vascular supply to the first sterile segments of the leaf there appears on the inner side of one of the two leaf-trace strands at first a single tracheide, then a small group of tracheides (text- fig. 11, b), which approaches the leaf-trace strand and finally unites with it (text- fig. 11, ¢). Part of the group then goes off with the portion of the leaf-trace strand * See also Diplazium marginatum, where the supply is marginal to the nerve fourth in position from the tip of the leaf. THE PINNA-TRACE IN THE FERNS. 371 going to the pinna, the rest remains as the new margin of the leaf-trace strand (text-fig. 11, d, ¢). This process appears in the supply of the second pinna (text- fig. 11, e, f, g), but in relation to the other of the two leaf-trace strands.* Still other examples illustrating the same process may be cited in Matoma pectinata (SEwarp, 99) and Archangiopteris Henryi, Christ et. Gies. (GWYNNE- Vaueuan, 705). In Matonia the incurved adaxial edges of the leaf-trace unite, their margins extend laterally and pass with the lateral portions of the leaf-trace into the pinne (text-fig. 12). The pinne are thus supplied with an internal system which probably meets the demand for a considerable water-supply without unduly DSL Trxt-Fic. 12.—Diagram illustrating the division of the single petiolar stele into the vascular strands of the pinne. (After SEWARD, ) depleting the supply for the rest of the leaf. For the actual backs of the incurved hooks remain intact and pass up the rachis to carry water past the point of pinna- trace departure. This looks like a special case of the Glevchensa-type in which not only must water be carried up past the pinne for the needs of the higher parts of the leaf, but where the pinne must also be provided in quick succession with a good water-supply. The pinna of Archangiopteris Henry: is supplied by strands which occupy much * CHRYSLER argues from similar processes in B. ternatum that we have in this reinforcement a relic of an earlier system of passage of the margin along the face of the leaf-trace strand, such as we have already mentioned in B. virginianum. Hesees no possible use for the reinforcing strand, as it is not connected at its base with the leaf-trace, and declares that it cannot convey water. But the structure of the tracheides in the Ferns is such that water might quite well be conveyed laterally from tracheide to tracheide even where the sets of tracheides are not continuous at their bases. Water can readily be deflected from the main strand into this reinforcing strand as soon as the two are in lateral contact, and thus the effect of the drain on the water-supply by the pinna-departure may be compensated for. 372 MR R. C. DAVIK ON the same position in the rachis as do the parts of the leaf-trace which supply the pinna of Matoma pectinata. In Archangiopteris, however, the details are a little different, since the leaf-trace has a different outline from that of Matoma. One strand which goes into the pinna comes from the side of the curve of the leaf-trace set; the other comes from the abaxial face of the adaxial strand (text-fig. 13). The terminal part of the adaxial strand remains to carry the water past this pinna-gap. This terminal strand is itself remmforced below the departure-point of the pinne by internal accessory strands which come from the internal face of the abaxial curve. Wherever we find hooked adaxial portions in a leaf-trace, we do not find any evidence of a process of reinforcement, prior to the departure of the pinna-traces, of the parts of the leaf-trace supplying the pinne. But the incurved hooks do vary considerably in length and in their number of tracheides, according to whether the leaf is a long one or a short one, one with heavy pinne or one with light pinne, one with closely set pinnz or one with pinnee at considerable distances from one another. Texr-lic, 13.—Archangiopteris Henryi, Christ et Gies. Diagram illustrating the method of departure of the pinna-trace. (After GwyNNE- VAUGHAN.) An excellent example of the type of hook found in a long leaf with heavy pinnee is that of Didymochlena truncatula (Pl. XXXII. fig. 7). Species of Dryopteris with shorter leaves and lighter pinne, like D. fiia mas, have much smaller adaxial hooks. In Microleyia hirta and M. platyphylla, where the pinne are spread over approxi- mately the same length of leaf, the adaxial hooks are of almost the same size; in M. spelunce, whose leaves are usually larger, the adaxial hook is larger than in either of these. Leaves with relatively heavy pinne, like Diplazwwm celtidifolum or D. marginatum, have strongly developed adaxial hooks; those with fairly ight pinne, like the Blechnums, have weak adaxial hooks. In all of these the adaxial hook appears to carry the water on from pinna-trace to pinna-trace along the leaf quite satisfactorily. Whenever the adaxial hook disappears and we get a marginal supply to the pinne, the system which carried forward the water disappears. On the whole, the appearance of the marginal type of pinna-supply seems to coincide with a reduc- tion in the size or complexity of the leaf. This is by no means invariable, but a contrast of such outstanding genera as Athyrium and Diplaziwm (extramarginal) with Aspleniwm and Ceterach (marginal), or of Hypolepis and Adiantum (extra- marginal) with Pellea, Cheilanthes, and Cryptogramma (marginal), shows that there is some truth in the statement. A glance over the table on p. 354 confirms this THE PINNA-TRACE IN THE FERNS. 373 opinion that the extramarginal type of supply is found on the whole among large- leaved Ferns, the marginal type among the smaller-leaved genera. A few examples, hike Polypodium aurewm (marginal) and Notholena sinwata (extramarginal), can be taken, which, if they stood alone, would prove the contrary proposition. The general survey tends to reveal the extramarginal type among large-leaved, heavily pinnate forms, the marginal type among the smaller-leaved, more lightly pinnate forms. Davalha solida gives us an interesting example of a process which may help the elucidation of the adoption of the marginal type of pinna-trace. The leaf-trace has Text-Fic. 14.—Davallia solida (Forst.) Sw. Series of diagrams illustrating the changes in the leaf-trace during the period of supplying the lowest pair of pinne. two fairly large adaxial strands, with unincurved margins, and a small median strand (text-fig. 14,@). The adaxial strand gives off a portion marginally on the side directed towards the lowest pinna (text-fig. 14,b and). This passes out into the base of the pinna ; then another marginal portion is given off from the adaxial strand and follows the first strand into the pinna (text-fig. 14, k). The pinna-trace is binary and gives off two strands to the first pinnule. During the supply of the pinna by the leaf- trace the median strand nips off a small strand while one of the adaxial strands is preparing to give off its margin (text-fig. 14, b). This little strand passes to the adaxial strand and fuses with it between the giving-off of the first pinna-trace-strand and the second (text-fig. 14, ). The median strand itself moves towards the other adaxial strand and fuses with it just before it nips off the first strand for the pinna on that side (text-fig. 14,e and f). Some of its tracheides remain as the abaxial TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO, 11). 51 374 MER. .C. (DAVIE, ON portion of this adaxial strand; the rest simply separate away again and resume their position as the median strand (text-fig. 14, g and). Thus both adaxial strands are reinforced by tracheides from the median strand during the period of pinna-trace departure. This process may well be compared with that which we have already considered in the supply of the pinnules by the pinna-traces of Davallia pallida and Asplenium lucidum, where the pinna-trace was reinforced by a set of tracheides appearing on the aporachial side before the pmnules were supplied. It is noticeable that, while the leaf-traces which supply their pinnz on the marginal system are simpler in outline than those supplying their pinne extramarginally, there is a development usually of hooks on the abaxial ends of the leaf-trace strands (e.g. Davalhia, Pl. XXXII. fig. 2; Gymnogramma Pearcei, var. robusta, Pl. XXXIV. fig. 12). These probably serve the same purpose as the reinforcing strands of the leaf-trace of Davallia solida, or of the pinna-traces of Davallia pallida and Asplenium lucidum-—they carry on the water-supply past the pinne, and prevent a too great reduction of the water-supply as we approach towards the tip of the leaf. These explanations of the outlines of various leaf-traces are by no means provable in every leaf-trace which may be considered. But when they are taken in conjunction with one another and in relation to certain distinctive types of Fern-leaf they afford us the opportunity for a broad generalisation which finds confirmation in the arrange- ment of the species of Ferns in the table on p. 354. But we have still to consider the possible advantage to be derived from the change from the extramarginal to the marginal type of pinna-supply. It seems to have occurred in a passage from a larger-leaved to a smaller-leaved form of the Fern (cf. above, p. 373). On that basis its occurrence is fairly easily to be explained. For in the small-leaved form the adaxial portion of the leaf-trace would be small and thin. To supply pinne from the back of a “thin” hook would be to give them a very exiguous pinna-trace. < . ee oy ra = Pare eS 7 giant MTP a ans. Roy. Soc. Edin’. Vol. L.—PuatE XXXYV. DaviE: Pirnna—TraceE In FERNS. M‘Warlane & Erskine, Edin. Vee ( 379) XII.—Studies on the Pharmacological Action of Tetra-Alkyl-Ammonium Compounds. By Professor C. R. Marshall. (Read December 15, 1913. MS. received March 24,1914. Issued separately July 29, 1914.) I]. THE ACTION OF TETRA-ETHYL-AMMONIUM CHLORIDE. The pharmacological action of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride has been investigated to a limited extent by Tiniin,* Sanresson and Koragrn,t Tarpeiner,{ Borxm,§ and H6sBER and WaLpENBERG,| in the course of other researches. TILLIE, and SANTESSON and Korarn, describe its action on frogs; TapPEINER merely states that it has no paralysing effect on the respiration of the rabbit; BorHm, and Hoser and WALDENBERG, refer only to its effect on the isolated frog’s muscle. The descriptions of the action of the iodide, which has been investigated by Jorpan,{ Brunton and CasH,** RorHBerGceR,t} Jacops and Hacenperc,{t and Barer and Dats,§§ in the course of other work, are also somewhat meagre. Brunton and Casu, and Jacoss and HaGENBERG, describe its action on frogs, and Brunron and CasH its action on rabbits; but JorpAN merely says that it produces on frogs a curare-like action but no muscarin effect, and Barcer and Date only state that it has no sympathomimetic action. The investigation of ROTHBERGER was limited to its antagonistic action towards curarin. A point of some importance, which I have not seen mentioned, is the instability of the chloride when kept under ordinary conditions. It is not only hygroscopic, but it also decomposes and relatively quickly becomes acid. A specimen which had been kept in the laboratory in a well-stoppered bottle for over a year was found on analysis to contain 15 per cent. of water and 14°8 per cent. of hydrochloric acid. The remainder, as shown by a determination of the ethyl groups and the chloride content, was pure tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. Two other specimens obtained from reliable firms contained 4°5 per cent. and 8 per cent. hydrochloric acid respectively when received. The commercial chloride, and this salt purified by dissolving in the smallest quantity of absolute alcohol, neutralising, filtermg and drying, finally in a desiccator, were used in the investigation. GENERAL EFFECTS. On Frogs.—The most prominent symptoms produced in grass frogs by injections into the dorsal lymph-sac were muscular contractions and tremors. Besides these, * Arch. f. exp. Path. u. Pharmak., xxvii. p. 17 [1890]. + Skand. Arch. f. Physiol., x. p. 225 [1900]. t Arch. f. exp. Path. wu. Pharmak., xxxvii. p. 349 [1896]. § Ibid., lviii. p. 267 [1908]. || Pfliiger’s Arch., cxxvi. p. 337 [1909]. WT Arch. f. exp. Path. wu. Pharmak., viii. p. 15 [1877]. ** Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., clxxv. p. 201 [1884]. ++ Pfliiger’s Arch., xcii. p. 424 [1902]. tt Arch. f. eap. Path. u. Pharmak., xlviii. p. 58 [1902]. “$$ Journ. of Physiol., xli. p. 28 [1910]. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L, PART II. (NO. 12). 53 380 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE there were some loss of co-ordination, a varying degree of paralysis with diminution or absence of reflexes, and diminution or cessation of the respiratory movements. Winter frogs kept in the laboratory were less sensitive to this substance than recently caught summer frogs. The muscular contractions and tremors appeared in the case of summer frogs within three minutes of the injection of a large dose (2 mg. per gramme weight of frog), in five to eight minutes after a moderate dose (0°5 mg. per gramme weight of frog), and in twenty to thirty minutes after a minimal effective dose (0°05 mg. per gramme weight of frog). Most commonly they seemed to commence in the dorsal or abdominal muscles, but in some animals the muscles of the limbs were first influenced. Sometimes, and especially after large doses, the tremors and contractions were general from the outset. In all cases the irregularity in distribution and extent of the movements was marked. At first the contractions were usually fibrillary and shortly tonic im character. Later, large muscle-bundles or even whole muscles were involved, producing in the case of the limbs somewhat grotesque movements. Still later, if the dose administered were sufficient, they assumed the form of twitches, which became less frequent and finally ceased. In some cases they persisted for hours, and often continued after the cessation of all reflex activity. The movements of the hind-limb muscles were the last to disappear. xcept after large doses, they were not constantly present during the earlier stages of the intoxication. Intervals of several minutes often occurred between successive twitches, and frequently they were induced by a paeleuasisa movement. Such a movement generally intensified them if present. After doses larger than 0°3 mg. per gramme body-weight the stage of irregular muscular contractions usually passed into one of complete paralysis, which lasted a variable time. After the injection of 1 mg. per gramme of frog, paralysis occurred in fifteen minutes and complete recovery within eighteen hours. After double this dose, paralysis developed in five minutes and recovery did not occur. The muscles associated with respiration were the first to be paralysed and, if a non-lethal dose had been given, were the first to recover. After doses less than 0°3 mg. per gramme frog, complete paralysis did not follow, but more or less muscular weakness was noticeable. TrLuiz* states that doses of 0°01 g. to 0°02 g. induce in frogs powerful general fibrillary contractions before the onset of paralysis, but no mention is made of the occurrence of tremors by Sanresson and Korarn.{ They were, however, observed by Brunton and Casu} and by Jacops and HacEnpere§ after the administration of the iodide. But Brunton and Casu|| describe the symptoms produced by 0°007 g. to 0°028 g. of tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide as being the same as those produced by similar doses of tetra-methyl-ammonium iodide. These were “spasmodic twitchings of trunk and limb muscles; limbs drawn up in a very tremulous manner; whole * Loc. cit. t+ Loe. cit. { Loc. cit., p. 205. § Loc. cit., p. 58, || Loc, cit., p. 205. PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 381 body twitches in response to pinching foot, even when the foot is no longer with- drawn; death within a minute with larger dose.” These symptoms, with the exception of the rapid death, have been present in all my experiments with effective doses of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, but only on few occasions have I seen slight and transient fibrillary tremors in frogs after the injection of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride. Tremors are, however, mentioned as occurring before the paralysis by Duravux™* and by lop.Baver,t but they were not seen, although looked for, in the experiments of SanrEsson and Korasn,{ and are not referred to by Truum§ In my experiments with tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride the symptoms produced by all doses from 0°006 mg. to 5 mg. per gramme weight of frog have been typically paralytic. And by injecting tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride previously or sub- sequently to the administration of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride I have prevented or annulled the contractions normally produced by the injection of the latter substance. Even if one-tenth the amount of the tetra-methyl salt be injected simultaneously with the tetra-ethyl compound, a notable limitation of the duration of the time the fibrillary contractions continue is seen. As will be shown later, the tremors produced by tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride have their seat in the mechanism associated with the myo-neural junction, and it is possible that the different results obtained by different workers may have their explanation in the differences in this mechanism. To this point I hope to return in a later communication. I have, however, injected frogs at different times of the year and under different conditions with tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride without producing tremors. Nevertheless, fibrillary contractions may be produced for a brief period by applying small drops of a solution of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride to an exposed muscle, and these commonly occur when an isolated muscle of a winter frog, but rarely when that of a summer frog, is immersed in a solution. In view of the statement of Brunton and CasH|| that tetra-methyl-ammonium iodide and tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide produce the same action, I have made a few experiments on frogs with these substances. If certain slight differences due to the iodide are ignored, the effects obtained are strictly comparable with those produced by the corresponding chlorides. Tetra-methyl-ammonium iodide proved much more powerful than tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide, and it did not produce those powerful irregular contractions and tremors which characterise the action of the latter compound. Moreover, tetra-methyl-ammonium iodide, like the chloride, quickly caused diastolic arrest of the heart, at least in doses of 0°15 mg. per gramme of frog and above, an effect which was wanting in my experiments with tetra-ethyl- ammonium iodide. On Rabbits. — The only experiments dealing with the effects of the tetra-ethyl- ammonium compounds on mammals that I have been able to find are those of * Quoted by SanrEsson and Korakgn, loc. cit. + Arch, Internat. de Pharmacod., vii. p. 188 [1900]. t Loe, cit., p. 220, § Loe. cit, || Loc. cit., p. 205. 382 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE Brunton and Casn* with tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide, and those of Jacops and HaGENBERG + with tetra-ethyl-ammonium tri-iodide. Brunton and Casu, after injecting hypodermically one gramme of tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide into a rabbit, observed trembling and shivering in eleven minutes, paresis of the fore part of the body in twenty minutes, cessation of the respiration with persistence of the corneal reflex in twenty-three minutes, and death in thirty-six minutes. After injecting 0°5 g. into a rabbit, the animal lay with its head on the table twenty-one minutes after the administration, shaking from side to side. Five minutes later there were convulsive springing, lurching, and shuffling, with dyspncea. Death occurred thirty minutes after the injection. Jacopy and HAGENBERG state that hypodermic injections of 0°1 &. to 0°25 e. tetra-ethyl-ammonium tri-iodide per kg. OLS weight suspended in siveenn into inte produced no symptoms. As the injection of 8 ¢.c. of a 2°5 per cent. solution of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride into the peritoneal cavity of a rabbit weighing 1975 g. produced no symptoms, intravenous medication was resorted to. The injections were made into one of the veins of the ear, and occupied about one minute. The lethal dose was found to be, for rabbits, about 0°05 g@. per ke. body-weight. The intravenous injection of 0°02 g. per kg. merely caused slight dyspnoea and slight tremors of the fore part of the boils a few minutes after the administration. Half this dose only caused slight deepening of the respiration. After the administration of a small lethal dose (0°06 ¢. per kg.) the animal remained normal and moved about for one minute; then the respiration became slower and the heart-beats somewhat faster, and three minutes after the completion of the injection there appeared slight spasmodic tremors with head-nodding. Half a minute later a second more powerful tremor occurred, and twenty seconds later still more powerful tremors, which continued ten seconds. Further similar spasms were few and slight and transient. Five minutes after the termination of the injection the breathing was much slower and somewhat gasping in character, and the heart-beats appeared somewhat more forcible but were otherwise unchanged ; the animal sank on the table with the head to one side, and from time to time moved slowly. Ten minutes after the injection the respiration was still slower and air-hunger still more manifest; the heart-beats were somewhat slower and weaker. The corneal reflex was present. From six to eight minutes later the animal made several spasmodic springs, after which the pupil dilated and the cornea became insensitive. The respiration ceased twenty and a half minutes after the cessation of the injection, and the heart-beats a few seconds later. The injection of 0°1 g. per kg. intravenously produced deep convulsive breathing before the injection was oomuplebed Erection of the tail and convulsive movements of the hind limbs, which lasted for a few seconds, quickly followed, and the animal then lay on its side paralysed. The corneal reflex was absent, but a few gasping movements of the mouth occurred, the last about two minutes after the termination * Loe. cit., p. 210. + Loe. cit., p. 60. PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 388 of the injection. The heart-beats were apparently normal at this time, but later they became weaker and less frequent, and finally ceased seven minutes after the end of the injection. Two minutes previously a few tremors of the right fore limb were noticed. After the intravenous injection of 0°25 g. per kg. body-weight, death occurred within a minute of the termination of the injection. A few slight convulsive move- ments, chiefly of the hind limbs, occurred during the injection, but the breathing had ceased and the fore part of the body was completely, and the hinder part almost completely, paralysed at the end of the injection. The heart-beats were then feeble ; they ceased before another minute had passed. The pupils were markedly contracted. Tremors of the back muscles occurred soon after the cessation of the injection, and somewhat later tremors of the abdominal muscles. Half an hour after death tremors in the hind limbs were present. Errect oN NERVES AND MUSCLES. Both the muscular contractions and the paralysis observed in frogs are peripheral in origin. They are obtained as easily in frogs in which the brain and spinal cord have been pithed as in normal animals, and are readily obtained by the local applica- tion of the substance to exposed muscles. SaNTEsson and KoraEN* state that they found it difficult to determine the paralysing action of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on the nerve-endings owing to its action on the muscle-substance. This difficulty has not presented itself in my experiments. In all, whether on intact frogs or on muscle-nerve preparations, the myo-neural junction was found to be paralysed at a time when the irritability of the muscle was little atfected. In a frog which had received 1°5 mg. per gramme body- weight into the dorsal lymph-sac, and which, after the development of preliminary tremors, was completely paralysed in ten minutes, the muscles when tested twenty hours later were found to react with the secondary coil (the primary current being obtained from one accumulator cell) at 19 cm., while the sciatic nerves did not react with the coil full up. In a second experiment, in which the frog received 2 mg. per gramme body-weight and was pithed one and three-quarter hours after the injection, the gastrocnemii muscles reacted with the secondary coil at 40 cm., the sciatic nerves being unirritable with the strongest current. With smaller doses the same phenomena but in less degree were observed. After the injection of 0°4 mg. per gramme of frog and pithing three hours later, the gastrocnemii reacted with the secondary coil at 36 cm., the right sciatic was irritable with the coil at 8°5 cm., and the left sciatic with the coil at 4°5 cm. By means of a Claude Bernard experiment the predominant influence of tetra- ethyl-ammonium chloride on the nerve-endings is more decidedly shown. Thus, in a frog with the brain pithed and with the left iliac artery and vein ligatured and * Loc, cit., p. 225, 384 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE two ligatures round the upper part of the left thigh, the injection of 0°8 mg. per gramme of frog produced the following result when the nerves and muscles were tested nineteen hours later. The numbers refer to the position of the secondary colle Left gastrocnemius muscle, 18°5 cm. Left sciatic nerve, 17 cm. Right gastrocnemius muscle, 17 cm. Right sciatic nerve, not irritable. In another experiment, in which the right thigh was hgatured, the muscles and nerves were tested two and a half hours after the injection, with the following result :— Right gastrocnemius muscle, 20°5 cm. Right sciatic nerve, 22°5 cm. Left gastrocnemius muscle, 19 em. Left sciatic nerve, not irritable. If a dose insufficient to produce paralysis is given, the nerves may be found as irritable as the muscles, or may be found as irritable as the muscles on one side and less irritable on the other. Thus, in a frog to which 0°1 mg. per gramme body-weight was given, the following results were obtained when the animal was pithed two hours after the administration :— Left gastrocnemius muscle, 44°5 cm. Left sciatic nerve, 43°5 cm. Right gastrocnemius muscle, 44°5 cm. Right sciatic nerve 20 cm. But in these cases it was found that continued stimulation of the nerve induced exhaustion more quickly than normally. The difference on the two sides, in those cases in which it was present, was in all probability due to greater diffusion of some of the solution along the lymph-saes of one side, and consequently a greater local effect. The greater paralysing influence on the nerve-endings as compared with the muscle may also be shown by means of a muscle-nerve preparation. When such a preparation is steeped in an isotonic solution of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, the nerve is found to be unirritable before the irritability of the muscle is much affected. And as the application of an isotonic solution to the nerve-trunk does not materially influence the irritability of the nerve, the paralysing action of the substance must be attributed to an action on the so-called nerve-endings. The irregular muscular contractions and tremors have a similar location, TILLIE* states that a previous injection of curarin prevents the appearance of these tremors, and I have corroborated his statement. Jacospy and HaGENBERG { also obtained no tremors with tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide after curare had been given. TILLIE expressed the opinion that the tremors were due to an increased irritability of the nerve-endings, and Jacops and HaGenpere were of the same opinion, but no experi- mental evidence is given to support this belief. It is not difficult to show that an increased irritability of the nerves exists after the administration of small doses of * Loe. cit. + Loe. cit., p. 59, PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 385 tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. If the minimal stimulus necessary to excite the sciatic nerves of a frog with brain and cord pithed be determined, and a dose of tetra- ethyl-ammonium chloride insufficient to paralyse be injected, it will be found that the nerves react to a smaller stimulus after the intoxication than before. In an experiment in which the right thigh was ligatured, the left sciatic nerve prior to the injection was irritable with the secondary coil at 23 cm., the right with the coil at 21°5 cm. Seven minutes after the injection of 0°1 mg. per gramme of frog into the abdominal cavity, irregular and fibrillary contractions appeared in the trunk muscles, and some minutes later extended to the thigh and left lez muscles. Later, owing to the difficulty of preventing diffusion of this substance by simply ligaturing the leg, contractions appeared in the right leg muscles. Twelve minutes after the injection the left sciatic was irritable with the secondary coil at 24°5 em., the right sciatic with the coil at 20 cm. Two hours after the administration the left sciatic reacted with the coil at 29 cm., the right sciatic with the coil at 25 cm. In a similar manner an increase in the irritability of the nerves in mammals may be shown (see fig. 3); and it may also be demonstrated on the isolated nerve-muscle preparation of the frog. The marked increase in the tremors which often follows a voluntary movement or mechanical or electrical stimulation also points to this condition. Not infrequently tremors which have failed to develop owing to an insufficient dose, or which for the time being have been in abeyance, may be induced by gently probing a muscle or by electrically stimulating its nerve ; and in the course of experiments on the effects of applying small drops of a solution to muscles, I have even seen them initiated in one muscle by the contractions of another muscle playing in part over it. Nevertheless, while increased irritability undoubtedly exists during an intoxication with tetra- ethyl-ammonium chloride, these contractions, although less actively, have continued in many of my experiments to a time when the animal was obviously paralysed and when electrical stimulation of the sciatic nerves showed them to be unirritable or much less sensitive than normally. It seems difficult, therefore, to avoid the conclusion that the block in the early stages of the paralysis occurs in a proximal portion of the myo-neural junction, or that the whole of the myo-neural junction is not simultaneously, perhaps not uniformly, paralysed. The muscular contractions are readily produced by applying minute drops of a solution above 1 in 1000 to an exposed muscle, after the method of Lanciry. I have usually employed for the purpose a fine hypodermic needle with the point cut off, but have also employed a fine sable brush. In some cases the surface of the muscle was dried with filter-paper prior to the application, in order to prevent running of the drop. The procedure appeared to render the muscle less sensitive, and delayed, often markedly, the appearance of the tremors, but it did not materially influence the sub- sequent effects. When an isotonic solution was applied to the sartorius, for example, tremors of a portion of the muscle proximal to the drop, quickly followed by a brief tonic contraction of a longitudinal strip of muscle about the width of the drop, occurred 386 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE in twenty to twenty-five seconds after the application, and very soon the contractions became frequent and irregular and often clonic in character. At times, and especially after a considerable interval had elapsed, the whole muscle contracted. If the muscle were not dried, contractions of one or more of the adjoming thigh muscles occurred simultaneously with those of the sartorius. Ifa drop be applied to one of the seg- ments of the rectus abdominis, contractions of a portion or of the whole segment occur at first towards the drop. Later they assume the irregularity which characterises their occurrence in other situations. The contractions were always limited to the segment to which the solution was applied; they did not extend to the segments of the muscle of the same side or to those of the muscle of the opposite side. When concentrations of 1 in 1000 in Ringer’s solution were used, many muscles did not react with a single application, and in some cases several applications had to be made before contractions were obtained; and in those which reacted a longer interval occurred before the first contraction appeared. By employing these small concen- trations it can readily be shown, as LANGLEY found for nicotine, that different muscles are differently affected quantitatively by tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. The order of susceptibility of those tested, the most susceptible being placed first, has in my experiments been: myo-hyoid and sternal portion of pectoral; rectus abdominis ; adductor longus, sartorius, ulnar ; tibialis posticus, semimembranosus ; gastrocnemius, deltoid. Whether the differences are associated with variations in physiological activity of the nerve-endings, or whether they are wholly or in part, as seems probable, due to differences in rate of penetration into the different muscles, was not determined. A few perfusion experiments were made, but they did not help to solve the problem. When a minimal stimulus of 1 in 5000 in Ringer’s solution was perfused at the rate of 1 ¢.c. per minute through the vessels of a pithed frog, shght twitches appeared first in the hand and digits and afterwards in the leg; and stronger solutions affected the arm muscles and abdominal muscles before those of the leg, but in one case the leg muscles were affected before the trunk muscles. It is possible, however, that these variations may have been due to differences in the rate of flow of the perfusion fluid through the different parts. The application of a small drop of an isotonic solution to the proximal end of the sartorius produced no contractions; nor were contractions obtained after a dose of curare or of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride sufficient to paralyse the nerve-endings had been given. The application of solutions of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride to exposed muscles usually produces, however, tremors and contractions similar to those seen after tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, but the effect is transient, apparently owing to the more powerful paralysing action of this substance. The application of a solution of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride subsequently induced no effect. Influence of Calcium Ion on the Production of Tremors.—The fibrillary tremors produced by guanidin were shown by FuHNER* to be prevented by the previous * Arch. f. exp. Path. u. Pharmak., lviii. p. 16 [1907]. PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF 'TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 387 administration of calcium chloride intramuscularly. Calcium chloride in isotonic solu- tion, when injected into the dorsal lymph-sac in doses of 0°4 mg. per gramme of frog, did not, however, prevent tremors being produced by the injection of tetra-ethyl- ammonium chloride into the ventral lymph-sacs one to one and a half hour subse- quently. But in the two experiments made the tremors did not appear as quickly as in an animal not treated with calcium chloride, and they were later in appearing in the animal in which the longer interval was allowed to elapse before the tetra- ethyl-ammonium chloride was given, although in this case a larger dose was administered. The method, however, proved unsuitable for the end in view, probably owing to the relatively slow absorption and relatively rapid excretion of the calcium salt ; and as FuHNER’s method of large intramuscular injections did not seem to me free from fault, perfusion of solutions through the vessels was employed. With this method it was found possible, by the previous perfusion of calcium chloride solutions, to prevent the tremors ordinarily produced by tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride even when relatively large concentrations were employed. Thus, in a pithed frog perfused for ten minutes with 1 in 1000 calcium chloride in Ringer’s solution at the rate of 1°5 c.c. per minute, and then with this solution containing 1 in 500 tetra-ethyl- ammonium chloride, no tremors or muscular movement followed. If, however, a diluter solution of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride in Ringer is first perfused and well-marked tremors set up, the subsequent perfusion of 1 in 1000 calcium chloride may fail to stop them, probably owing to insufficient calcium reaching the muscles, on account of the contracted state of the vessels induced. In this connection it is worthy of mention that when Ringer was used as the normal perfusion fluid the subsequent perfusion of moderately strong solutions of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride caused contraction of the vessels ; if Ringer’s solution containing 1 in 1000 calcium chloride were first perfused, the subsequent perfusion with added tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride caused dilatation. The inhibitory action of the calcium ion on the tremors and contractions produced by tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride may also be conveniently demonstrated on the excised sartorius muscle of the frog. When this muscle is placed in an isotonic sodium chloride solution (RINGER *), or better in an isotonic salt solution containing sodium phosphate and a little sodium carbonate (BrepERMANN f), it shows fine tremulous and vermicular movements which are inhibited by the addition of a small quantity of a calcium salt. This Biedermann phenomenon is noticeably increased by the addition of a little tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride to the salt solution, and when thus intensi- fied a larger amount of calcium in the solution is necessary to inhibit the movements. Owing to Biedermann’s fluid containing an alkaline carbonate and a relatively large amount of a soluble phosphate, the addition of calcium chloride to it causes precipita- tion of calcium carbonate and phosphate ; hence a simple sodium chloride solution is * Journ. of Physiol., vii. p. 295 [1886]. + Sitewngsber. d. Kats. Akad. d. Wiss, Wien, 1xxxi., III. Abt., p. 257 [1880]. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 12). 54 388 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE better adapted for studying the inhibitory action of calcium. Some variability in the reaction of the muscles of different frogs, and especially at certain times of the year, is observed—the sartorii of many female frogs during February and March show no movement whatever when placed in 0°6 per cent. sodium chloride solution—but in my experiments a maximum of 0°02 per cent. of calcium chloride has been sufficient to inhibit the contractions.* Often much less sufficed. In a normal salt solution containing 0°2 per cent. of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, a concentration of 0°05 per cent. of calcium chloride was needed. In such a solution one or a few contractions sometimes occurred when a fresh muscle was immersed, but these did not follow if the muscle was transferred from a salt solution. Owing to the calcium present, the Biedermann contractions do not occur when a muscle is placed in Ringer’s solution. If, however, a sartorius is put into Ringer's solution containing 0°2 per cent. of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, periodic contrac- tions of the whole muscle, usually but not invariably accompanied by fibrillary tremors, follow. The contractions cause bending of the muscle outwards, the external surface of the muscle forming the inner surface of the curve. All movements are prevented by the addition of 0°1 per cent. of calcium chloride to the solution. After the addition of 0°05 per cent. calcium chloride a few preliminary movements only occur. The contractions are diminished but not annulled by the presence of 0°025 per cent. of calcium chloride. When, however, sufficient calcium was present to prevent spon- taneous movements, contractions could be induced for one to two seconds by probing the muscle, especially about the point of entrance of the nerve. The factor of importance in this phenomenon of inhibition is apparently the actual concentration of the calcium salt, and not its concentration in relation to the concen- tration of the tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. To take an example, a sartorius muscle in a solution isotonic with 0°6 per cent. sodium chloride, containing 1 in 3750 calcium chloride, 1 in 1250 tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, and common salt, showed twitches similar to but less frequent than those seen in the corresponding muscle of the opposite side in a similar solution, but without calcium chloride. When the muscle was trans- ferred to an isotonic solution containing double the amount of calcium chloride and of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, z.e. 1 in 1875 calcium chloride and 1 in 625 tetra-_ ethyl-ammonium chloride, no spontaneous movements occurred. On being placed, after surface drying, in the previous solution, movements again appeared and were again inhibited when the muscle was placed in the stronger solution of calcium and tetra-ethyl-ammonium chlorides. It would thus seem as if the inhibition were not due to any association or combination of the tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride with the calcium chloride, and that this does not happen is also supported by the fact that solutions of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride and of calcium chloride of the same electrical conductivity show no change of conductivity when they are mixed. Action on Excised Frogs Muscle.—When an excised frog’s muscle is immersed in * All the solutions used were made isotonic with 0°6 per cent. sodium chloride. PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 389 a solution of commercial tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride of not less than 1 in 1000 strength, contracture results, the rapidity and height of the contraction depending on the particular muscle employed, to some extent on the weighting of the muscle, and, within limits, on the concentration of the solution. The contraction is usually followed by some relaxation, and the muscle then passes into rigor. The effect is obtained after curarising the muscle and after paralysing the nerve-endings by gradually increasing concentrations of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride (fig. 1). It is not obtained with any strength of pure tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride up to slightly hypertonic solutions. By comparing the action of concentrations of Fic. 1.—Effect of commercial tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on isolated frog’s sartorius. The muscle was first immersed in a bath of 0°25 per cent. curarin and afterwards in 1 per cent. tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride. The arrow indicates immersion in 0°5 per cent. tetra- ethyl-ammonium chloride. Time in minutes, Lever increased contraction five times. hydrochloric acid in Ringer’s solution of the same acid strength as the solutions of commercial tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride it was found that a similar action was produced in each case, and consequently the contracture appears to be wholly due to the presence of the acid in the commercial salt. When a muscle was immersed in an isotonic or slightly hypertonic solution of pure tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride, no effect except very gradual and slight relaxation, such as often occurs in a normal muscle in normal saline solution, followed. Fibrillary tremors were rarely observed, and there was relatively little diminution in the irritability of the muscle substance. The nerve-endings were paralysed, but this action occurred relatively slowly and required twenty minutes or more with an isotonic solution for its development. If early in the intoxication of a nerve-muscle preparation the nerve be stimulated with a faradic current for some time, a curious clonic form of curve is obtained (fig. 2), due to the ordinary nervous disturbances being interrupted by irregular more or less 390 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE refractory periods, and which in all probability is to be associated with the combined effects of increased irritability and paralysis previously described. BoruM,* and HésER and WaLDENBERG,{ record some observations on the action of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on the isolated frog’s muscle. BoExHM also found that it did not produce tonic contracture, and he indicates that it has no influence on the direct irritability of the muscle. The graphs of H6BpeR and WaALDENBERG, on the other hand, appear to show a greater degree of toxicity than was obtained by Born or myself. Action on Motor Nerve Endings of Mammals. Both increased excitability and paralysis of the motor nerve endings are seen in mammals as in frogs. It has been shown in an earlier part of this paper that, in rabbits, the intravenous injection of large doses of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride causes paralysis and rapid death, and Fic. 2.—Effect of continuous indirect stimulation of frog’s gastrocnemius after fourteen minutes’ immersion in 1°5 per cent. pure tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. Secondary coil at 27 cm. Primary current from single accumulator cell. Contractions enlarged five times. Time marking ten seconds. that minimal doses induce slight and transient dyspnoea. By injecting these minimal doses into the veins of an anesthetised animal during continued stimulation of a motor nerve, a depressant action on the nerve-endings can be demonstrated. The effect produced by the minimal dose (0°01 ¢. per kg. body-weight) inducing symptoms is, however, very slight; a fall in the height of the contraction commencing about fifteen seconds after the beginning of the injection and reaching about one-third the extent of the contraction in one minute occurs, but complete paralysis is not produced. Paralysis to this mode of stimulation is only obtained with a dose of 0°02 g. per kg. body-weight. When such a dose is injected into the external jugular vein, complete paralysis to continued electrical stimulation of a nerve of the fore limb is produced in fifteen to twenty seconds (fig. 3). The effect, however, is very transient. A few seconds after stopping the stimulation the nerve is again irritable, and it quickly becomes more irritable than before; but, as in the case of other substances paralysing motor nerve endings, rapid exhaustion follows continued * Loc. cit, + Loc. cit., p. 344, ‘xX ‘eplloyyo wntuomUe -[4y}0-81}0} “3 ¢0.0 Jo uoToelut Jo omTy seyeoIpUL 7 MO[Eq eUT[ oY} UO uOTsseIdeq ‘UID [PF 4e [10d ATepUOdaS OY} YIM GAJOU JO UOT}R[NUIT]S Jo oUUIY SMOYS 7 9A0G" OUT] OY, ‘spuodas euI}=7 “oul] eseq=qQ “JoJoMOUBUI-Iapej S,o7}INFZ Aq onssoid-poojq=F “Ar9q1v pores yy SII Ul einssaid-poojq=q ‘(weisouciyd) uoryeudser=y “snxeid [e1yoriq Jo poo 4nd jo t -einwys Aq peonpord quit, e10j 4YSII Jo suOTZORAJUOD="J “UIIOJOIOTYD "3 GZISy ‘YRQ “se[OSNU GUIT[-o10J QY SII oY} JO SSUIpUs-eatoU oY} UO BpLio[YyO WNIMoULWe-[AY49-8.1404 Jo Joo — 391 AMMAR NAAR a ‘SD “WD “7'D 1MONIUM COMPOUNDS. N A AAT —— ys = > < SS By x (oar a) ay (o) Zi e) oO =x or < ie) — oO } — So (©) bat = faa} a x Ay 392 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE stimulation. Two features characterise the recovery from the paralysis, namely, an increased irritability of the nerve and tremors. These effects may also be produced ieee PWC CUROUURCURCCCONMn Genre nee Fic. 4.—Effect of second injection of same dose of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on nerve-endings of fore limb. Letters as in previous figure. x 2. by non-paralytic doses, In the experiment from which figs. 3 and 4 are taken— a cat weighing 2125 grammes, aneesthetised with chloroform—stimulation of one of PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 393 the cut cords of the brachial plexus with the secondary coil at 35 cm. gave a good and constant contraction of the corresponding limb. Two minutes after an injection of 0°011 g. per kg. body-weight into the external jugular vein, the same strength of stimulus carried the writing lever off the drum, and the secondary coil had to be placed at 40 cm. to produce the same curve as was previously obtained with the coil at 35cm. The effect of the next injection of 0°023 e. per kg. body-weight is shown in fig. 3. Again the writing lever was carried off the paper by stimulating the nerve with the same strength of stimulus (secondary coil at 41 cm.) as that used previous to the injection. Hven more pronounced increased susceptibility was obtained in other experiments. Before the onset of this increased irritability small irregular twitchings of the limb may develop. In the experiment referred to they occurred twenty to thirty seconds before a notable increase in the irritability of the nerve was observed, but were not a marked feature. Their commencement after the second injection is shown towards the end of fig. 3. Later they became very marked, and were almost limited to the time of stimulation of the nerve (fig. 4). This figure further shows that the injection of a second dose of 0°023 ¢. per kg. body-weight does not prevent their occurrence, although the irritability of the nerve, as shown by diminished contraction of the limb, is temporarily lessened. On rabbits similar results were obtained. To this increased irritability of the nerve-endings the results obtained by ROTHBERGER* on curarised animals are in all probability due. He found that in curarised cats the subcutaneous injection of tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide was followed in ten to twenty minutes by the reappearance of irritability of the sciatic nerves, and later by spontaneous breathing. He came to the conclusion that undoubted antagonism exists between tetra-ethyl-ammonium iodide and curare; but as four of his eight experiments were negative, the antagonism would appear to be relatively slight and physiological in nature. ACTION ON THE CIRCULATION AND RESPIRATION. In contradistinction to tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride, tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride exerts no distinctive action on the circulation. Jorpan,t Trvure,{ and Jacops and HacEnseErc § state that it has no muscarin-like effect on the heart of frogs. Jacospy and HaGEnBerG observed slowing of the heart after the administration of 0°5 to 0'7 mg. per gramme of frog, which was uninfluenced by atropine. Brunton and Casu || noted diastolic standstill of the heart in frogs, and Sanresson and KoraEn 9 early cessation of the heart’s action. In my own experiments on frogs the heart was relatively little affected. In most cases it was beating well when the animal was pithed. In one instance cessation of the ventricle in systole occurred ; and in the few other cases in which cessation of the heart was observed after the administration * Loe. cit. t Loe. cit. t Loc. cit. § Loe. cit., p. 58. || Loc. cat., p. 205. J Loc. cit., p. 226. 394 PROFESSOR C. R. MARSHALL ON THE of large doses no instance of stoppage in the extreme diastole, which is characteristic of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride and other substances stimulating the vagal nerve endings, occurred. When a hypertonic solution (2°15 per cent.) was dropped on to the exposed heart a slight increase in the frequency of the beats occurred, but no diastolic relaxation or cessation of the heart followed, notwithstanding repeated application. In rabbits the intravenous injection of 1 or 2 mg. per kg. body-weight is usually followed by a slight fall of blood-pressure. The fall commences a few seconds after Pa ty WH dittitttie " ame a TTC Jdsu jhsnsY una Lt sn evans AMAL ut ))5 Fic. 5,—Effect of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on the respiration and blood-pressure of a decerebrate rabbit. Weight 2225 g. Letters as in fig. 8. The respiration was recorded by connecting one limb of the tracheal cannula to a tambour. the completion of the injection, and with a dose of 2 mg. per kg. extends to about a quarter the height of the normal blood-pressure. Recovery occurs in two to three minutes. Doses of 10 mg. per kg. body-weight cause a more rapid and somewhat more profound fall of blood-pressure, but the extent is rarely more than half the normal height. With doses of 25 mg. per kg. body-weight a fall to about one-third the normal height occurs (fig. 6). The fall is maintained for one to two minutes, and then gradual recovery follows. As no slowing or apparent weakening of the heart occurs, the fall would seem to be due to a vascular effect. In decerebrate animals a slight rise may precede the fall of blood-pressure (fig. 5). The blood-pressure of cats is much less susceptible to the action of tetra-ethyl- ammonium chloride than that of rabbits. In these animals an intravenous injection of 10 mg. per kg. body-weight usually produces no change, and even doses of 25 mg. PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. 395 per kg. body-weight cause only a relatively slight fall lasting about two minutes (figs. 3 and 4). No evidence of stimulation of the vagal nerve endings in cats or rabbits, such as occurs after the administration of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride, was obtained. The respiration is also much less affected by tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride than by tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride. After doses of 10 mg. per kg. body-weight intravenously to anzesthetised rabbits, slight diminution in the extent of the respira- san one 5 sas OT pesdadeiaeinengebancitietaet aes iateceation 4 ht mas WHO NY tr ay, AGC is Mal {ai aaa C45 CLs CLS nooo nn Fic. 6.—Effect of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride on the respiration and blood-pressure of an anesthetised rabbit. Weight 2500 g.; ether. Letters as in fig. 3. The effect of stimulating the right phrenic nerve on the respiration is also shown. tion and in the irritability of the phrenic nerves may occur, but the latter may be present without any obvious changes in the frequency or depth of the respiration. Doses of 20 mg. per kg. body-weight cause well-marked but transient depression of the respiration, and for about half a minute the phrenic nerves are but slightly irritable (cf. fig. 6). Complete paralysis of the respiration or of the phrenic nerves to intermittent stimulation was not obtained even with this large dose. TapprrInErR * also failed to produce with tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride the temporary paralysis of the respiration which characterises the action of certain doses of tetra-methyl- ammonium chloride. The respiration of cats is less susceptible to tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride * Loc, cit, TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 12). 55 396 PHARMACOLOGICAL ACTION OF TETRA-ALKYL-AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS. than that of rabbits ; intravenous injections of 20 to 25 mg. per kg. body-weight causing only slight diminution of depth, sometimes accompanied by slight slowing of the respiration (cf. figs. 3 and 4). In decerebrate animals the effects produced on the respiration are similar to those seen in anzsthetised animals. There is no diminished susceptibility to the de- pressant action of this substance in decerebrate as compared with anesthetised animals, such as occurs in the case of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride. On the contrary, the respiration of decerebrate animals seemed to be somewhat more sensitive than that of aneesthetised animals. The intravenous injection of 27 mg. per kg. into a decere- brate rabbit caused permanent paralysis of the respiration, an effect not obtained in anzesthetised non-decerebrate animals, and in one experiment on a decerebrate cat in which the respiration, although deep, was slow (nine per minute) the intravenous injection of 10 mg. per kg. body-weight caused cessation of the respiration for thirty- five seconds. Afterwards the respiration became somewhat deeper and quicker. A previous injection of 5 mg. per kg. to this animal caused merely slight and temporary diminution in the depth of the respiration, so that the slightly increased activity seen after the larger dose was a secondary effect. During the respiratory depression induced by large doses of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride in rabbits a temporary increase in respiratory activity, which is also a secondary action, occurs in both aneesthetised and decerebrate animals (figs. 5 and 6). No evidence of stimulation of the respiratory centre in decerebrate animals, such as occurs after the injection of tetra-methyl-ammonium chloride, was obtained with any dose of tetra-ethyl-ammonium chloride. (3975.4) XII1.—Rocks from Gough Island, South Atlantic (collected by the Scottish National AntarcticExpedition, 1902-1904). By Robert Campbell, M.A., D.Sc., Lecturer in Petrology in the University of Edinburgh. Communicated by Professor JAMES GEIKIE, D.C.L., LL.D., F.RB.S. i(MS. received March 16,1914. Read May 4, 1914. Issued separately October 3, 1914.) [Plate XXXVL] INTRODUCTION. The specimens described in this paper were collected by Dr J. H. Harvey Pirie, B.Sc., M.B., geologist to the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, during a short visit paid to Gough Island on the homeward voyage of the Scotea from the Antarctic seas in 1904. The island is not often visited, and the only previous account of the rocks is by Professor L. V. Prrsson,* who described a series of beach pebbles collected by the captain of a whaling vessel. Among those Professor Prrsson noted two varieties of basalt, trachytic tufts, and a trachytic obsidian carrying olivine, and shown by chemical analysis to be of phonolitoid type. With the exception of a small fragment of limestone, the rocks in the Scotia collection are all igneous. They were obtained in the neighbourhood of the usual landing-place, the mouth of a small glen on the eastward side of the island. They include soda trachytes, trachydolerites, basalts, an essexite, and tufts. LAVAS. The lavaform rocks fall readily into two well-marked groups—trachytes and trachydolerites. The former are characterised by their abundant development of anorthoclase felspar ; the latter are more basic types, in which olivine is always present, and in which lime-soda felspars are accompanied by a varying amount of albite and albite-oligoclase. A. Alkalt Trachytes. The alkali trachytes comprise three distinct types:—(a) biotite trachyte, (b) sodalite trachyte, and (c) egerine-augite trachyte. (a) Biotite trachyte [G. 5,+ G. 12, G. 19]-—The rocks of this group were all * American Journal of Science, 1893, p. 380. + The numbers refer to specimens in the museums of the Scottish Oceanographical Laboratory and the University of Edinburgh. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L. PART II. (NO. 13). 56 « 398 DR ROBERT CAMPBELL ON obtained im situ. They vary in colour from grey-brown to dark reddish-brown, and in the hand specimens phenocrysts of felspar, biotite, and less frequently augite are seen embedded in a compact felspathic groundmass. The felspar phenocrysts in thin section have a sanidine-like habit. They are, as a rule, much corroded, and often show a marginal zone of late growth rich in inclusions of magnetite and granular augite. Among the inclusions may be noted also crystals of biotite, needles of apatite, and fluid cavities, the last often arranged in lines parallel to the 100 cleavage of the mineral. The crystals show variable double refraction and fine microcline twinning (Pl. XXXVI. fig. 1); their mean refractive index is about 1°529. They are referred, therefore, to anorthoclase. This determination was confirmed by the values of the extinction angles on cleavage flakes. Bending of the crystals is not uncommon, and secondary limonite-hematite has been deposited along their cracks and cleavages. The predominating femic phenocrysts are biotites, pleochroic from lght yellow to deep red, brown, and black, and enclosing small zircons and apatites. The biotites invariably show evidence of resorption, partial or complete. When the crystal has been entirely resorbed it either retains its original form or has undergone disintegra- tion. A green non-dichroic augite also occurs sparingly in euhedral crystals, which sometimes exhibit simple twinning on 100. They enclose small needles of apatite and iron oxides, and rarely crystals of biotite. The groundmass shows normal trachytic texture, and consists chiefly of laths of soda sanidine, along with a small development of granular augite and mag- netite. Zircon and apatite occur as accessory minerals. (b) Sodalite trachyte [G. 14]—The collection includes one specimen of sodalite trachyte—a well-rounded stream boulder, greenish-grey in colour, and possessing a noticeable waxy lustre. The rock is sparingly microporphyritic, with egerine- augite, magnetite, and zircon—not infrequently aggregated together—sodalite, and brown apatite. The groundmass is holocrystalline and trachytic in texture, its chief constituent being simply-twinned laths of anorthoclase felspar. A colourless isotropic mineral whose refractive index is much lower than that of anorthoclase occurs in abundance both interstitially and in broad plates enclosing minute felspars in micropoecilitic fashion (Pl. XXXVI. fig. 2). Treatment of a thin section with a very dilute solution of HNOg and AgNOg confirmed the supposition that the mineral was sodalite. The ferromagnesian mineral of the groundmass is eegerine-augite, with the ragged ophitic habit usual in the alkali trachytes. The accessory constituents include zircon, widely disseminated in characteristic euhedral crystals, apatite in thin colourless needles, and magnetite. (c) Atgerine-augite trachyte |G. 8].—Not unlike the sodalite trachyte in appear- ance on fresh fracture are several angular and subangular blocks of alkali trachyte collected by Dr Pirie from a mass of volcanic agglomerate. The specimens have ROCKS FROM GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC. 399 a thick cream-coloured crust of decomposition products, streaked in places with red iron oxides. The rock consists essentially of a holocrystalline trachytic aggregate of anortho- clase, egerine-augite, and an undetermined mineral which in some respects resembles lavenite. It is sparingly microporphyritic with titaniferous magnetite, zircon, and brown dichroic apatite, and an occasional phenocryst of the undetermined mineral has also been noted (Pl. XXXVI. figs. 3 and 4). The rock is remarkably rich in zircon, and it contains as additional accessory constituents magnetite, colourless needles of apatite, and a little interstitial sodalite. The predominating mineral is anorthoclase in simply-twinned crystals with characteristic denticulate edges. Next in abundance is egerine-augite, pleochroic in grass-green and yellowish-green tints, in elongated prismatic crystals and irregular ophitic intergrowths with felspar. In almost equal amount is a mineral which has not been determined. In its pleochroism, crystal form, strength of double refraction, and optically negative character it comes near Javenite; it differs from the latter, however, in refractive index («=1°78), in the absence of twinning, and in its ready solubility in HCl. A detailed description of this interesting, and probably new, mineral is deferred until a complete chemical analysis has been made. B. Trachydolerites. Although differing from one another in some respects, the specimens obtained from four basic lava flows possess in common certain characters which justify their classification as trachydolerites, that term being used in its restricted sense for the effusive representatives of an essexitic magma. The most acid variety [G. 2] is a porous ashy-grey rock with scattered pheno- erysts of basic plagioclase, augite, olivine, skeletal ilmenite, and apatite. The plagioclase crystals contain inclusions of the groundmass, and are twinned on the Carlsbad, albite, and pericline laws. Their mean refractive index is 1°563, a value which indicates that they belong to labradorite-bytownite (Ab, Ans). Symmetrical extinction angles in sections cut at right angles to 010 confirm that determina- tion. The augites, greenish-brown in thin section, are euhedral and occasionally exhibit lamellar twinning. The olivines are in rounded crystals showing incipient serpentinisation. The porous fine-grained groundmass consists of plagioclase, granular augite, and iron oxides. Minute laths of oligoclase in fluxional arrangement form the most conspicuous feature ; but between the laths there is a very considerable development of albite and albite-oligoclase, the last product of crystallisation, partly in euhedral erystals, but for the most part as an anhedral crystalline cement in which the other constituents are embedded. The most basic example [G. 4] is a grey vesicular lava sparingly porphyritic with 400 DR ROBERT CAMPBELL ON olivine, plagioclase, ilmenite, and brownish-green augite. - Olivine is in much greater abundance than in the other trachydolerites, and occurs in a second generation of small crystals in the groundmass. The olivines are sometimes quite fresh, some- times completely replaced by pale brownish-red “iddingsite.” Ilmenite is found in large plates and skeletal growths, in part enclosed in the porphyritic olivines, in part moulded in the felspars. The plagioclase phenocrysts are not numerous, and are slightly more basic than in the other varieties. Extinction angles determined in sections cut at right angles to 010, and showing Carlsbad and albite twinning, prove that the felspar is, in part at least, a labradorite-bytownite with the composition Ab, An; Not infrequently the crystals are surrounded by a narrow zone more acid in character and crowded with inclusions. The groundmass consists chiefly of stout laths of labradorite, thin laths of oligoclase-andesine, olivine, and granular augite, along with accessory iron oxides and apatite. The interstitial alkali felspar is in much smaller amount, and the eroundmass is more coarsely crystalline than in the acid variety. The two remaining specimens of trachydolerite [G. 6 and G. 7] differ from the types already described in being conspicuously porphyritic with glassy plagioclase (labradorite-bytownite), augite, and olivine (Pl. XXXVI. fig. 5). They contain also microporphyritic crystals of apatite and ilmenite. G. 7 is very rich in brown dichroic apatite, similar to the brown apatite of the trachytes; in G. 6 the apatites are also numerous, but are colourless. Glomeroporphyritic aggregates of olivine, apatite, and ilmenite are not uncommon. Their groundmass is intermediate in character between those of the acid and basic types. It consists for the most part of laths of oligoclase and oligoclase- andesine, granules of greenish non-dichroic augite, iron oxides, and thin needles of apatite, together with a matrix of anhedral albite and albite-oligoclase. A small amount of residual glass is present in G. 6. The trachydolerites agree in all possessing in varying degree a considerable development of a crystalline “cement” of alkali or alkali-rich felspar, which is untwinned, and has a mean refractive index well below that of the Canada Balsam of the slides. In order to ascertain to which variety of felspar the “cement” belonged, it was separated from the other constituents in the powdered rocks, and its refractive indices compared with those of oils of known refraction. It was found that in all the specimens it consisted of albite and albite-oligoclase. Hxamination of several fragments in convergent lght revealed their optically positive character. None of the felspar observed had refractive indices so low as those of orthoclase and anorthoclase. Glassy basalts (2 trachydolerites). A rounded stream boulder of a vesicular lava [G. 15] contains numerous pheno- crysts of olivine, titanaugite, and basic plagioclase in a groundmass of brown glass ROCKS FROM GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC. 401 containing microlites of plagioclase and augite. This rock resembles the vitrophyric basalts from Tristan d’Acunha described by RENaRD.* A bright red specimen [G. 10], with conspicuous phenocrysts of plagioclase, proves on microscopic examination to be a highly decomposed glassy basalt. INTRUSIONS. Intrusive rocks are represented by specimens of (a) tachylite, (b) basalt, and (c) essexite. (a) Tachylite—A tachylite [G. 9] was collected from the chilled margin of one of the narrow dykes which traverse the lava series. The hand specimen shows small scattered phenocrysts of hornblende and plagioclase in a very fine-grained groundmass, which is crowded with narrow slit-like vesicles orientated parallel to a selvage of black glass. In thin section the rock is seen to consist of a pale brown glass containing crystals of basic plagioclase, brown hornblende, ilmenite, and apatite, along with skeletal growth forms of olivine and plagioclase, and minute microlites of a mineral with strong double refraction, probably a pyroxene. (b) Basalt.—A specimen [G. 11] collected from another small dyke is a fine- grained ashy-grey basalt, conspicuously porphyritic with basic labradorite and bytownite. Phenocrysts of corroded olivine, brownish euhedral augite, and iron oxides are also present. The groundmass consists of laths of labradorite, prismatic crystals of brown augite, iron oxides, and apatite, together with some interstitial alkali felspar. Although it differs from these in the preponderance of basic plagioclase, the presence of the characteristic “cement” of alkali felspar suggests that this dyke rock is related in origin to the trachydolerite lavas. (c) Esseaite.—Perhaps the most interesting intrusive rock collected by Dr Prrie is a coarsely crystalline essexite, strongly porphyritic with augite in euhedral and broken crystals averaging 4-inch in diameter. The large augites enclose numerous yellow rounded olivines and occasional laths of plagioclase. The groundmass is a ereyish-brown, even-grained, holocrystalline aggregate, chiefly of olivine, augite, and felspar. In thin section the augite has the purplish-violet colour with distinct pleochroism characteristic of titanaugite. The porphyritic crystals are sometimes deeper in tint towards their margins, but the zonal structure is not well marked. In addition to enclosures of olivine and plagioclase, they contain gas and liquid inclusions, often arranged in bands. Simple twinning on 100 is common, and lamellar and cruciform twins are also found. The groundmass augite is also a titanaugite occurring in euhedral and subhedral crystals. The predominating felspar is plagioclase, in broad laths occasionally showing zonary structure. The values of symmetrical extinction angles in sections cut at * Bull. Acad. Roy. de Belgique, 1885 (3), ix., No. 6. 402 DR ROBERT CAMPBELL ON right angles to 010, and estimation of mean refractive indices by comparison with oils of known refraction, prove that for the most part it ranges from medium labra- dorite to bytownite. Along with the basic plagioclase, however, occurs in fair amount, partly in interstitial patches and partly as an outer zone round the broad laths, felspar with refractive indices lower than that of the Canada Balsam of the slides. This felspar was found to be mostly albite and albite-oligoclase (as in the trachydolerites), orthoclase occurring very sparingly. The rock is rich also in titaniferous magnetite in elongated lath-like crystals, most of which have crystallised later than the augite and are occasionally moulded on the felspar laths. Apatite in elongated needles is widely disseminated, particularly in the patches of alkali felspar. The augite phenocrysts are much in excess of the groundmass, which is made up of olivine, augite, felspar, and iron oxides in approximately equal amounts. (Pl) XXXVI tiet6)) The Gough Island essexite resembles the pyroxene-rich varieties of Norwegian essexite described by BréccER ;* it is, however, poorer in augite and richer in olivine, and it is free from biotite. In the relative proportions of augite and olivine it approaches very closely the porphyritic essexite of Lennoxtown, but nepheline has not been observed in the Gough Island rock. TUFFS. Pyroclastic rocks are represented in the collection by trachytic tuffs varying in colour from yellow to greyish-brown. One of the most compact specimens was sectioned. It was found to consist largely of fragments of colourless spongy glass, along with numerous lapilli of yellow obsidian and vesicular glassy basalt, and broken crystals of olivine, augite, sanidine, and basic plagioclase. A large slagey lapillus of glassy basalt obtained from one of the tuffaceous deposits has some of its vesicles infilled with chalcedony. LIMESTONE. The only sedimentary rock is an arenaceous limestone containing remains of various calcareous organisms, conspicuous among which are spines and plates of echinoderms, together with subangular grains of plutonic quartz and occasional flakes of muscovite embedded in a calcareous cement. The specimen, unfortunately, is merely part of a beach boulder, and may have been carried to the island either by human agency or by floating ice. Had it been found in place, one would have been tempted to speculate on its probable bearing on the existence of a former land connection between South Africa and South America, * RosensuscH, Mikroskopische Physiographie, 1896, ii. p. 250. + Mem, Geol. Survey : Geology of Glasgow District, 1911, p. 129. Oe Ee ROCKS FROM GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC. 403 CoMPARISON WITH ROCKS FROM OTHER VOLCANIC ISLANDS IN THE Soutu ATLANTIC, The wonderful uniformity in petrographical characters of the eruptive rocks of the islands of the Mid-Atlantic rise has been emphasised by Prior.* In Ascension, in St Helena, and in Tristan d’Acunha, for example, basalts are associated with alkali-rich phonolitic rocks. In Gough Island the association is similar. The pebble of trachytic obsidian (phlegrose) described and analysed by Pirsson + is strongly alkaline, with soda in excess of potash. The alkali trachytes, with their predominant anorthoclase, are decidedly soda-rich, and may be paralleled with the non-porphyritic trachytes of Ponza type from Ascension described by Renarp.{ The trachydolerites and essexite, too, as is shown by their high content of soda felspar, have been derived from an alkali magma rich in soda. The trachydoleritic affinities of the basalt dykes of Gough Island have already been pointed out, and very probably the glassy basalts and tachylite are similar in composition. ReEnarp§ gives an analysis of a tachylite from the Tristan d’Acunha group in which Si0g=48'09, NagO=5'06, and Kg0=2'88. The trachyandesitic character of some of the augite andesites || from the same group is evidenced by the fact that their phenocrysts of plagioclase are accompanied by others ofsanidine. Nepheline-bearing rocks have not so far been found on Gough Island, nor have soda rhyolites as is the case in Ascension, but it has to be remembered that the specimens collected by Dr Prrte were all obtained from a small area. Further collections will in all likelihood yield other rock types. There can be no doubt, however, that the present collection proves that the rocks of Gough Island have all been derived from a soda-rich alkali magma, and that in all probability they have had a common origin with the rocks of the other volcanic islands in the Mid- Atlantic rise. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. In conclusion, I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to Dr Joun SS. Frerv, F.R.S., for much valuable advice, and to Mr W. F. P. M‘Liytock, B.Sc., who has very kindly given me opportunities of studying similar rocks in the Royal Scottish Museum. I desire also to express my thanks to the Executive Committee of the Carnegie Trust for defraying the expenses of illustrating this paper. * Min. Mag., vol. xiii. p. 261. + Loc. ctt., p. 382. t Bull, Mus. Roy. @hist. nat. Belgique, 1887, v. 5. § Loc. cit., p. 210. || Loid., p. 219. 404 ROCKS FROM GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVI. Photomicrographs of Rocks. Fig. 1. Biotite trachyte [G. 12], magnified 35 diameters, nicols crossed. The groundmass of the rock is a holocrystalline aggregate consisting chiefly of soda sanidine with subordinate augite and magnetite. The large phenocryst is anorthoclase, partially enclosing a crystal of biotite. Fig. 2. Sodalite trachyte [G. 14], magnified 35 diameters, nicols crossed. A holocrystalline aggregate of anorthoclase, egerine-augite, magnetite, and interstitial sodalite. The dark area to the right of the centre is sodalite enclosing small felspars micropoecilitically. Fig. 3. Agerine-augite trachyte [G. 8], magnified 23 diameters. The dark crystals are mostly an undetermined mineral resembling lavenite. The rest of the rock is chiefly anorthoclase and egerine-augite. Fig. 4. gerine-augite trachyte [G. 8], magnified 35 diameters, nicols crossed. From the same slide as fig. 3. The trachytic texture is well seen. The small phenocryst belongs to the same undetermined mineral as the dark crystals in fig. 3. Fig. 5. Trachydolerite [G. 7], magnified 35 diameters, nicols crossed. Phenocrysts of olivine, labradorite-bytownite, and ilmenite in a holocrystalline groundmass consisting of laths of oligoclase and oligoclase-andesine, granules of augite, iron oxides, and apatite needles, together with a “cement” of albite and albite-oligoclase. Fig. 6. Essexite [G. 13], magnified 20 diameters. The large crystal in the lower right-hand quadraut is titanaugite. On either side are colourless olivines. The rest of the photograph shows a holocrystalline aggregate of olivine, titanaugite, iron oxides, and basic plagioclase, with subordinate interstitial alkali felspar. ms. Roy. Soc. Edin’. Vol. L.—Piate XXXVI. CAMPBELL: Rocks FRomM GouGca ISLAND obell, photo, M‘Farlane & Erskine, Edin. 7 i +h nl < 1% j * - - -~. ee | — ff ' 1 Lt . | 2 ' = | ‘ hie seen Aaa) ' 1 ‘ iv * ( 405 ) XIV.—On a New Species of Sclerocheilus, with a Revision of the Genus. By J. H. Ashworth, D.Sc., Lecturer in Invertebrate Zoology in the University of Edinburgh.* (MS. received May 4, 1914. Read May 25, 1914. Issued separately July 2, 1915.) [Plate XXXVIL.] CONTENTS. PAGE PAGE Description of the Specimen collected in Scotia Bay, Observations on a Specimen of “ Humenia oculata” 415 South Orkneys. 5 : : : , . 405 | Sclerocheilus Grube,emend. . P : : . 418 Systematic Position of the Specimen from Scotia Bay 409 Sclerochetlus minutus Grube. d . 419 Observations on Sclerocheilus minutus Grube . . 410 Sclerocheilus antarcticus n. sp. . : ‘ . 421 Observations on Sclerocheilus pacificus J. P, Moore . 414 | Description of Plate : : ; c a . 422 Sclerocheilus cxecus Saint-Joseph . F ¢ . 415 The Polychzete family Scalibregmidee comprises seven genera, the limits and inter- relationships of which are, however, still imperfectly known. The present paper results from a detailed study of one of these genera, a new species of which is de- scribed, chiefly from a specimen collected in Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, and entrusted to me for examination by Dr W.S8. Bruce. 5 DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMEN COLLECTED IN Scotia Bay, SourH ORKNEYS. This specimen, the only Scalibregmid found by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, was dredged on a stony bottom in ten fathoms at Station 325, in Scotia Bay, South Orkneys (lat. 60° 43’ 42" S.; long. 44° 38° 33” W.), in August 1903. The worm, which is yellowish brown in colour (in alcohol), is 19 mm. long. The anterior portion is broad ; the maximum breadth, 3 mm., is reached about the level of the 10th segment; from this region the worm tapers gradually to the anal seg- ment. The dorsal surface of the worm is strongly convex; the ventral surface is flattened, and there is a well-marked depression which extends along the mid-ventral line from the 2nd cheetiferous segment almost to the anus. The prostomium is drawn out at each side into a stout, bluntly conical process (Pl. XXXVII, fig. 1). On the middle region of the dorsal surface of the prostomium there is a A-shaped area of dark-brown pigment representing the eyes. The point of the A is median, and is situated near the centre of the prostomium ; each limb of this pigmented area passes obliquely backwards and down the side of the prostomium. The peristomium consists of a single, achetous ring, which is incomplete ven- trally, where it forms the antero-lateral borders of the mouth (figs. 1, 2). * A grant in aid of the expenses incurred during this research has been received from the Earl of Moray Endow- ment of the University of Edinburgh. The cost of the woodcuts and of the reproduction of the figures on the plate has been defrayed by the Carnegie Trust for the Universities of Scotland. TRANS. ROY. SOC. EDIN., VOL. L, PART II (NO, 14). 57 406 DR J. H. ASHWORTH There are 43 cheetiferous segments, the last of which is small and evidently recently formed ; this is succeeded by the anal segment or pygidium (fig. 5). The first chetiferous segment is narrow mid-dorsally, wider at the sides, 2.e. where the parapodia are borne, and enlarged mid-ventrally, just behind the mouth, to form a well-marked “ under-lip,” the front margin of which is lobate—about six lobes being indicated (fig. 2). This seement consists of two annuli, the anterior of which is much the larger and bears the parapodia. The second chetiferous segment (figs. 1, 2) is tri-annulate, there being a small ring in front of and another behind the cheetiferous annulus. These smaller rings are visible on the dorsal and ventral aspects, but are not seen in the lateral view of the worm. The third chetiferous segment has a similar constitution, but the fourth is composed of four rings—the cheetiferous annulus together with two rings in front and one behind. All the succeeding segments up to and including the 41st are also four-ringed ; the annulation is much less clear in the next segment, and the 43rd segment is a single narrow ring bearing very small parapodia. In the fifth and succeeding cheetiferous segments the annuli are subdivided on the dorsal surface * by antero-posterior furrows, so that the skin is marked out into more or less quadrangular areas, as is the case in other Scalibregmide. This sculpturing of the skin is well marked up to about the 23rd segment, but in the following segments is exhibited only by the cheetiferous annull. The anal segment or pygidium is a short ring on which ventrally there are two slight enlargements (one on each side of the middle line), of which the left bears a slender cirrus about ‘5 mm. in length (fig. 5). Other cirri have been lost; it is not possible to say with certainty how many, but probably the original number was four. There is no trace of gills in this specimen. Parapodia. The notopodia and neuropodia of the first segment are little elevated above the general surface, but in the following segments there is right and left a prominent elevation extending over the whole lateral region of the sezment from each of which the notopodium and neuropodium arise. From about the seventh segment onwards the raised area presents papilliform elevations the epidermis of which is glandular. There is usually one of these papillee anterior and another posterior to the lip of each cheetal sac, that just behind the lip of the cheetal sac being especially well marked, forming in most of the segments a prominent, rounded knob. A cirrus is present on the posterior face of the 18th left neuropodium, and on all the succeeding neuropodia up to and including the 40th. Cirri were probably originally present also on the 41st and 42nd segments, the parapodia of which are * This subdivision of the annuli is feebly marked on the ventral surface. ON A NEW SPECIES OF SCLEROCHEILUS. slightly damaged and no longer bear cirri. In the 18th and 19th cheetiferous seements the neuropodial cirrus is a short conical process, ‘05-08 mm. in length; but those of the succeeding seg- ments (fig. 6) rapidly increase in length, so that the cirri of the 33rd to 40th segments are finger-shaped and ‘25-3 mm. long (fig. 5). There are no notopodial cirri. A lateral sense-organ is present in each parapodium imme- diately ventral to the base of the notopodium ; but as it is small, and usually hidden in a depression, it can be seen satisfactorily only in sections. The surface of the organ which bears the sense- hairs is oval in outline, and its longer diameter is not more than about 40u. This area is sunk below the level of the surrounding epidermis of the papilla on which the organ is situated. Ventral to the papilla bearing the sense-organ is a larger eleva- tion the epidermis of which is glandular (fig. 6). Chetez. The first notopodium bears chetze of three or four different kinds, the relative positions and detailed structure of which have been studied as far as has been possible on the single intact notopodium available. (i) There is an anterior series of about ten almost straight cheete (text-fig. 1, A), approximately ‘5 mm. long and 9-10u in maximum diameter. Hach of these cheetze tapers rapidly in its distal fourth to a fine point, and the preparations indicate that the tips of these cheetze project little beyond the lips of the cheetal sac. (ii) Close behind the cheetze just described is a series of about fifteen stronger cheetze, each bent in a characteristic manner (text-fig. 1, B). These cheetz are “6-65 mm. long, and their maximum diameter is 10-124. Hach cheeta tapers somewhat abruptly at its free end, and, when unworn, has along both sides, for a distance of “15 mm. behind the fine-pointed tip, a narrow and very delicate lamina which readily breaks up into a close-set series of minute, pointed processes, so that this region of the cheta appears to be finely spinous. It is possible that these cheetee are really in two rows, an anterior row of about A B Cc D 407 TrExt-Fic. 1.—Chete from the first noto- podium of the specimen from Scotia Bay. (x 200.) 408 DR J. H. ASHWORTH ten and a posterior row of about five; but if so, the two rows stand very close together. (iii) Posterior to the foregoing are tapering, capillary cheetee, which appear to be